Lancer Evolutioniv

WORKSHOP MANUAL
EVOLUTION-IV
EVOLUTION-V
Pub. No. S9806CNCP9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Engine Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
EVOLUTION-IV Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
EVOLUTION-V Engine Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intake and Exhaust ............
14
15
WORKSHOP MANUAL Engine Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Engine and Emission Control . . . . 17
FOREWORD Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
This Workshop Manual contains procedures for Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .
service mechanics, including removal, disassembly, 22
inspection, adjustment, reassembly and Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
installation. Figures taken from registration 26
documents are given in metric units only. All other
figures are given in SI units with metric units in
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
brackets. Use the following manuals in combination
with this manual as required. Power Plant Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
TECHNICAL INFORMATION MANUAL Front Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
N9806CNCP9
Rear Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Service Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
All information, illustrations and product Parking Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
descriptions contained in this manual are current
36
as at the time of publication. We, however, reserve Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
the right to make changes at any time without prior
37
notice or obligation. Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
July 1998 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Chassis Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Electrical Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

00-1
GENERAL
CONTENTS
MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

00-2 GENERAL – Models
MODELS
<LANCER EVOLUTION-IV>
Model Class Model Grade Engine model Transmission Fuel supply
code code year model system
E-CN9A SNDF ’97 RS 4G63 (2,000-DOHC – W5M51 Electronically

16 valves-intercooler (4WD-5M/T) controlled fuel
SRGF ’97 GSR turbo) injection (MPI)
<LANCER EVOLUTION-V>
Model Class Model Grade Engine model Transmission Fuel supply
code code year model system
GF-CP9A SNDF ’98 EVOLUTION-V RS 4G63 (2,000-DOHC – W5M51 MPI

valves intercooler
16 valves-intercooler (4WD 5M/T)
(4WD-5M/T)
SNGF ’98 EVOLUTION-V turbo)
GSR
Applicable serial numbers

E-CN9A: CN9A – 0000001 Y
GF-CP9A: CP9A – 0000001 Y

11-1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CRANKSHAFT PULLEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SEALANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT

OIL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
OIL PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
ENGINE ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. Drive Belt Tension Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2. Auto Tensioner Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 CYLINDER HEAD GASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3. Lash Adjuster Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4. Lash Adjuster Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 TIMING BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5. Ignition Timing Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ENGINE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6. Idle Speed Check and Idle Mixture Check 7
7. Compression Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8. Manifold Vacuum Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

11-2 ENGINE – Service Specifications / Sealants / Special Tools
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS
Items Standard value Limit
Basic ignition timing 5_ BTDC ± 3_ –
Ignition timing (at idle) Approx. 5_ BTDC –
Idle speed rpm 850 ± 50 –
CO contents % 0.6 or less –
HC contents ppm 300 or less –
Compression pressure kg/cm2 – rpm 11.5 – 250 Min. 9.7 – 250
Compression pressure difference of all cylinders kg/cm2 – Max. 1.0
Intake manifold vacuum kPa {mmHg} – Min. 55 {410}
Cylinder head bolt shank length mm – 99.4
SEALANTS
Items Specified sealants
Rocker cover Semi-drying sealant: THREEBOND 1207D [MZ 100168] (containing 150 g)
Oil pan Semi-drying sealant: THREEBOND 1207F [MZ 100191] (containing 150 g)
NOTE:
Given in [ ] are MITSUBISHI GENUINE PART numbers.
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Number Name Use
MD998782 Valve lifter set Replacing the lash adjuster
MB990767 End yoke holder D Holding the crankshaft pulley

D Holding the camshaft sprocket

ENGINE – Special Tools 11-3

MD998719 Crankshaft pulley D Holding the crankshaft pulley
holder pin D Holding the camshaft sprocket
MD998715 Pulley holder pin
MD998713 Camshaft oil seal Pressfitting the camshaft oil seal

installer
MD998727 Oil pan remover Removing the oil pan
MD998781 Flywheel stopper Securing the flywheel or drive plate
MD998776 Crankshaft rear oil Pressfitting the crankshaft rear oil seal
seal installer
MB990938 Handle
MD998382 Crankshaft front oil Installing the crankshaft front oil seal
seal installer
MD998285 Crankshaft front oil

seal guide

11-4 ENGINE – Special Tools / Engine Adjustments

MB991654 Cylinder head bolt Removing and reinstalling the cylinder head
wrench bolt
MD998767 Tensioner pulley Timing belt tension adjustment

socket wrench
Recommended Engine lifter Supporting the engine assembly during

tool MZ203826 removal and installation of the transmission
by Anzen
Jidosha or
MZ203827 by
Banzai
MD991453 Engine hanger
assembly
ENGINE ADJUSTMENTS
1. DRIVE BELT TENSION CHECK
Auto tensioner
NOTE
Use of the auto tensioner eliminates the need for belt tension
adjustment. Check that the indicator mark on the auto
tensioner is in the range of A shown.
If it is outside the specified range (i.e., in range of B shown),
replace the drive belt.
(For the removal and installation of the drive belt, refer to
P.11-9.)
Indicator mark
B A

ENGINE – Engine Adjustments 11-5
2. AUTO TENSIONER CHECK
(1) Stop the engine from the idle speed and check that the
belt rests within the auto tensioner pulley width.
(2) Remove the drive belt.
Tool mounting hole
(For the removal of the drive belt, refer to P.11-9.)
(3) Fit a spinner handle or similar tool into the tool mounting
hole of the auto tensioner and turn the tensioner clockwise
and counterclockwise to ensure that it does not bind.
(4) If step (1) or (3), or both, have been checked abnormally,
replace the auto tensioner.
(5) Reinstall the drive belt.
3. LASH ADJUSTER CHECK
NOTE
Good If an unusual knocking noise can be heard immediately after
the engine has started or while it is running and if that is
probably attributable to the lash adjuster, make the following
checks.
MAX
(1) Check the engine oil and add or change oil as necessary.
MIN
NOTE
(1) If the engine oil level is low, air is taken in through
the oil screen, entering the oil passage.
(2) If the oil level is too high, the cranks agitate oil causing
oil to trap a large amount of air.
(3) Air does not easily separate from a deteriorated oil
that can contain an increased amount of air.
When air trapped in oil for these reasons gets into the
high-pressure chamber of the lash adjuster, the air in
the high-pressure chamber is compressed to shrink the
lash adjuster excessively while the valve is opening,
resulting in an unusual noise occurring. This is the same
High-pressure symptom developing when the valve clearance is adjusted
chamber
to an excessive value.
The problem in this case is gone when air is released
from the lash adjuster.
(2) Start the engine and carry out several cycles (10 or less)
of mild racing*.
If the noise is gone after racing, it indicates that air has
been released from the high-pressure chamber of the
lash adjuster, restoring the lash adjuster to normal
operating conditions.
*: Gradually (extending over a 30-sec. period) increase
the engine speed from idle speed to 3,000 r/min and
then reduce it down to the idle speed gradually
(extending over a 30-sec. period).
NOTE
(1) If the vehicle is parked on a slope for a long time,
the amount of oil in the lash adjuster will decrease,
causing air to get into the high-pressure chamber
when the engine is started.
(2) After the vehicle has been parked for a long time,
oil drains out of the oil passage and it takes a long
time for the oil to reach the lash adjuster. This can
cause air to get into the high-pressure chamber.

11-6 ENGINE – Engine Adjustments
Timing belt side (3) If the noise is not eliminated by racing, follow these steps
A A B B to check the lash adjuster.
a. Stop the engine.
b. Bring no. 1 cylinder to TDC on the compression stroke.
c. Push the rocker arms indicated by arrow A on the
left to see if they go down.
d. Slowly turn the crankshaft clockwise 360_.
e. Perform the same step as step c for rocker arms
indicated by arrow B.
A B A B
f. Push the part of the rocker arm which contacts the

top of the lash adjuster. If the rocker arm can be
easily moved down to the bottom, the lash adjuster
is defective, requiring replacement.
When the lash adjuster is replaced, be sure first to
bleed the lash adjuster of air before installation. Then,
perform steps a through e to ensure that no abnormal
symptoms are noted.
NOTE
(1) The leak-down test is an effective means to
accurately determine if the lash adjuster is
operational or not.
(2) For the leak-down test and bleeding procedures,
refer to ENGINE WORKSHOP MANUAL.
If the rocker arm is felt binding and cannot be
pushed downward as you push it, the lash adjuster
is operational. Check for other possible causes
for the noise.
(4) Lash adjuster replacement

Caution
From the cylinder from which the lash adjuster is
to be removed, turn the crankshaft to lower the piston,
as the valve contacts the piston when pushed down.
A rocker arm cannot be removed if it is lifted by the
cam. If this is the case, turn the crankshaft so that
the arm is not lifted.
MD998782 a. Using the special tool, push the valve downward to
remove the roller rocker arm.
b. Remove the lash adjuster from the cylinder head.
c. Mount a brandnew lash adjuster which has been bled
of air in the cylinder head.
d. Using the special tool, lower the valve and install
the roller rocker arm.
NOTE
To mount the roller rocker arm, first place the pivot
side of the rocker arm on the lash adjuster, then push
down the valve; next, place the slipper side of the
rocker arm on the valve system side.
MD998782

ENGINE – Engine Adjustments 11-7
4. LASH ADJUSTER REPLACEMENT
Refer to (4) of the preceding paragraph.
5. IGNITION TIMING CHECK

Check that ignition timing is at the standard value.
Standard value: approx. 5_BTDC
NOTE
Ignition timing is variable within about ±7_, even under normal
operating.
6. IDLE SPEED CHECK AND IDLE MIXTURE

CHECK
(1) Run the engine at 2,000 to 3,000 r/min for 2 minutes.
(2) Check the CO and HC contents at idle.
Standard value
CO contents: 0.6% or less
HC contents: 300 ppm or less
7. COMPRESSION PRESSURE CHECK

(1) Before inspection, check that the engine oil, starter and
battery are normal. In addition, set the vehicle to the
pre-inspection condition.
(2) Remove all of the spark plugs.
(3) Disconnect the crank angle sensor connector.
NOTE
Crank angle
Doing this will prevent the engine-ECU from carrying out
sensor connector ignition and fuel injection.
(4) Cover the spark plug hole with a shop towel etc., and
after the engine has been cranked, check that no foreign
material is adhering to the shop towel.
Caution
(1) Keep away from the spark plug hole when
cranking.
(2) If compression is measured with water, oil, fuel,
etc., that has come from cracks inside the cylinder,
these materials will become heated and will gush
out from the spark plug hole, which is dangerous.

11-8 ENGINE – Engine Adjustments
(5) Set compression gauge to one of the spark plug holes.

Compression gauge
(6) Crank the engine with the throttle valve fully open and
measure the compression pressure.
Standard value
(at engine speed of 250 r/min): 11.5 kg/cm2
Limit (at engine speed of 250 r/min): 9.7 kg/cm2
(7) Measure the compression pressure for all the cylinders,
and check that the pressure differences of the cylinders
are below the limit.
Limit: Max. 1.0 kg/cm2
(8) If there is a cylinder with compression or a compression
difference that is outside the limit, pour a small amount
of engine oil through the spark plug hole, and repeat
the operations in steps (5) through (7).
a. If the compression increases after oil is added, the
cause of the malfunction is a worn or damaged piston
ring and/or cylinder inner surface.
b. If the compression does not rise after oil is added,
the cause is a burnt or defective valve seat, or pressure
is leaking from the gasket.
(9) Connect the crank angle sensor connector.
(10)Install the spark plugs.
(11)Install the ignition coil and connect the ignition coil
connector.
(12)Erase the diagnosis codes by keeping the battery minus
(–) cable disconnected for more than 10 seconds.
NOTE
This will erase the diagnosis code resulting from the crank
angle sensor connector being disconnected.
8. MANIFOLD VACUUM CHECK

Vacuum gauge
(1) Before inspection, set the vehicle to the pre-inspection
condition.
(2) Connect a tachometer connector.
(3) Attach a three-way union to the vacuum hose between
the fuel pressure regulator valve and the intake manifold,
and connect a vacuum gauge.
Fuel pressure (4) Start the engine and check that idle speed is within
regulator valve
standard value.
Standard value: 850 ± 50 r/min
5. Check the manifold vacuum at idling.
Limit: Min. 55 kPa {410 mmHg}

ENGINE – Crankshaft Pulley 11-9
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Pre-removal Operation Post-installation Operation
D Under Cover Removal D Drive Belt Tension Adjustment (Refer to P.11-4.)
D Under Cover Installation
25 {2.5}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
AA" 1. Drive belt
2. Crankshaft pulley
REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

Auto tensioner AA" DRIVE BELT REMOVAL
(1) Align the hole in the auto tensioner bracket with that
in the arm and insert a screwdriver into the holes.
Hole in arm
Hole in bracket
Phillips
screwdriver

11-10 ENGINE – Camshaft and Camshaft Oil Seal
CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation
(1) Engine Coolant Draining and Refilling (4) Air Pipe Removal and Installation
(2) Air Hose C Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 – Air Control Valve.)
(Refer to GROUP 15 – Intercooler.) (5) Timing Belt Removal and Installation
(3) Spark Plug Cable and Ignition Coil Assembly Removal (Refer to P.11-21.)
and Installation
9 {0.9}
1
4
5 3
3.4 {0.35}
6
2
10 {1.0}
14
20 {2.0}
15
17 16
7
13
12
22 {2.2}
8
9
12 – 15 {1.2 – 1.5}
10
88 {9.0}
11
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Breather hose connection 9. Cam position sensor support
2. PCV hose connection 10. Semi-circular packing
3. Crank angle sensor bracket con- AA" "DA 11. Camshaft sprocket
nection "CA 12. Camshaft oil seal
4. Control harness connection "BA 13. Front cam cap
5. Rocker cover "BA 14. Rear cam cap
6. Radiator upper hose connection "BA 15. Cam cap
7. Cover "AA 16. Camshaft (exhaust side)
"EA 8. Cam position sensing cylinder "AA 17. Camshaft (intake side)

ENGINE – Camshaft and Camshaft Oil Seal 11-11
Grease and adhesive application points
26
10 mm
10 mm 10 mm
Timing belt side
Semi-drying sealant: THREEBOND 1207D
Lip
Engine oil
φ 3 mm
Semi-drying sealant: Timing belt side

THREEBOND 1207F Semi-drying sealant: THREEBOND 1207D

MB990767 AA" CAMSHAFT SPROCKET REMOVAL
MD998719
INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS

Camshaft sprocket side
"AA CAMSHAFT INSTALLATION
(1) Apply engine oil to the cams and journals of the camshaft.
Slit (2) Mount the camshaft on the cylinder head.
Caution
Make sure that the camshaft has a unique orientation
for installation, the intake side and exhaust side. The
exhaust camshaft has a slit in the rear end face.
Camshaft (exhaust side)

11-12 ENGINE – Camshaft and Camshaft Oil Seal
"BA CAM CAP / REAR CAP / FRONT CAM CAP

INSTALLATION
Approx. 12_ Dowel pin (1) Locate the camshaft dowel pins as illustrated.
Intake side Exhaust side
(2) Temporarily tighten cam cap in two to three steps, then

torque it to specification.
Tightening torque: 20 Nm {2.0 kgf@m}
"CA CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL INSTALLATION

(1) Apply engine oil to the entire periphery of the oil seal
lip.
(2) Pressfit the oil seal as shown.
MD998713
"DA CAMSHAFT SPROCKET INSTALLATION

As you did during removal, secure the camshaft sprocket
with the special tool and tighten bolt to specification.
"EA CAM POSITION SENSING CYLINDER

Dowel pin
Install the cam position sensing cylinder so that the ID paint
90_ on the cam position sensing cylinder is 90_ with respect to
the camshaft dowel pin as shown.
ID paint

ENGINE – Oil Pan 11-13
OIL PAN
(1) Under Cover Removal and Installation (3) Oil Level Gauge Removal and Installation
(2) Front Exhaust Pipe Removal and Installation (4) Engine Oil Draining and Supplying
(Refer to GROUP 15.)
Identification of bolt location
8 B 8 B
A
φ 4 mm
Groove
Bolt
hole B
B
A: 6 × 8 mm B
Semi-drying sealant: THREEBOND 1207D B: 6 × 10 mm
9 {0.9} 2
1
30 {3.1}
3
5
8
7
4 6 Washer
26 {2.6} assembled bolt
7 {0.7}
9 {0.9}
Flange bolt
39 {4.0} 10 {1.0}
39 – 44 {4.0 – 4.5}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Starter 5. Bell housing cover
2. Oil return pipe 6. Drain plug
"BA 3. Oil return pipe gasket "AA 7. Drain plug gasket
4. Engine oil cooler return pipe AA" 8. Oil pan

11-14 ENGINE – Oil Pan
MD998727 MD998727 REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

AA" OIL PAN REMOVAL

"AA DRAIN PLUG GASKET INSTALLATION
Drain plug gasket
Oil pan side
Install the drain plug gasket in the direction so that it faces
as shown in the illustration.
Printed portion
"BA OIL RETURN PIPE GASKET INSTALLATION
Install the gasket with the printed portion toward the oil pan.
Gasket

ENGINE – Crankshaft Oil Seal 11-15
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
4
127 – 137
{13.0 – 14.0}
3
2
1
3 5
Engine oil
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Crankshaft front oil seal removal Crankshaft rear oil seal removal
steps steps
D Timing belt and timing belt B D Transmission assembly
(Refer to P.11-21.) D Clutch cover and disc
D Crank angle sensor AA" "BA 4. Flywheel
(Refer to GROUP 16.) "AA 5. Crankshaft rear oil seal
1. Crankshaft sprocket B
2. Key
"CA 3. Crankshaft front oil seal

11-16 ENGINE – Crankshaft Oil Seal

AA" FLYWHEEL ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
Use the special tool to secure the flywheel assembly and
remove the bolts.
MD998781
Crankshaft INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS

rear oil seal
"AA CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL INSTALLATION
Crankshaft
(1) Apply a small mount of engine oil to the entire
MB990938
circumference of the oil seal lip.
(2) Install the oil seal with the special tool as far as the
chamfered position of the oil seal case as shown in the
illustration.
MB998776
"BA FLYWHEEL ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

Use the special tool to hold the flywheel in the same manner
as removal, and install the bolt. Tighten the bolts to the
specification.
Tightening torque: 127 – 137 Nm {13.0 – 14.0 kgf@m}
Oil seal "CA CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL INSTALLATION

Crankshaft
Apply a small amount of engine oil to the entire circumference
of the oil seal lip.
Pressfit the oil seal until it is flush with the chamfered end
of the oil pump case.
MD998382 MD998285
(Lubricate outer
circumference with oil)

ENGINE – Cylinder Head Gasket 11-17
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
(1) Fuel Discharge Prevention (1) Front Exhaust Pipe Installation
(2) Engine Oil Removal (Refer to GROUP 15.)
(3) Strut Tower Bar Removal (2) Thermostat Case Assembly Installation
(4) Timing Belt Removal (Refer to P.11-21.) (Refer to GROUP 14 – Water Hose Pipe.)
(5) Thermostat Case Assembly Removal (3) Engine Oil Filling
(Refer to GROUP 14 – Water Hose Pipe.) (4) Timing Belt Installation (Refer to P.11-21.)
(6) Front Exhaust Pipe Removal (Refer to GROUP 15.) (5) Strut Tower Bar Installation
(6) Accelerator Cable Adjustment
10 {1.0} 3 {0.3}
Delivery pipe
4
19 1
2
15 3 14
18
16
O-ring
Engine oil 5 {0.5}

18 9 {0.9}
10 17
6
8
5
9
3
8
13
11 12
8
12 – 15 {1.2 – 1.5}
7
20
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Center cover 11. Water hose connection
2. Accelerator cable connection 12. Oxygen sensor connector
3. Ignition coil connector 13. Injector connector
4. Ignition coil 14. Cam position sensor connector
5. Crank angle sensor connector 15. Coolant temperature sensor con-
6. Crank angle sensor bracket connector
nection 16. Water temperature gauge unit con-
7. Brake booster vacuum hose connector
nection 17. Control harness
8. Vacuum hose connection "DA 18. Fuel pipe pressure hose connection
9. TPS connector 19. Fuel return hose connection
10. ISC motor connector 20. Oil level gauge guide assembly

11-18 ENGINE – Cylinder Head Gasket
78 → 0 → 20 → +90_ → +90_
{8.0 → 0 → 2.0 → +90_ → +90_}
22
31 3.4 {0.35}
23
29
32 21
30
22 {2.2}
33 24
30 {3.1}
9 {0.9}
28 25
26
22
10 mm
27
10 mm 10 mm
10 mm 10 mm 22
9 {0.9} 30 {3.1}
23
Semi-drying sealant:
THREEBOND 1207D
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
21. PCV hose connection 28. Intake manifold stay
22. Rocker cover 29. Heater hose connection
23. Semi-circular packing 30. Alternator brace stay mounting bolt
24. Starter AA" "BA 31. Cylinder head bolt
25. Oil return pipe 32. Cylinder head assembly
"CA 26. Oil return pipe gasket "AA 33. Cylinder head gasket
27. Vacuum tank/solenoid valve/vacuum
hose assembly

ENGINE – Cylinder Head Gasket 11-19
AA" CYLINDER HEAD BOLT REMOVAL
Loosen the bolts in 2 or 3 steps in order of the numbers
shown in the illustration, and remove the cylinder head
assembly.
MB991654
Intake side Front of engine
Exhaust side

"AA CYLINDER HEAD GASKET INSTALLATION
(1) Wipe off all oil and grease from the gasket mounting
surface.
(2) Install so that the shapes of the cylinder head holes match
the shapes of the respective cylinder head gasket holes.
"BA CYLINDER HEAD BOLT INSTALLATION

Cylinder head bolt
(1) When installing the cylinder head bolts, the length below
the head of the bolts should be within the limit.
Washer If it is outside the limit, replace the bolts.
A (Engine Limit (A): 99.4 mm
oil)
(2) Apply a small amount of engine oil to the thread section
Cylinder and the washer of the cylinder head bolt.
head

11-20 ENGINE – Cylinder Head Gasket
(3) Tighten the bolts by the following procedure.

Step Operation
1 Tighten to 78 Nm {8.0 kgf@m} in the order shown in the
illustration.
2 Fully loosen in the reverse order of that shown in the
illustration.
3 Tighten to 20 Nm {2.0 kgf@m} in the order shown in the
MB991654
illustration.
4 Mark the head of the cylinder head bolt and cylinder head
by paint, then tighten 90_ of a turn in the order shown in
the illustration.
Intake side Front of engine 5 Tighten 90_ of a turn in the order shown in the illustration.
Check that the painted mark of the head bolt is lined up
with that of the cylinder head.
Caution
(1) Always make a tightening angle just 90_. If it is less
than 90_, the head bolt will be loosened.
(2) If it is more than 90_, remove the head bolt and repeat
Exhaust side the procedure from step 1.
Step 4 Step 5
90_ 90_
Painted mark Painted mark
"CA OIL RETURN PIPE GASKET INSTALLATION

Printed portion
Install the gasket with the printed portion toward the oil pan.
Gasket
"DA HIGH-PRESSURE FUEL HOSE INSTALLATION
(1) Apply a small amount of new engine oil to the O-ring,
then fit the O-ring in the delivery pipe.
Caution
Do not let any engine oil get into the delivery pipe.
(2) Check that the high pressure hose turns smoothly.
If the hose does not turn smoothly, the O-ring is probably
being clamped. Disconnect the high-pressure fuel hose
and check the O-ring for damage. After this, re-install
the hose to the delivery pipe and check that the hose
turns smoothly.
(3) Tighten the mounting bolts to the specification.

ENGINE – Timing Belt 11-21
TIMING BELT
11 {1.1}
1 3.5 {0.35}
6 21
49 {5.0} 7
24 {2.4} 22
2 8
24 {2.4}
26
27
11 {1.1} 11 {1.1}
13
12
23
118 {12.0}
49 {5.0}
9 {0.9} 3
5 18 30 {3.1}
25 45 {4.6} 17
4
19 {1.9}
15
28
24 10
88 {9.0} 20
49 {5.0}
19
9 {0.9}
16
14
11
48 {4.9} 9 54 {5.5}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Front upper cover 15. Tensioner B
2. Front center cover AE" "GA 16. Timing belt B
3. Front lower cover AF" "FA 17. Counterbalance shaft sprocket
4. Bracket "EA 18. Spacer
AA" "LA 5. Timing belt AG" 19. Crankshaft sprocket B
"KA 6. Tensioner pulley 20. Crankshaft key
7. Tensioner arm "DA 21. Rocker cover
"JA 8. Auto tensioner "CA 22. Semi-circular packing
9. Idle pulley "BA 23. Engine support bracket
10. Crankshaft position sensor AH" "AA 24. Camshaft sprocket bolt
AB" "IA 11. Oil pump sprocket 25. Camshaft sprocket
AC" "HA 12. Crankshaft bolt 26. Timing belt rear right cover
AD" 13. Crankshaft sprocket 27. Timing belt rear left upper cover
14. Sensing blade 28. Timing belt rear left lower cover

11-22 ENGINE – Timing Belt
REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

AA" TIMING BELT REMOVAL
(1) If the timing belt is to be reused, chalk an arrow mark
on the back surface of the belt so that the belt can be
reinstalled in the same direction.
(2) Place the exhaust camshaft sprocket in a position where
the timing mark for No. 1 cylinder is positioned about
one tooth before the top dead center of the compression
stroke.
Caution
The camshaft sprocket on the exhaust side can turn
very easily because of the valve spring tension. Use
Timing mark care not to allow your fingers to get caught by the
sprocket.
(3) Loosen the lock nut of the tensioner pulley, then remove
the timing belt.
AB" OIL PUMP SPROCKET REMOVAL

(1) Remove the plug on the left side of cylinder block.
(2) Insert a screwdriver (shank diameter 8 mm) to block the
counterbalance shaft.
(3) Loosen the flange bolt.
(4) Remove the oil pump sprocket.
AC" CRANKSHAFT BOLT LOOSENING
AD" CRANKSHAFT SPROCKET REMOVAL

If it is difficult to remove the sprocket, use the special tool.

AE" TIMING BELT “B” REMOVAL
Make an arrow mark on the back of the timing belt indicating
the direction of rotation so it may be reassembled in the
same direction if it is to be reused.
6EN1322
AF" COUNTERBALANCE SHAFT SPROCKET

REMOVAL
AG" CRANKSHAFT SPROCKET “B” REMOVAL

If it is difficult to remove the sprocket, use the special tool.
AH" CAMSHAFT SPROCKET BOLT LOOSENING

Use a wrench to hold the hexagonal part of the camshaft,
and then remove the camshaft sprocket mounting bolt.
INSPECTION
TIMING BELT
Replace belt if any of the following conditions exist.
(1) Hardening of back rubber.
Back side is glossy without resilience and leaves no indent
when pressed with fingernail.

Cracks Cracks
(2) Cracks on rubber back.
(3) Cracks of canvas.
(4) Cracks on rib root.
(5) Cracks on belt sides.
Peeling of Cracks
canvas on sides
Cracks on rib root
(6) Abnormal wear of belt sides.

NOTE
The sides are normal if they are sharp as if cut by a
knife.
(7) Abnormal wear on teeth.

Initial stage:
Canvas on load side tooth flank worn (Fluffy canvas
fibers, rubber gone and color changed to white, and
unclear canvas texture)
Final stage:
Tooth missing
Canvas on load side tooth flank worn down and rubber
exposed (tooth width reduced)
(8) Missing tooth.
AUTO TENSIONER
(1) Check the auto tensioner for possible leaks and replace
12 mm as necessary.
(2) Check the rod end for wear or damage and replace as
necessary.
(3) Measure the rod protrusion. If it is out of specification,
Standard value: 12 mm
98 to 196 N {10 to 20 kgf} (4) Press the rod with a force of 98 – 196 N {10 – 20 kgf}
and measure its protrusion. If it is out of specification,
Movement
Standard value: 1 mm or less
6EN1033

"AA CAMSHAFT SPROCKET BOLT TIGHTENING
Using a wrench, hold the camshaft at its hexagon and tighten
the bolt to the specification.
Caution
Locking the camshaft sprocket with a tool damages the
sprocket.
"BA ENGINE SUPPORT BRACKET LEFT

INSTALLATION
Coat the bolts illustrated with sealant before tightening.
Specified sealant: THREEBOND 1207F or equivalent
Apply sealant "CA SEALANT APPLICATION ON SEMI-CIRCULAR

PACKING
Apply sealant to the areas indicated in the illustration.
Specified sealant: THREEBOND 1212D or equivalent
10 mm Apply
sealant
10 mm
Semi-circular
packing
Cylinder head

"DA SEALANT APPLICATION ON ROCKER COVER

Apply sealant to the areas indicated in the illustration.
Specified sealant: THREEBOND 1212D or equivalent
10 mm
Apply sealant
10 mm
10 mm
Apply sealant
10 mm
Apply sealant
"EA SPACER INSTALLATION

Spacer Oil seal
(1) Apply very thin coat of oil to the outer periphery of the
spacer (oil seal contacting surface).
(2) Install the spacer with the chamfered end toward the
oil seal. Mounting in the reverse direction can damage
the oil seal lip.
Chamfer
"FA COUNTERBALANCE SHAFT SPROCKET

INSTALLATION
"GA TIMING BELT “B” INSTALLATION

(1) Align timing marks on the crankshaft sprocket “B” and
Timing
marks
counterbalance shaft sprocket with the marks on the front
Timing case respectively.
marks (2) Install the timing belt “B” on the crankshaft sprocket “B”
and counterbalance shaft sprocket. There should be no
slack on the tension side.

Tension side (3) Make sure that the relationship between the tensioner
Tensioner “B” of timing belt pulley center and the bolt center is as shown in the
Timing belt “B” illustration.
Center of
tensioner Center
pulley of bolt
(4) Move the tensioner “B” in the direction of arrow while

lifting with a finger to give a sufficient tension to the tension
side of timing belt. In this condition, tighten bolt to secure
tensioner “B”. When the bolt is tightened, use care to
prevent shaft from turning together. If shaft is turned
together, belt will be overtensioned.
"HA CRANKSHAFT BOLT TIGHTENING
"IA OIL PUMP SPROCKET INSTALLATION

(1) Block the counterbalance shaft in the same way as at
the disassembly to prevent it from turning.
(2) Install the oil pump sprocket.
(3) Apply a proper amount of engine oil to the bearing surfaces
of the flange nuts.
(4) Tighten the flange nuts to the specified torque.
6EN0564
"JA AUTO TENSIONER INSTALLATION

(1) If the auto tensioner rod is in its fully extended position,
reset it as follows.
B A a. Clamp the auto-tensioner in the vise with soft jaws.
b. Push in the rod little by little with the vise until the
set hole A in the rod is aligned with the hole B in
the cylinder.
6AE0049

c. Insert a wire (1.4 mm in diameter) into the set holes.

d. Unclamp the auto tensioner from the vise.
(2) Install the auto tensioner. Leave the wire installed in the
auto tensioner until the timing belt is installed.
6AE0050
"KA TENSIONER PULLEY INSTALLATION

Install the tensioner pulley as shown in the illustration.
Holes in
tensioner
pulley
6EN1323
"LA TIMING BELT INSTALLATION

Timing marks
(1) Place the exhaust side camshaft sprocket in a position
where its timing mark is one tooth offset from the timing
mark on the rocker cover in the counterclockwise direction.
NOTE
Even if the timing marks on the sprocket and the rocker
cover are brought into alignment, the exhaust camshaft
is forced back by the valve spring tension. It is stabilized
at a position one tooth before the timing mark.
(2) Align the timing mark on the intake side camshaft sprocket
Timing marks
with that on the rocker cover.
NOTE
Even if the timing marks on the sprocket and the cover
are brought into alignment, the intake camshaft is forced
to turn one tooth in the clockwise direction by the valve
spring tension and stabilized there.
(3) Place the timing mark on the crankshaft sprocket one

tooth this side from the mated timing mark as in the case
of the camshaft sprocket.

(4) Align the timing mark on the oil pump sprocket with its
mating mark.
(5) Remove the plug on the left side of the cylinder block
and insert a Phillips screwdriver (shank diameter 8 mm)
through the hole.
If it can be inserted as deep as 60 mm or more, the
timing marks are correctly aligned. If the inserted depth
Plug is only 20 – 25 mm, turn the oil pump sprocket one turn
and realign timing marks. Then check to ensure that the
Screwdriver
screwdriver can be inserted 60 mm or more.
(6) Remove the Phillips screwdriver. Place the oil pump

sprocket in a position where its timing mark is one tooth
offset from the mated timing mark in the counterclockwise
Timing marks
direction.
6EN1327
(7) Fit the timing belt over the exhaust side camshaft sprocket,
and secure it at the illustrated position using a paper
clip.
(8) Turn the intake side camshaft sprocket as shown to a

position where its timing mark is one tooth offset from
the mated timing mark in the counterclockwise direction.
Then, fit the timing belt over the sprocket and secure
it with a paper clip.
NOTE
The intake camshaft will be turned a little clockwise by
the valve spring tension and stabilized in position even
if the belt is clipped at one tooth offset position.
Timing marks (9) Check to ensure that the timing marks on the intake
camshaft sprocket side are in alignment when the exhaust
camshaft sprocket is turned clockwise to align the timing
marks.
NOTE
The timing belt span between the intake and exhaust
sprockets will have 17 cogs.

(10)Fit the timing belt over the idler pulley, oil pump sprocket
and crankshaft sprocket in this order.
NOTE
Be careful that the belt does not become slack.
Oil pump
sprocket
Crankshaft
sprocket
(11)Fit the timing belt over the tensioner pulley.

NOTE
When fitting the timing belt over the tensioner pulley,
Camshaft turn the intake side camshaft sprocket a little
sprocket counterclockwise, as this will facilitate the work.
Crankshaft
(12)Turn the crankshaft pulley a little in the illustrated direction
sprocket to pull up the timing belt at the idler pulley side.
(13)Check to ensure that the timing marks on the crankshaft
sprocket, oil pump sprocket and exhaust camshaft
sprocket are all offset one tooth from the corresponding
timing marks in the counterclockwise direction.
(14)Using the special tool, turn the tensioner pulley in the

illustrated direction to strain the timing belt. Then, secure
the tensioner temporarily by tightening the retaining bolt
MD998767
lightly.
NOTE
There must be no slack in the timing belt between the
intake and exhaust camshafts.
(15)Turn the crankshaft to align the timing mark with the mark
for No. 1 cylinder top dead center in the compression
stroke.
(16)Set the special tool as shown and screw it in up to the

position where the wire inserted in the auto-tensioner
when installing it can be moved lightly.
MD998738

(17)Loosen the retaining bolt of the tensioner pulley.
MD998767
Caution
Loosening the retaining bolt can cause the intake
and exhaust camshafts to turn, resulting in slackened
timing belt. Use care that the timing belt does not
come off the sprockets at this time.
(18)Pull up the slack of the timing belt by turning the tensioner
in illustrated direction using the special tool and a torque
wrench (0 – 5 Nm {0 – 0.5 kgf@m}).
(19)From this position, turn back the tensioner until the torque
wrench reading becomes 3.5 Nm {0.36 kgf@m}, then
secure it by tightening the retaining bolt.
(20)Remove the special tool attached in step (16).
(21)Rotate the crankshaft clockwise 2 turns. Then, leave it
intact 15 minutes.
(22)Check to see that the wire inserted when installing the
auto-tensioner can be pulled out lightly. If it can be pulled
out lightly, the timing belt is being tensioned properly.
If so, remove the wire. In addition, check that the rod
protrusion from the auto-tensioner meets the standard
value, which is also an indication of properly tensioned
timing belt.
Standard value: 3.8 – 4.5 mm
(23)If the wire cannot be removed with a light force, repeat
steps (16) through (21) until the proper belt tensioner
is obtained.

ENGINE – Engine Assembly 11-32
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
(1) Fuel Discharge Prevention (1) Front Exhaust Pipe Installation
(2) Hood Removal (Refer to GROUP 15.)
(3) Strut Tower Bar Removal (2) Under Cover Installation
(4) Air Hose C Removal (3) Radiator Assembly Installation
(Refer to GROUP 15 – Intercooler.) (Refer to GROUP 14.)
(5) Radiator Assembly Removal (Refer to GROUP 14.) (4) Accelerator Cable Adjustment
(6) Under Cover Removal (5) Air Hose C Installation
(7) Front Exhaust Pipe Removal (Refer to GROUP 15.) (Refer to GROUP 15 – Intercooler.)
(6) Strut Tower Bar Installation
(7) Hood Installation
Delivery pipe
10 – 12
{1.0 – 1.2}
3 {0.3}
1
15
17
O-ring
Engine oil
10 – 12 12
{1.0 – 1.2} 13 5 {0.5}
14
16 8
17
8 9 2
18
6
4 11
10
5
7
3
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Center cover 11. Injector connector
2. Accelerator cable 12. Cam position sensor connector
3. Brake booster vacuum hose 13. Coolant temperature sensor con-
connection nector
4. Vacuum hose connection 14. Coolant temperature gauge unit
5. Throttle position sensor connector connector
6. Idle speed control motor connector 15. Vacuum pipe/hose assembly
7. Heater hose connection 16. Control harness
8. Ignition coil connector "CA 17. High-pressure fuel hose connection
9. Crank angle sensor connector 18. Fuel return hose connection
10. Oxygen sensor connector

11-33 ENGINE – Engine Assembly
39 {4.0}
19
21 25
20
24
22
9 {0.9} 22
27 23
26
12 {1.2}
28
57 {5.8}
29
98 {10.0}*
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
19. Solenoid valve connector 26. A/C relay box

20. Vacuum tank/solenoid valve/vacuum 27. A/C receiver bracket mounting bolt
hose assembly 28. Oil pressure hose mounting bolt
21. Oil pressure switch connector AC" "BA 29. Engine mount bracket
22. Alternator connector AE" "AA 30. Engine assembly
D Drive belt tension inspection
(Refer to P.11-4.) Caution
AA" 23. Drive belt Mounting locations marked by * should be
AB" 24. A/C compressor provisionally tightened, and then fully tightened after
AC" 25. Power steering oil pump placing the vehicle horizontally and loading the full
D Transmission assembly weight of the engine on the vehicle body.

ENGINE – Engine Assembly 11-34
Auto tensioner AA" DRIVE BELT REMOVAL
Hole in arm
Hole in bracket
Phillips
screwdriver
AB" POWER STEERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL

Remove the power steering oil pump from the bracket with
the hose attached.
NOTE
Place the removed power steering oil pump in a place where
it will not be a hindrance when removing and installing the
engine assembly, and tie it with a cord.
AC" A/C COMPRESSOR REMOVAL

Disconnect the A/C compressor connector and remove the
compressor from the compressor bracket with the hose still
attached.
NOTE
Place the removed A/C compressor where it will not be a
hindrance when removing and installing the engine assembly,
and tie it with a cord.
AD" ENGINE MOUNT BRACKET REMOVAL

MZ203826 or MZ203827
(1) Support the engine with a garage jack.
(2) Remove the special tools which was attached when the
transmission assembly was removed.
(3) Hold the engine assembly with a chain block or similar
tool.
(4) Place a garage jack against the engine oil pan with a
piece of wood in between, jack up the engine so that
MB991453 the weight of the engine is no longer being applied to
the engine mount bracket, and then remove the engine
mount bracket.

11-35 ENGINE – Engine Assembly
AE" ENGINE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

After checking that all cables, hoses and harness connectors,
etc., are disconnected from the engine, lift the chain block
slowly to remove the engine assembly upward from the engine
compartment.

"AA ENGINE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
Install the engine assembly, checking that the cables, hoses,
and harness connectors are not clamped.
MZ203826 or MZ203827 "BA ENGINE MOUNT BRACKET INSTALLATION

(1) Place a garage jack against the engine oil pan with a
piece of wood in between, and install the engine mount
bracket while adjusting the position of the engine.
(2) Support the engine with the garage jack.
(3) Remove the chain block and support the engine assembly
with the special tools.
MB991453
"CA HIGH-PRESSURE FUEL HOSE INSTALLATION

(1) Apply a small amount of new engine oil to the O-ring,
then fit the O-ring in the delivery pipe.
Caution
Do not let any engine oil get into the delivery pipe.
(2) Check that the high pressure hose turns smoothly.
If the hose does not turn smoothly, the O-ring is probably
being clamped. Disconnect the high-pressure fuel hose
and check the O-ring for damage. After this, re-install
the hose to the delivery pipe and check that the hose
turns smoothly.
(3) Tighten the mounting bolt to the specification.

12-1
ENGINE
LUBRICATION
CONTENTS
LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
ENGINE OIL COOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

12-2 ENGINE LUBRICATION – Lubricants / Engine Oil Cooler
LUBRICANTS
Items Capacity dm3 {ȏ}
Engine oil Quantity in oil filter 0.3 {0.3}
Quantity in oil cooler 0.16 {0.16}
Total quantity 5.1 {5.1}
Brand DIA QUEEN MOTOR OIL (Grade SG or higher); or engine oil in

a can marked with ILSAC certification.
ENGINE OIL COOLER

(1) Engine Oil Removal and Refilling
(2) Front Bumper Removal and Installation
12 {1.2}
12 {1.2}
39 – 44
{4.0 – 4.5}
1
29 – 34
{3.0 – 3.5}
12 {1.2}
3 39 – 44
{4.0 – 4.5}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Engine oil cooler
"AA 2. Feed hose assembly
"AA 3. Return hose assembly
INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

"AA FEED HOSE ASSEMBLY / RETURN HOSE
ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
Fit the hose joint positioning tab into the hole in oil cooler
to secure the hose assembly in position.
TSB Revision
13-1
FUEL
CONTENTS
MULTIPOINT INJECTION (MPI) . . . . . . . 2 4. Fuel Pressure Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5. MPI System Components Layout . . . . . . 31
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 6. Intake Air Temperature Sensor Check . . 32
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 7. Engine Coolant Temperature
Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
SEALANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 8. Oxygen Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
9. Injector Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
10. Resistor Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 11. Fuel Pump Relay No.2 Check . . . . . . . . . 35
12. Fuel Pump Resistor Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1. Idle Position Switch and Throttle Position INJECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Sensor (TPS) Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2. Fixed SAS Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 THROTTLE BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3. Basic Idle Speed Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 30

13-2 MPI – General Information
MULTIPOINT INJECTION (MPI)

GENERAL INFORMATION
OMPI System Diagram
L1 Oxygen sensor Engine ECU l1 Injector
L2 Air flow sensor l2 ISC servo
L3 Intake air temperature sensor l3 Fuel pressure control valve
L4 Throttle position sensor l4 Waste gate solenoid valve
L5 Idle switch l5 Secondary air control solenoid valve
L6 Camshaft position sensor
L7 Crank angle sensor D Control relay
L8 Barometric pressure sensor D Fuel pump relay
L9 High temperature sensor D A/C relay
L10 Engine coolant temperature sensor D Ignition coil
L11 Detonation sensor D Exhaust temperature warning lamp
D Engine warning lamp
D Power supply voltage D Diagnosis output
D Ignition switch-IG D Alternator G terminal
D Ignition switch-ST D Fan motor relay
D Vehicle speed sensor D Tachometer
D A/C switch D Fuel pump relay No.2
D Power steering fluid pressure switch
D Alternator FR signal
From l2 ISC servo

fuel Throttle position
Canister tank sensor (with a
built-in
Check valve idle
l5 Secondary air switch)
control solenoid L4,
valve L5
Secondary
air valve l3 Fuel pressure
Fuel From control valve
To fuel pressure fuel
tank regulator pump
L8 Barometric L1 Oxygen sensor
pressure sensor L3 L6 Camshaft position
sensor
L2 Air flow sensor Intake air tem-
l1 Injector
perature sensor
Air
L10 Coolant temperature sensor
L7 Crank angle sensor

L11 Detonation sensor
Waste gate
actuator L9 High temperature
sensor
l4 Waste gate
solenoid valve Catalytic converter
Given above is the MPI system diagram for EVOLUTION-IV. The MPI system for EVOLUTION-V is different
from this in the following point;
D Oxygen sensor with a heater is adopted.
D The diagnosis connector power supply circuit is different.
D The high temperature sensor is no longer used.

MPI – Service Specifications / Sealant 13-3
Items Specifications
Basic ignition timing _BTDC 5±3
Basic idle speed rpm 850 ± 50
Throttle position sensor adjusting voltage mV 400 – 1,000
Throttle position sensor resistance kΩ 3.5 – 6.5
ISC servo coil resistance (at 20_C) Ω 28 – 33
Intake air temperature sensor resistance kΩ At 20_C 2.3 – 3.0
At 80_C 0.30 – 0.42
Coolant temperature sensor resistance kΩ At 20_C 2.1 – 2.7
At 80_C 0.26 – 0.36
Fuel pressure When vacuum hose is connected 230 {2.35}

kPa {kgf/cm2}
When vacuum hose is disconnected 289 – 309 {2.95 – 3.15}
Injector coil resistance Ω 2–3
Amount of injector fuel leak drop/min 1 or less
Oxygen sensor output voltage 0.6 – 1.0
Fuel pressure control valve coil resistance (at 20_C) Ω 28 – 36
SEALANT
Item Specified sealant
Coolant temperature sensor Drying sealant: HELMESEAL H-1M [0110513]
NOTE:
Given in [ ] are MITSUBISHI GENUINE PART numbers.

13-4 MPI – Special Tools
SPECIAL TOOLS
MB991348 Test harness set D Measurement of voltage during trouble-
shooting
D Inspection using an oscilloscope
MB991519 Alternator harness Measurement of voltage during

connector troubleshooting
MB991536 TPS check Adjustment of idle switch and throttle position

harness sensor (TPS)
MD998464 Test harness Inspection of oxygen sensor

(4-pin, square)
MD998463 Test harness D Inspection of idle speed control servo

(6-pin, square) D Inspection using an oscilloscope
MD998478 Test harness D Measurement of voltage during trouble-

(3-pin, triangle) shooting
MD998706 Injector test set Checking the spray condition of injectors
MD998741 Injector test

adaptor
MB991607 Injector test

harness

MPI – Special Tools 13-5

MD998746 Clip Checking the spray condition of injectors
MD998709 Adaptor hose Measurement of fuel pressure
MD998742 Hose adaptor
MB991637 Fuel pressure

gauge set
MB991223 Inspection test Measurement of terminal voltage

herness set
Red harness D Pin contact
pressure
inspection
harness
D Market tester
White harness contact probe
(for general
connectors)
MB991529 Diagnostic trouble Reading of diagnosis codes
code check har-
ness
MB991709 Test harness D Measurement of voltage during trouble-

shooting

13-6 MPI – Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1-1 ENGINE WARNING LAMP (CHECK ENGINE LAMP)
If an abnormality occurs in any of the following items related
to the Multipoint Fuel Injection (MPI) system, the engine
warning lamp will illuminate.
If the lamp remains illuminated or if the lamp illuminates while
Engine warning lamp the engine is running, check the diagnosis code output.
(check engine lamp)
Engine warning lamp inspection items
Engine-ECU
Air flow sensor (AFS)
Intake air temperature sensor
Throttle position sensor (TPS)
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Crank angle sensor
Camshaft position sensor
Barometric pressure sensor
Detonation sensor
Injector
Ignition coil, power transister
Misfire <Evolution-V only>
1-2 METHOD OF READING AND ERASING DIAGNOSIS

CODES
(1) Use the special tool to earth No.1 terminal (diagnosis
control terminal) of the diagnosis connector.
(2) To check ABS system, remove the valve relay.
NOTE
That is because the valve relay is off and the warning
lamp remains illuminated if there is a fault in the ABS
system.
(3) Turn off the ignition switch.
(4) Read out a diagnosis code by observing how the warning
lamp flashes.
Indication of diagnosis code by warning lamp
When the diagnosis code No.24 is output When no diagnosis code is output*
0.5 sec.
1.5 secs. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. <MPI, A/T>
On 0.25 sec. <ABS>
Off
On
Pause Tens signal Place Units signal Off
time 3 division
secs. 2 secs. A03X0113
NOTE
*: Even if the ABS system is normal, removing the valve relay causes the diagnosis code No.52 to
be output.

MPI – Troubleshooting 13-7
1-3 ERASING DIAGNOSIS CODES
(1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
(2) After disconnecting the battery cable from the battery (–) terminal for 10 seconds or more, reconnect
the cable.
(3) After the engine has warmed up, run it at idle for about 15 minutes.
1-4 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION REFERENCE TABLE
When the main sensor malfunctions are detected by the diagnosis function, the vehicle is controlled
by means of the pre-set control logic to maintain safe conditions for driving.
Malfunctioning item Control contents during malfunction
Air flow sensor (AFS) (1) Uses the throttle position sensor signal and engine speed signal (crank angle sensor
signal) to take reading of the basic injector drive time and basic ignition timing from
the pre-set mapping.
(2) Fixes the ISC servo in the appointed position so idle control is not performed.
Intake air temperature Controls as if the intake air temperature is 25_C.

sensor
Throttle position No increase in fuel injection amount during acceleration due to the throttle position sensor
sensor (TPS) signal.
Engine coolant Controls as if the engine coolant temperature is 80_C.

temperature sensor (This condition is maintained until the ignition switch is turned off even when the sensor signal
returns normal.)
Camshaft position (1) Injects fuel to all cylinders simultaneously for 4 seconds.
sensor (However, after the ignition switch is turned to ON, the No. 1 cylinder top dead centre
is not detected at all.)
(2) Lets the fan motor (radiator and condensor) run at high speed.
Barometric pressure Controls as if the barometric pressure is 101 kPa {760 mmHg}.
sensor
Detonation sensor Switches the ignition timing from ignition timing for super petrol to ignition timing for standard
petrol.
Ignition coil, power Cuts off the fuel supply to cylinders with an abnormal ignition.
transistor
Alternator FR terminal Does not control the output of the alternator according to an electrical load. (works as a
normal alternator)
Misfire Cuts off the fuel to the misfiring cylinder if a misfire that could damage the catalyst is detected.
(Evolution-V only)

2. INSPECTION CHART FOR DIAGNOSIS CODES

Code No. Diagnosis item Reference page
12 Air flow sensor (AFS) system 13-8
13 Intake air temperature sensor system 13-9
14 Throttle position sensor (TPS) system 13-9
21 Engine coolant temperature sensor system 13-10
22 Crank angle sensor system 13-11
23 Camshaft position sensor system 13-11
24 Vehicle speed sensor system 13-12
25 Barometric pressure sensor system 13-13
31 Detonation sensor system 13-14
41 Injector system 13-14
44 Ignition coil and power transistor unit system 13-15
64 Alternator FR terminal system 13-16
3. INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR DIAGNOSIS CODES

Code No. 12 Air flow sensor (AFS) system Probable cause
Range of Check D Malfunction of the air flow sensor
D Engine speed is 500 r/min or more. D Improper connector contact, open circuit or
Set conditions short-circuited harness wire of the air flow sensor
D Sensor output frequency is 3 Hz or less for 4 seconds. D Malfunction of the engine-ECU
1. NG
Measure at the air flow sensor con- Check the air flow sensor circuit.
nector A-25.
D Connect the connector. (Use
the test harness: MB991709) 2. NG NG NG
1. Voltage between 3 and earth Measure at the engine-ECU con- Check the following connector: Repair
(Engine: Idling) nector B-59. A-25
OK: 2.2– 3.2 V D Connect the connector.
OK
2. Voltage between 7 and earth D Voltage between 19 and earth
OK: 0 – 1 V (Engine: idling) (Ignition switch: ON)
Check trouble symptom.
6 – 9 V (2,000 r/min) OK: 6 – 9 V
NG
OK OK
NG
Replace the engine-ECU. Check the following connector: Repair
B-59
OK Replace the air flow sensor.

NG
Replace the engine-ECU.

Code No. 13 Intake air temperature sensor system Probable cause
Range of Check D Malfunction of the intake air temperature sensor
D Ignition switch: ON D Improper connector contact, open circuit or
D Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately short-circuited harness wire of the intake air
after the engine starts. temperature sensor circuit
Set conditions D Malfunction of the engine-ECU
D Sensor output voltage is 4.6 V or more (corresponding to an intake air temperature
of –45_C or less) for 4 seconds.
or
D Sensor output voltage is 0.2V or less (corresponding to an intake air temperature
of 125_C or more) for 4 seconds.
NG
Check the intake air temperature sen- Replace air flow sensor.
sor. (Refer to P.13-32.)
OK
NG NG
Measure at the air flow sensor connec- Check the following connector: Repair
tor A-25. C-62
D Disconnect the connector, and
OK
measure at the harness side.
D Voltage between 6 and earth Check trouble symptom.
(Ignition switch: ON)
OK: 4.5– 4.9 V NG
D Continuity between 5 and earth NG
OK: Continuity Check the harness wire between the Repair
engine-ECU and the intake air temper-
OK ature sensor connector.
OK
NG
Check the following connector: Repair
A-25
OK
NG
Check trouble symptom. Replace the engine-ECU.
Code No. 14 Throttle position sensor (TPS) system Probable cause

Range of Check D Malfunction of the throttle position sensor
D Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately short-circuited harness wire of the throttle position
after the engine starts. sensor circuit
Set conditions D Improper “ON” state of idle position switch
D The sensor output voltage is 0.2 V or less for 4 seconds. D Short circuit of the idle position switch signal line
D Malfunction of the engine-ECU
NG
Check the throttle position sensor. Replace
OK
NG NG
Measure at the throttle position sensor Check the following connector: Repair
connector A-16. B-62
OK
OK: 4.8– 5.2 V NG
engine-ECU and the throttle position
OK sensor connector.
Check the throttle position sensor out- OK
put circuit.

Code No. 21 Engine coolant temperature sensor system Probable cause

Range of Check D Malfunction of the engine coolant temperature sensor
D Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately short-circuited harness wire of the engine coolant
after the engine starts. temperature sensor circuit
D Sensor output voltage is 4.6 V or more (corresponding to an engine coolant
temperature of –45_C or less) for 4 seconds.
or
D Sensor output voltage is 0.1 V or less (corresponding to an engine coolant
temperature of 140_C or more) for 4 seconds.
Range of Check
D Ignition switch: ON
D Engine speed is approx. 50 r/min or more
Set conditions
D The sensor output voltage increases from 1.6 V or less (corresponding to an
engine coolant temperature of 40_C or more) to 1.6 V or more (corresponding
to an engine coolant temperature of 40_C or less).
D After this, the sensor output voltage is 1.6 V or more for 5 minutes.
NG
Check the engine coolant temperature Replace
sensor. (Refer to P.13-32.)
OK
NG NG
Measure at the engine coolant temper- Check the following connector: Repair
ature sensor connector A-38. B-62
D Disconnect the connector, and OK
OK: 4.5– 4.9 V NG
engine-ECU and the engine coolant
OK temperature sensor connector.
NG OK
A-38
OK
NG
Check trouble symptom. Replace the engine-ECU.

Code No. 22 Crank angle sensor system Probable cause
Range of Check D Malfunction of the crank angle sensor
D Engine is cranking. D Improper connector contact, open circuit or
Set conditions short-circuited harness wire of the crank angle sensor
D Sensor output voltage does not change for 4 seconds (no pulse signal input.) D Malfunction of the engine-ECU
OK
Measure at the crank angle sensor connector A-51. Replace the engine-ECU.
D Connect the connector. (Use the test harness: MD998478.)
D Voltage between 2 (black clip) and earth (Engine: cranking)
OK: 0.4– 4.0 V
D Voltage between 2 (black clip) and earth (Engine: idling)
OK: 1.5– 2.5 V
NG
1. NG
Measure at the crank angle sensor connector A-51. Check the harness wire between the crank angle sensor and the
D Disconnect the connector, and measure at the harness side. control relay connector, and repair if necessary.
1. Voltage between 3 and earth (Ignition switch: ON)
2. NG NG
OK: System voltage Check the following con- Repair
2. Voltage between 2 and earth (Ignition switch: ON) nector: B-62
OK: 4.8– 5.2 V
3. Continuity between 1 and earth 3. NG OK
OK: Continuity
OK
NG NG
Check the following con- Repair NG
nector: A-51 Check the harness wire Repair
betweenthe engine-ECU and
OK the crank angle sensor
connector.
OK
NG
Replace the crank angle sensor.
Check the harness wire between the crank angle sensor and the
earth, and repair if necessary.
Code No. 23 Camshaft position sensor system Probable cause

Range of Check D Malfunction of the camshaft position sensor
D Engine speed is approx. 50 r/min or more. short-circuited harness wire of the camshaft position
Set conditions sensor circuit
D Sensor output voltage does not change for 4 seconds (no pulse signal input.) D Malfunction of the engine-ECU
OK
Measure at the camshaft position sensor connector A-97. Replace the engine-ECU.
D Connect the connector.
D Voltage between 2 and earth (Engine: cranking)
OK: 0.4– 3.0 V
D Voltage between 2 and earth (Engine: idling)
OK: 0.5– 2.0 V
NG
1. NG
Measure at the camshaft position sensor connector A-97. Check the harness wire between the camshaft position sensor
D Disconnect the connector, and measure at the harness side. and the control relay connector, and repair if necessary.
2. NG NG
OK: System voltage Check the following con- Repair
2. Voltage between 2 and earth (Ignition switch: ON) nector: B-62
OK: 4.8– 5.2 V
3. Continuity between 1 and earth 3. NG OK
OK: Continuity
OK
NG NG
Check the following con- Repair NG
nector: A-97 Check the harness wire Repair
betweenthe engine-ECU and
OK the camshaft position sensor
connector.
OK
NG
Replace the camshaft position sensor.
Check the harness wire between the camshaft position sensor

and the earth, and repair if necessary.

Code No. 24 Vehicles speed sensor system Probable cause

Range of check D Malfunction of the vehicle speed sensor
D Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately short-circuited harness wire of the vehicle speed
D Idle position switch: OFF D Malfunction of the engine-ECU
D Engine speed is 3,000 r/min or more.
D Driving under high engine load conditions.
Set conditions
D Sensor output voltage does not change for 4 seconds (no pulse signal input).
NG
Check the vehicle speed sensor. (Refer to GROUP 54 – Combina- Replace
tion Meters.)
OK
1. NG NG
Measure at the vehicle speed sensor connector A-19. Check the following Repair
D Disconnect the connector, and measure at the harness side. connectors:
1. Voltage between 1 and earth (Ignition switch: ON) B-64, B-74, B-76
OK: System voltage 2. NG
OK
OK: 4.8 – 5.2 V Check trouble symptom.
3. Continuity between 2 and earth 3. NG
OK: Continuity NG
NG
OK Check the harness wire Repair
NG between the vehicle
Check the following Repair speed sensor and ignition
connectors: switch connector.
A-19, B-62
OK
OK
Check the ignition switch. (Refer to GROUP 54 – Ignition Switch.)
NG NG
NG Check the following Repair
Check the harness wire Repair connector:
between the engine-ECU B-62
and the vehicle speed OK
sensor connector.
OK Check trouble symptom.
NG
Replace the engine-ECU. NG
Check the harness wire Repair
between the engine-ECU
and the vehicle speed
sensor connector.
OK
Check the harness wire between the vehicle speed sensor and
the earth, and repair if necessary.

Code No. 25 Barometric pressure sensor system Probable cause
Range of Check D Malfunction of the barometric pressure sensor
D Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately short-circuited harness wire of the barometric pressure
D Sensor output voltage is 4.5 V or more (corresponding to a barometric pressure
of 114 kPa {855 mmHg} or more) for 4 seconds.
or
D Sensor output voltage is 0.2 V or less (corresponding to a barometric pressure
of 53 kPa {40 mmHg} or less) for 4 seconds.
NG NG NG
Measure at the air flow sensor con- Measure at the air flow sensor con- Check the following connector: Repair
nector A-25. nector A-25. B-62
D Connect the connector. (Use D Disconnect the connector, and
OK
the test harness: MB991709) measure at the harness side.
D Voltage between 2 and earth D Voltage between 1 and earth Check trouble symptom.
(Ignition switch: ON) (Ignition switch: ON)
OK: 3.7– 4.3 V (Altitude: 0 m) OK: 4.8– 5.2 V NG
3.2– 3.8 V D Continuity between 5 and earth NG
(Altitude: 1,200 m) OK: Continuity Check the harness wire between Repair
the engine-ECU and the baromet-
OK OK ric pressure sensor connector.
OK
NG
A-25
OK Replace the engine-ECU.
NG NG
Check trouble symptom. Check the harness wire between Repair
the engine-ECU and the baromet-
ric pressure sensor connector.
NG
Measure at the engine-ECU con- Check the harness wire between OK
nector B-62. the engine-ECU and the baromet-
D Connect the connector. ric pressure sensor connector, and Replace the air flow sensor.
D Voltage between 85 and earth repair if necessary.
OK: 3.7– 4.3 V (Altitude: 0 m)
3.2– 3.8 V
(Altitude: 1,200 m)
OK
NG
Check the following connec- Repair
tors:
A-25, B-62
OK

NG

Code No.31 Detonation sensor system Probable cause

Range of Check D Malfunction of the detonation sensor
D Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately short-circuited harness wire of the detonation sensor
after the engine starts. circuit
D Engine speed is approx. 5,000 r/min or more D Malfunction of the engine-ECU
Set conditions
The change in the detonation sensor output voltage (detonation sensor peak voltage
at each 1/2 revolution of the crankshaft) is less than 0.06 V for 200 times in succession.
OK NG
Measure at the detonation sensor con- Check the following connector: Repair
nector A-96. B-62
D Disconnect the connector and
OK
D Continuity between 2 and earth
OK: Continuity
NG
NG
OK
Check the harness wire between the Replace the detonation sensor.
Check the harness wire between the engine-ECU and the detonation sensor
detonation sensor and earth, and repair connector.
if necessary.
NG Check trouble symptom.
NG
Repair
Code No. 41 Injector system Probable cause

Range of Check D Malfunction of the injector
D Engine speed is approx. 50 – 1,000 r/min D Improper connector contact, open circuit or
D The throttle position sensor output voltage is 1.15 V or less. short-circuited harness wire of the injector circuit
D Surge voltage of injector coil is not detected for 4 seconds.
NG
Check the injector. (Refer to P.13-34.) Replace
Check the resistor. (Refer to P.13-34.)
OK
NG
Measure at the resistor connector Check the harness wire between the
A-125. control relay and the resistor connec-
D Disconnect the connector, and tor, and repair if necessary.
D Voltage between 3 and earth
OK: System voltage
OK
NG NG
Measure at the injector connectors Check the following connector: Repair
A-53, A-54, A-55, A-56. A-125
OK
OK: System voltage NG
OK Check the harness wire between the
resistor and the injector connector, and
Check the injector control circuit. repair if necessary.

Code No. 44 Ignition coil and power transistor unit system Probable cause
Range of Check D Malfunction of the ignition coil
D Engine speed is approx. 50 – 4,000 r/min. D Improper connector contact, open circuit or
D Engine is not being cranked. short-circuited harness wire of the ignition primary
Set conditions circuit
D Abnormal engine speed is detected due to misfiring by crank angle sensor. (One D Malfunction of the engine-ECU.
of two coils fails.)
NG
Check the ignition coil. (Refer to Group 16 – Ignition System.) Replace
OK
1. NG NG
Measure at the ignition coil connectors A-110, A-111. Check the following Repair
D Disconnect the connector, and measure at the harness. connectors:
1. Voltage between 1 and earth (Ignition switch: ON) B-65, B-76
OK: System voltage 2. NG
OK
2. Voltage between 3 and earth (Engine: Cranking)
OK: 0.5 – 4.0 V Check trouble symptom.
3. Continuity between 2 and earth 3. NG
OK: Continuity NG
OK Check the harness wire between the ignition coil and ignition switch
NG connector, and repair if necessary.
Check the following Repair
connectors:
A-110, A-111 NG
OK connector:
B-59
OK
NG
Check the following items.
D Check the spark plugs and spark plug cables. NG
D Check the compression pressure. NG
Check the harness wire Repair
between the engine-ECU
and ignition coil connec-
tor.
OK
Check the harness wire between the ignition coil connector and
earth, and repair if necessary.

Code No. 64 Alternator FR Terminal System Probable cause

Range of Check D Open circuit in alternator FR terminal circuit
D Engine speed is approximately 50 r/min or more. D Malfunction of the engine-ECU.
Set conditions
D Input voltage at the alternator FR terminal is 4.5 V or more for 20 seconds.
NG NG NG
Measure at the alternator connec- Measure at the alternator connec- Check the following connec- Repair
tor tor A-05. tors:
D Connect the connector. D Disconnect the connector, and B-60, A-88
(Use test harness MB991519.) measure at the harness side.
D Voltage between 4 and earth OK
D Voltage between 4 (blue clip)
and earth (Ignition switch: ON)
(Engine: Idling) OK: 4.8 – 5.2 V
(Radiator fan: Stopped) NG
(Headlamp: OFF → ON) OK NG
(Brake lamp: OFF → ON) Check the harness wire between Repair
(Rear defogger switch: OFF the engine-ECU and alternator
→ ON) connector.
OK: Voltage drops by 0.2 to OK
3.5 V. NG
OK A-05
OK Replace the engine-ECU.
NG
NG
Check the harness wire between Repair
the engine-ECU and alternator
connector.
OK
Replace the alternator.

4. PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
Items Symptom
Starting Won’t start The starter is used to crank the engine, but there is no combustion within the
cylinders, and the engine won’t start.
Fires up and dies There is combustion within the cylinders, but then the engine soon stalls.
Hard starting Engine starts after cranking a while.
Idling Rough idle Engine speed doesn’t remain constant and changes at idle.
stability Hunting Usually, a judgement can be based upon the movement of the tachometer
pointer, and the vibration transmitted to the steering wheel, shift lever, body, etc.
This is called rough idle or hunting.
Incorrect idle speed The engine doesn’t idle at the usual correct speed.
Engine stall The engine stalls when the accelerator pedal is released, regardless of whether
(Die out) the vehicles is moving or not.
Engine stall The engine stalls when the accelerator pedal is depressed or while it is being
(Pass out) used.
Driving Hesitation, Sag “Hesitation” is the delay in response of the vehicle speed (engine speed) that
occurs when the accelerator is depressed in order to accelerate from the speed
at which the vehicle is now traveling, or a temporary drop in vehicle speed
(engine speed) during such acceleration. Serious hesitation is called “sag”.
(Refer to Figure 1.)
Poor acceleration Poor acceleration is inability to obtain an acceleration corresponding to the

degree of throttle opening, even though acceleration is smooth, or the inability
to reach maximum speed.
Stumble Engine speed increase is delayed when the accelerator pedal is initially
depressed for acceleration. (Refer to Figure 2.)
Shock The feeling of a comparatively large impact or vibration when the engine is
accelerated or decelerated.
Surge This is repeated forward or rearward surging during constant speed travel or
during variable speed travel.
Knocking A sharp sound like a hammer striking the cylinder walls during driving and which
adversely affects driving.
Stopping Run on The condition in which the engine continues to run after the ignition switch is
(“Dieseling”) turned to OFF. Also called “Dieseling”.
(Figure 1) Hesitation (Figure 2)
Normal
Vehicle
Vehicle Initial accel- speed Normal
speed
erator pedal Initial accel-
depression erator pedal
depression
Sag Stumble
Idling
Time
Time

5. SERVICE DATA LIST

<EVOLUTION-IV>
Item Inspection Inspection contents Normal condition
No. item
11 Oxygen Engine: After having been warmed When at 4,000 r/min, engine is 200 mV or less
sensor up suddenly decelerated
Air/fuel mixture is made leaner when
decelerating, and is made richer When engine is suddenly 600 – 1,000 mV
when racing. raced
Engine: After having been warmed Engine is idling 400 mV or less

up
The oxygen sensor signal is used to (Changes)
check the air/fuel mixture ratio, and 2,500 r/min
control condition is also checked by 600 – 1,000 mV
the ECU.
12 Air flow D Engine coolant temperature: Engine is idling 17 – 43 Hz

sensor* 80 – 95_C
D Lamps, electric cooling fan and 2,500 r/min 46 – 86 Hz
all accessories: OFF
D Transmission: Neutral Engine is raced Frequency increases
in response to racing
13 Intake air Ignition switch: ON or with engine When intake air temperature –20_C
temperature running is –20_C
sensor
When intake air temperature 0_C
is 0_C

is 20_C

is 40_C

is 80_C
14 Throttle Ignition switch: ON Set to idle position 300 – 1,000 mV

position
sensor Gradually open Increases in proportion
to throttle opening
angle
Open fully 4,500 – 5,500 mV
16 Power Ignition switch: ON System voltage

supply
voltage
18 Cranking Ignition switch: ON Engine: Stopped OFF

g
signal
(ignition
Engine: Cranking ON
switch-ST)
NOTE
*: When the car is new (distance it travelled is less than 500 km), output frequency of the air flow sensor may
become about 10% higher.


No. item
21 Engine Ignition switch: ON or with engine When engine coolant temper- –20_C
coolant running ature is –20_C
temperature
sensor When engine coolant temper- 0_C
ature is 0_C
When engine coolant temper- 20_C

ature is 20_C

ature is 40_C

ature is 80_C
22 Crank angle D Engine: Idling When engine coolant temper- 1,300 – 1,500 rpm
sensor D Idle position switch: ON ature is –20_C
When engine coolant temper- 1,300 – 1,500 rpm

ature is 0_C

ature is 20_C

ature is 40_C
When engine coolant temper- 750 – 950 rpm

ature is 80_C
25 Barometric Ignition switch: ON At altitude of 0 m 101 kPa

pressure
sensor At altitude of 600 m 95 kPa
At altitude of 1,200 m 88 kPa
At altitude of 1,800 m 81 kPa
26 Idle position Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: Set to idle ON

switch (Check by operating accelerator position
pedal
d l repeatedly.)
t dl )
Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF* 1
27 Power Engine: Idling Steering wheel stationary OFF

steering
t g fluid
pressure
Steering wheel turning ON
switch
28 A/C switch Engine: Idling A/C switch: OFF OFF

(when A/C switch is ON,ON A/C
compressor should be operating.) A/C switch: ON ON


No. item
41 Injector Engine: Cranking When engine coolant temper- 27 – 41 ms

drive time*2 ature is 0_C (injection is
carried out for all cylinders
simultaneously)
When engine coolant temper- 14 – 22 ms

ature is 20_C
When engine coolant temper- 3.9 – 5.9 ms

ature is 80_C
Injector D Engine coolant temperature: Engine is idling 1.2 – 2.4 ms

drive time*3 80 – 95_C
D Lamps, electric cooling fan and 2,500 r/min 1.0 – 2.2 ms
D Transmission: Neutral When engine is suddenly Increases
raced
44 Ignition D Engine: After having been Engine is idling 3 – 13_BTDC

advance warmed up
D Timing lamp is set.
set (The timing
lamp is set in order to check 2,500 r/min 24 – 44_BTDC
actual ignition timing.)
45 ISC D Engine coolant temperature: A/C switch: OFF 2 – 25 steps

(stepper) 80 – 90_C
motor D Lamps electric cooling fan and
Lamps,
position *4 all accessories: OFF A/C switch: OFF → ON Increases by 10 – 70
D Transmission: Neutral steps
D Idle position switch: ON
D Engine: Idling
(When A/C switch is ON, A/C A/C switch: OFF Increases by 5 – 50
compressor should be operat- steps
ing.)
49 A/C relay Engine: After having been warmed A/C switch: OFF OFF (Compressor
up/Engine is idling clutch is not operating)
A/C switch: ON ON (Compressor

clutch is operating)
NOTE
*1: The idle position switch normally turns off when the voltage of the throttle position sensor is 50 – 100 mV
higher than the voltage at the idle position. If the idle position switch turns back on after the throttle valve
is opened, the idle position switch and the throttle position sensor need to be adjusted.
*2: The injector drive time represents the time when the cranking speed is at 250 r/min or below when the power
supply voltage is 11 V.
*3: In a new vehicle [driven approximately 500 km or less], the injector drive time is sometimes 10% longer than
the standard time.
*4: In a new vehicle [driven approximately 500 km or less], the step of the stepper motor is sometimes 30 steps
greater than the standard value.

<EVOLUTION-V>
Descriptions other than those given below are the same as for the EVOLUTION-IV.

No. item
12 Air flow D Engine coolant temperature: Engine is idling 12 – 38 Hz

sensor*1 80 – 95_C
D Lamps, electric cooling fan and 2,500 r/min 36 – 76 Hz
D Transmission: Neutral Engine is raced Frequency increases
in response to racing
41 Injector Engine: Cranking*2 When engine coolant temper- 27 – 40 ms

drive time*2 ature is 0_C

ature is 20_C

ature is 80_C
Injector D Engine coolant temperature: Engine is idling 0.9 – 2.1 ms

drive time *3 80 – 95_C
D Lamps, electric cooling fan and 2,500 r/min 0.7 – 1.9 ms
D Transmission: Neutral When engine is suddenly Increases
raced
44 Ignition D Engine: After having been Engine is idling 0 – 13_BTDC

advance warmed up
D Timing lamp is set. 2,500 r/min 24 – 44_BTDC
NOTE
*1: In a new vehicle (driven approximately 500 km or less), the air flow sensor output frequency is sometimes
10 % higher than the standard frequency.
*2: The injector drive time represents the time when the cranking speed is at 250 r/min or below when the power
supply voltage is 11 V.
*3: In a new vehicle (driven approximately 500 km or less), the injector drive time is sometimes 10 % longer than
the standard time.

6. ENGINE-ECU INSPECTION
6-1 TERMINAL VOLTAGES
Engine ECU connector
Terminal Check item Check condition (Engine condition) Normal condition

No.
1 No.1 injector While engine is idling after having been warmed up, Momentarily drops
pedal
suddenly depress the accelerator pedal. V
slightly from 11 – 14 V.
14 No.2 injector
2 No.3 injector
15 No.4 injector
3 Fuel pressure control Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage

valve
Engine: Cranking to idling (within about two minutes) 0 – 3 V to battery
voltage
4 Stepper motor coil (A1) Engine: Immediately after engine has been started Changes repeatedly
for warming up from battery voltage to
17 Stepper motor coil (A2) 0 – 6 V and from 0 – 6
V to battery voltage.
voltage
5 Stepper motor coil (B1)
18 Stepper motor coil (B2)
6 Secondary air control Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage

solenoid valve
8 Fuel pump relay Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
Engine: Idling 0–3V
10 Power transistor unit Engine speed: 3,000 r/min 0.3 – 3.0 V

(A)
23 Power transistor unit

(B)
11 Wastegate solenoid Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage

valve
Engine: At idle after having been warmed up (when 0–3V
premium gasoline is used)
12 Power supply Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
25
19 Air flow sensor reset Engine: Idling 0–1V

signal
Engine speed: 3,000 r/min 6–9V
20 Fan motor relay (HI) Fan not operating (coolant temperature: 90_C or Battery voltage
below)
Fan at high speed (coolant temperature: 105_C or 0–3V

above)


No.
21 Fan motor relay (LOW) Fan not operating (coolant temperature: 90_C or Battery voltage
below)
Fan at low speed (coolant temperature: 90 – 100_C) 0–3V
22 A/C relay D Engine: Idling Battery voltage, or 6 V

D A/C switch: OFF to ON (Compressor is being or more instanta-
driven.) neously to 0 – 3 V
33 Alternator G terminal D Engine: Warm, idle (radiator fan: OFF) Voltage rises by 0.2 –
D Headlamp: OFF to ON 3.5 V.
D Brake lamp: OFF to ON
D Rear defogger switch: OFF to ON
36 Engine warning lamp Ignition switch: OFF → ON 0 – 3 V → Battery

voltage (After several
seconds have
elapsed)
37 Power steering fluid Engine: Idling after When steering wheel is Battery voltage
pressure switch warming up stationary
When steering wheel is 0–3V

turned
38 Control relay Ignition switch: OFF Battery voltage
Ignition switch: ON 0–3V
39 Fuel pump relay No.2 While engine is idling, suddenly depress the Momentarily rises
accelerator pedal. slightly from 0 to 3 V.
40 Exhaust temperature Ignition switch: OFF to ON 0 – 3 V to battery

warning lamp voltage (After several
seconds have
elapsed)
41 Alternator FR terminal D Engine: Warm, idle (radiator fan: OFF) Voltage drops by 0.2 –
D Headlamp: OFF to ON 3.5 V.
D Brake lamp: OFF to ON
D Rear defogger switch: OFF to ON
45 A/C switch Engine: Idle speed Turn the A/C switch OFF 0–3V
Turn the A/C switch ON Battery voltage

(A/C compressor is oper-
ating)
60 Oxygen sensor heater Engine: Idling 0–3V

(Evolution V only)
(Evolution-V
Engine speed: 5,000 r/min Battery voltage
71 Ignition switch-ST Engine: Cranking 8 V or more


No.
72 Intake air temperature Ignition switch: ON When intake air tempera- 3.2 – 3.8 V
sensor ture is 0_C
When intake air tempera- 2.3 – 2.9 V

ture is 20_C

ture is 40_C

ture is 80_C
76 Oxygen sensor Engine: Running at 2,000 r/min after having been 0 ↔ 0.8 V
warmed up (Check using a digital type voltmeter) (Changes repeatedly)
80 Backup power supply Ignition switch: OFF Battery voltage
81 Sensor impressed Ignition switch: ON 4.5 – 5.5 V

voltage
82 Ignition switch-IG Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
83 Engine coolant Ignition switch: ON When engine coolant 3.2 – 3.8 V

temperature sensor temperature is 0_C
When engine coolant 2.3 – 2.9 V

temperature is 20_C

temperature is 40_C

temperature is 80_C
84 Throttle position sensor Ignition switch: ON Set throttle valve to idle 0.3 – 1.0 V
position
Fully open throttle valve 4.5 – 5.5 V
85 Barometric pressure Ignition switch: ON When altitude is 0 m 3.7 – 4.3 V

sensor
When altitude is 1,200 m 3.2 – 3.8 V
86 Vehicle speed sensor D Ignition switch: ON 0↔5V

D Move the vehicle slowly forward (Changes repeatedly)
87 Idle position switch Ignition switch: ON Set throttle valve to idle 0–1V
position
Slightly open throttle 4 V or more

valve
88 Camshaft position Engine: Cranking 0.4 – 3.0 V

sensor
Engine: Idle speed 0.5 – 2.0 V
89 Crank angle sensor Engine: Cranking 0.4 – 4.0 V
Engine: Idle speed 1.5 – 2.5 V
90 Air flow sensor Engine: Idle speed 2.2 – 3.2 V
Engine speed: 2,500 r/min

6-2 RESISTANCE AND CONTINUITY BETWEEN HARNESS SIDE CONNECTORS AND
TERMINALS
Engine-ECU Harness Side Connector Terminal Arrangement
Terminal No. Inspection item Normal condition (Check condition)
1 – 12 No.1 injector 2 – 3 Ω (At 20_C)
14 – 12 No.2 injector
3 – 12 Fuel pressure control valve 28 – 36 Ω (At 20_C)
4 – 12 Stepper motor coil (A1) 28 – 33 Ω (At 20_C)
17 – 12 Stepper motor coil (A2)
5 – 12 Stepper motor coil (B1)
18 – 12 Stepper motor coil (B2)
6 – 12 Secondary air control solenoid valve 28 – 36 Ω (At 20_C)
11 – 12 Wastegate solenoid valve 62 – 74 Ω (At 20_C)
13 – Body earth Engine-ECU earth Continuity established (0 Ω)
26 – Body earth
60 – 12 Oxygen sensor heater (EVOLUTION-V 11 – 18 Ω (at 20_C)

only)
72 – 92 Intake air temperature sensor 5.3 – 6.7 kΩ (When intake air temperature is 0_C)
2.3 – 3.0 kΩ (When intake air temperature is 20_C)
74 – 77 High temperature sensor 3 Ω or less
83 – 92 Engine coolant temperature sensor 5.1 – 6.5 kΩ (When coolant temperature is 0_C)
2.1 – 2.7 kΩ (When coolant temperature is 20_C)
87 – 92 Idle position switch Continuity established (when throttle valve is at idle

position)
No continuity (when throttle valve is slightly open)
91 – Body earth – Continuity established

7. INSPECTION PROCEDURE USING

OSCILLOSCOPE
7-1 AIR FLOW SENSOR (AFS)
Observing waveforms displayed on the oscilloscope allows
you to visually identify possible unusual disturbances in
waveform that could temporarily occur in the air flow sensor
output.
<Measurement procedure>
Oscilloscope
(1) Disconnect the air flow sensor connector and connect
the special tool (Test Harness: MB991709) to it. (Ensure
that all terminals are connected.)
(2) Connect the oscilloscope probe to terminal no. 3 of air
flow sensor connector.
NOTE
If the engine ECU connector is used, connect the
oscilloscope probe to terminal no. 90.
(3) Perform the same steps from here on as with the 4G9
engine.
7-2 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND CRANK
ANGLE SENSOR
Perform the same steps as with the conventional 4G9 engine
for the inspection.
7-3 INJECTOR
Observing waveforms displayed on the oscilloscope allows
you to visually check the conditions of injector drive signals
actually output from the engine ECU.
Oscilloscope Injector Control Signal (Oscilloscope 1)

(1) Disconnect the injector connector and connect the special
tool (Test Harness: MB991348) to the circuit. (Ensure
that the terminals on both the power supply and engine
ECU sides are connected.)
(2) Connect the oscilloscope probe to terminal no. 2 of injector
connector.
NOTE
If the engine ECU connector is used for the measurement,
take measurements at each of the following terminals.
Connect the oscilloscope probe to terminal no. 1 when
the waveform is observed with no. 1 cylinder, to terminal
no. 14 when the waveform is observed with no. 2 cylinder,
to terminal no. 2 when the waveform is observed with
no. 3 cylinder, and to terminal no. 15 when the waveform
is observed with no. 4 cylinder.

<Standard waveform>
Point A
Observation conditions
Probe selector switch × 10
Point B Solenoid counter emf AC-GND-DC DC
Injector (approx. 7 × 10 V)
drive time VOLTS/DIV. 1V
Power supply voltage
TIME/DIV. 0.5 ms
Misc. –
Engine speed Idle
<Explanation on waveform>
The power supply voltage is being normally applied and, when a signal is received from the engine
ECU, the voltage drops to around 0 V for the period of time equivalent to its drive signal.
When the signal from the engine ECU turns OFF, the counter emf of the coil causes a voltage peak
to develop, thus resuming the power supply voltage.
Injector drive time:
The fuel injection time as determined by the engine ECU according to the output values of sensors
including AFS. Injector drive time = effective injection time + invalid injection time (Invalid injection
time: corrects operation time lag caused by a power supply voltage drop)
Solenoid coil counter emf:
When the signal from the engine ECU turns OFF, counter emf occurs in the injector coil (approx.
65 to 75 V).
Power supply voltage:
The power supply voltage is being applied in the absence of a signal from the engine ECU. If this
voltage is low, it extends the invalid injection time and, thus, the drive time.
<Waveform observation points>
Point A: Strength of solenoid coil counter emf
Solenoid coil counter emf is low or zero. Injector solenoid shorting
Point B: Injector drive time

When the engine is suddenly raced, the drive time temporarily
extends by a wide margin and soon returns to the normal
drive time corresponding to the engine speed.
At idle
During racing

Injector Power Supply Voltage (Oscilloscope 2)

(1) Disconnect the resistor connector and connect the special
tool (Harness Connector: MD998463) to the circuit.
(2) Connect the oscilloscope probe to resistor connector
terminal (1) (special tool red clip) when the waveform
is observed with no. 1 cylinder, to terminal (4) (black
clip) when the waveform is observed with no. 2 cylinder,
to terminal (5) (green clip) when the waveform is observed
with no. 3 cylinder, and to terminal (6) (yellow clip) when
the waveform is observed with no. 4 cylinder.
(3) For the power supply voltage, observe the waveform of
the injector control signal at the same time. (Refer to
P.13-26 for the injector control signal measurement
procedure.)
<Standard waveform>
Observation conditions
Injector power supply voltage waveform Injector control signal
Probe selector switch ×1 × 10
AC-GND-DC AC DC
VOLTS/DIV. 5V 1V
TIME/DIV. 0.5 ms
Misc. To be timed with injector control signal
Engine speed Idle (850 rpm)
Plunger in fully
opened position
Point B
Injector power supply
voltage waveform
(oscilloscope 2)
Point A
Injector control signal

waveform
(oscilloscope 1)
Fuel injection time

Time

<Explanation of waveform>
The injector power supply voltage waveform shows a voltage drop caused by resistance of the resistor.
As the amount of current increases, voltage gradually decreases and a spike occurs at the plunger fully
opened position due to counter emf.
<Waveform observation points>
Point A: Voltage drop during fuel injection time (Refer to abnormal waveform example 1.)
Difference from standard waveform Possible cause
Voltage drop during fuel injection time is small (there Resistance of resistor is too small. Resistance of injector
should normally be a voltage drop of about 10 V). is too large.
Point B: Spike when plunger is fully open (Refer to abnormal waveform example 2.)
Difference from standard waveform Possible cause
No spike when plunger is fully open Plunger inoperative
<Abnormal waveform examples>

D Example 1
[Cause of problem]
Abnormal waveform
Resistance of the resistor is too small.
[Waveform characteristics]
Small voltage drop
Normal waveform
D Example 2
[Cause of problem]
Plunger is inoperative.
[Waveform characteristics]
No spike when plunger is fully open.
7-4 IGNITION COIL

Perform the same steps as with the conventional 4G9 engine
for the inspection.

13-30 MPI – On-vehicle Service
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
1. IDLE POSITION SWITCH AND THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR (TPS) ADJUSTMENT
The thickness of the feeler gauge inserted between the fixed
SAS and throttle lever should be 0.45 mm.
2. FIXED SAS ADJUSTMENT

<EVOLUTION-IV>
Turn down one turn after the fixed SAS has touched the
throttle lever.
<EVOLUTION-V>
Turn down 1-1/4 turns after the fixed SAS has touched the
throttle lever.
3. BASIC IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT

The basic idle speed should be 850 ± 50 rpm.
4. FUEL PRESSURE MEASUREMENT

The fuel pressure gauge should be installed at the location
shown on the left.

MPI – On-vehicle Service 13-31
5. MPI SYSTEM COMPONENTS LAYOUT
Name Symbol Name Symbol
A/C switch Q Exhaust temperature warning lamp S
A/C relay H Fuel pressure control valve A
Air flow sensor (with a built-in intake air temperature F Ignition coil and power transistor unit L
sensor and barometric pressure sensor)
Injector B
Camshaft position sensor M ISC servo D
Control relay and fuel pump relay P Oxygen sensor K
Coolant temperature sensor E Power steering fluid pressure switch I
Crank angle sensor J Secondary air control solenoid valve N
Detonation sensor C Throttle position sensor (with a built-in idle switch) D
Diagnosis connector R
Engine ECU O Vehicle speed sensor T
Engine warning lamp S Wastegate solenoid valve G

Equipment sideconnector 6. INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

CHECK
1. Disconnect the air flow sensor connector.
2. Measure resistance between terminals 5 and 6.
Standard value:
2.3 – 3.0 kΩ (at 20_C)
0.30 – 0.42 kΩ (at 80_C)
Air flow sensor
Intake air temperature sensor 3. Measure resistance while heating the sensor using a hair
drier.
Normal condition:
Temperature (_C) Resistance (kΩ)
Higher Smaller
4. If the value deviates from the standard value or the
resistance remains unchanged, replace the air flow sensor
assembly.
7. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

SENSOR CHECK
The engine coolant temperature sensor is located as shown
on the left.
Standard value:
2.1 – 2.7 kΩ (at 20_C)
0.26 – 0.36 kΩ (at 80_C)
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Oxygen sensor equipment side connector

8. OXYGEN SENSOR CHECK
<EVOLUTION-IV>
The sensor connector is located as shown on the left.
Oxygen sensor connector
<EVOLUTION-V>
(1) Disconnect the oxygen sensor connector and connect
Oxygen sensor the special tool (Test Harness: MD998464) to the oxygen
sensor connector.

(2) Check that there is continuity (11 to 18 Ω at 20_C) across
terminal no. 1 (special tool red clip) and terminal no. 3
Red clip (special tool blue clip) of the oxygen sensor connector.
(3) If there is no continuity, replace the oxygen sensor.
MD998464
Blue clip
(4) Run the engine until the engine coolant temperature

Red clip exceeds 80_C.
(5) Using jumper wires, connect oxygen sensor terminal no.
Black clip 1 (special tool red clip) and terminal no. 3 (special tool
blue clip) to battery (+) and (–) terminal, respectively.
Caution
Make sure of the correct connections: if a wrong
Blue clip connection is made, a broken oxygen sensor results.
White clip (6) Connect a digital voltmeter between terminal no. 2 (special
MD998464 tool black clip) and terminal no. 4 (special tool white clip).
(7) Race the engine repeatedly to measure the oxygen sensor
output voltage.
Standard value:
Engine Oxygen sensor NOTE

output voltage
When 0.6 – 1.0 V When engine racing is

engine is repeated to enrich air-fuel
raced ratio, an operational oxygen
sensor should output a volt-
age of 0.6 to 1.0 V.
NOTE
Use the same procedures to remove and install the oxygen
sensor.

9. INJECTOR CHECK
Injection Condition Check
(1) Release the residual pressure from the fuel pipe line to
prevent fuel from flowing out.
(2) Remove the injector.
(3) Set up the special tools (Injector Test Set, Adapter, Fuel
Pressure Regulator, and Clip) as illustrated below.
(4) From here on, use the same procedure as with the
conventional 4G9 engine for the check.
Main hose MD998741
Return hose
MB991607
Fuel Pressure Regulator: MD116395
MD998706
Clip: MD998746
Injector
Battery
10. RESISTOR CHECK

Resistor (1) Disconnect the resistor connector.
(2) Measure resistance across terminals as detailed below.
Standard value
Measurement terminals Resistance (Ω)
1–3
4–3
5.5
5 5 to 6.5
6 5 (at 20_C)
5–3
6–3

11. FUEL PUMP RELAY NO.2 CHECK
(1) Remove fuel pump relay No.2.
Fuel pump relay No.2
(2) Using jumper wires, connect fuel pump relay No.2 terminal
(3) to battery (+) terminal, and terminal (1) to battery
(–) terminal, respectively.
(3) Connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire on the
battery (–) terminal end, check for continuity across
terminal (2) and terminal (5), and across terminal (4) and
terminal (5), of fuel pump relay No.2.
Jumper wire Continuity across Continuity across

terminals (2) and (5) terminals (4) and (5)
Connected No Yes
Disconnected Yes No
(4) If the continuity is checked abnormally, replace fuel pump

relay No.2.
12. FUEL PUMP RESISTOR CHECK

(1) Disconnect the fuel pump resistor connector.
Fuel pump resistor
(2) Measure resistance across the terminals.

Standard value: 0.6 – 0.9 Ω
(3) If the measurement falls outside the specified range,
replace the fuel pump resistor.

13-36 MPI – Injector
INJECTOR
(1) Fuel Discharge Prevention (1) Air Hose D Installation
(2) Air Hose D Removal (Refer to GROUP15 – Intercooler.)
(Refer to GROUP15 – Intercooler.) (2) Fuel Leakage Check
3, 6
3 9 8 O-ring
1
4 8
11
5 12
11 10
7
10 – 13 {1.0 – 1.3}
6
O-ring
4 12
Engine oil
9 {0.9}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Injector connector 7. Fuel return pipe
2. PCV hose connection AA" 8. Delivery pipe
AA" 3. High-pressure fuel hose connection 9. Insulator
4. Fuel return hose connection 10. Insulator
5. Vacuum hose connector AA" "AA 11. Injector
AA" 6. Fuel pressure regulator 12. Grommet

MPI – Throttle Body 13-37
THROTTLE BODY
(1) Engine Coolant Draining (1) Strut Tower Bar Installation
(2) Air Hose D Removal (2) Air Hose D Installation
(Refer to GROUP 15 – Intercooler.) (Refer to GROUP 15 – Intercooler.)
(3) Strut Tower Bar Removal (3) Engine Coolant Supplying
(4) Accelerator Cable Adjustment
5 {0.5}
2
4
19 {1.9}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Accelerator cable connection 5. Water hose connection
2. Throttle position sensor connector 6. Throttle body
3. Idle speed control servo connector "AA 7. Throttle body gasket
4. Vacuum hose connection
Up INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

"AA THROTTLE BODY GASKET INSTALLATION
Place the gasket so that the projecting part is positioned
as shown in the illustration, and then install it between the
intake manifold and the throttle body.
Towards front
of vehicle

14-1
ENGINE
COOLING
CONTENTS
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
LUBRICANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 WATER HOSE AND WATER PIPE . . . . . . . . 6

Coolant Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

14-2 ENGINE COOLING – Service Specifications / Lubricant / On-vehicle Service
Items Standard value
Thermostat valve opening temperature _C When open 76.5 ± 1.5
When fully open 90
Thermostat lift mm 8.5 or more
LUBRICANT
Items Brand Quantity dm3 {ȏ}
Coolant capacity (in condenser tank) MITSUBISHI GENUINE DIA QUEEN SUPER 6 {6}
LONG LIFE COOLANT
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
COOLANT REPLACEMENT
CYLINDER BLOCK DRAIN PLUG
44 {4.5}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Drying sealant: HELMESEAL H-1M
RADIATOR CAP VALVE OPENING PRESSURE

CHECK
On EVOLUTION-V, the radiator cap valve opening pressure
must be as shown below.
Standard value: 93 – 123 kPa {0.95 – 1.25 kgf/cm2}
Limit: 83 kPa {0.85 kgf/cm2}

ENGINE COOLING – Thermostat 14-3
THERMOSTAT
D Engine Coolant Draining and Supplying
(Refer to P.14-2.)
D Air Intake Hose Assembly Removal and Installation
(Refer to GROUP 15 – Intercooler.)
3 13 {1.3}
5
4
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
AA" "BA 1. Radiator lower hose connection
2. Control wiring harness connection
3. Water inlet fitting
"AA 4. Thermostat

AA" RADIATOR LOWER HOSE DISCONNECTION
After making mating marks on the radiator hose and the hose
clamp, disconnect the radiator hose.

14-4 ENGINE COOLING – Thermostat

Jiggle valve
"AA THERMOSTAT INSTALLATION
(1) Install the thermostat so that the jiggle valve is facing
straight up.
Caution
Make absolutely sure that no oil is adhering to the
rubber ring of the thermostat. If the rubber ring is
Rubber ring damaged, replace the thermostat.
(2) When assembling the thermostat, be careful not to fold
over or scratch the rubber ring.
"BA RADIATOR LOWER HOSE CONNECTION
(1) Insert each hose as far as the projection of the water
inlet fitting.
(2) Align the mating marks on the radiator hose and hose
clamp, and then connect the radiator hose.
INSPECTION
THERMOSTAT CHECK
(1) Immerse the thermostat in water, and heat the water while
stirring. Check the thermostat valve opening temperature.
Standard value: 76.5 ± 1.5_C
(2) Check that the amount of valve lift is at the standard

value when the water is at the full-opening temperature.
Standard value:
Full-opening temperature: 90_C
Amount of valve lift: 8.5 mm or more
NOTE
Measure the valve height when the thermostat is fully
Valve lift closed, calculate the valve lift by subtracting this
measurement from the valve height when the thermostat
is fully open.

ENGINE COOLING – Water Pump 14-5
WATER PUMP
D Engine Coolant Draining and Supplying D Timing Belt and Timing Belt B Removal and Installation
(Refer to P.14-2.) (Refer to GROUP 11.)
22 {2.2}
3
24 {2.4} 2
12 – 15 {1.2 – 1.5} Unit: Nm {kgf@m}

Bolt specifications
8 × 70
8 × 14
8 × 24
8 × 22
Screw diameter × length mm
Removal steps
1. Alternator brace
2. Water pump
3. Water pump gasket
"AA 4. O-ring
Water pump INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

"AA O-RING INSTALLATION
Fit the O-ring in the O-ring groove in the water inlet pipe,
O-ring and coat the outer circumference of the O-ring or the inside
surface of the water pump with water before inserting the
pipe.
Water inlet pipe

14-6 ENGINE COOLING – Water Hose and Water Pipe
WATER HOSE AND WATER PIPE

(1) Coolant Draining and Refilling (Refer to P.14-2.)
(2) Air Hose C Removal and Installation
(Refer to GROUP 15 – INTERCOOLER.)
(3) Air Control Valve Bracket Removal and Installation
(Refer to GROUP 15 – AIR CONTROL VALVE.)
3 24 {2.4}
41 {4.2}
13 1 6
10 {1.0}
7
13 {1.3}
2 5
10
4
24 {2.4} 13 {1.3}
8 12
11
41 {4.2}
48 {4.9}
14
9
10 {1.0}
f3mm
Unit: Nm {kgf@m} THREEBOND 1207F
Removal steps
AA" "CA 1. Radiator upper hose connection 9. Heater hose connection
AA" "CA 2. Radiator lower hose connection "AA 10. O-ring
3. Water hose 11. Water inlet pipe
4. Water hose "AA 12. O-ring
5. Water inlet fitting D Turbocharger (Refer to GROUP 15.)
"BA 6. Thermostat case assembly 13. Water pipe assembly A
7. Water hose 14. Water pipe assembly B
8. Water hose

ENGINE COOLING – Radiator 14-7
RADIATOR
D Engine Coolant Draining and Supplying (Refer to
P.14-2.)
12 {1.2}
12 {1.2}
6 11 10
2
13
6
3
12
4
6
8
12 {1.2}
5
1
9
9
7
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Radiator removal steps Radiator fan motor removal steps

1. Drain plug 1. Drain plug
2. Radiator cap 2. Radiator cap
3. Overflow hose AA" "AA 6. Radiator upper hose
4. Reserve tank D Air intake hose
5. Reserve tank bracket (Refer to GROUP15 – Intercooler.)
AA" "AA 6. Radiator upper hose 10. Radiator fan motor assembly
AA" "AA 7. Radiator lower hose 11. Fan
8. Radiator assembly 12. Radiator fan motor
9. Lower insulator 13. Shroud
10. Radiator fan motor assembly

14-8 ENGINE COOLING – Radiator

AA" RADIATOR UPPER HOSE / RADIATOR LOWER
HOSE DISCONNECTION
After making mating marks on the radiator hose and the hose
clamp, disconnect the radiator hose.

"AA RADIATOR LOWER HOSE / RADIATOR UPPER
HOSE CONNECTION
(1) Insert each hose as far as the projection of the water
inlet or outlet fitting.
(2) Align the mating marks on the radiator hose and hose
clamp, and then connect the radiator hose.
Caution
Fit the clamp on the hose at the same position as
before.
INSPECTION
1. RADIATOR FAN MOTOR CHECK
Apply the battery voltage across connector terminals 1 and
2, and terminals 3 and 4, of the radiator fan motor and check,
at that time, that the radiator fan turns.
Radiator fan motor relay LO 2. POWER RELAY CONTINUITY CHECK
Battery voltage Terminal number

1 3 4 5
When deenergized
When energized

ENGINE COOLING – Radiator 14-9
Radiator fan motor relay HI Battery voltage Terminal number
1 2 3 4
When deenergized
When energized

15-1
INTAKE AND
EXHAUST
CONTENTS
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 8. Secondary Air Valve Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

9. Vacuum Tank Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SPECIAL TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
INTERCOOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. Turbocharger Boost Pressure Check . . . . 2 AIR CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2. Boost Pressure Control System Check . . 3
INTAKE MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3. Wastegate Actuator Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4. Wastegate Solenoid Valve Check . . . . . . . 4 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND
5. Air Bypass Valve Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 TURBOCHARGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
6. Secondary Air Control System Check . . . 5 EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER . . . . . . . . 14
7. Secondary Air Control Solenoid Valve
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Service Specifications /
15-2 INTAKE AND EXHAUST – Special Tool / On-vehicle Service
Turbocharger boost pressure kPa {kg/cm2} 53 – 87 {0.54 – 0.89} –
Wastegate actuator activation pressure kPa {kg/cm2} Approx. 100 {1.02} –
Wastegate solenoid valve coil resistance (at 20_C) Ω 62 – 74 –
Air bypass valve activation pressure kPa {mmHg} Approx. 53 {400} –
Secondary air control solenoid valve coil resistance (at 20_C) Ω 28 – 36 –
Intake manifold and exhaust manifold mounting surface distortion Within 0.15 0.20
mm
SPECIAL TOOL
Tool Number Name Application
MB998770 Oxygen sensor Removal and installation of oxygen sensor
wrench
Wastegate ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

solenoid valve
1. TURBOCHARGER BOOST PRESSURE
Blank plug
CHECK
Caution
Carry out driving tests in a location where full-throttle
acceleration is possible with utmost safety. Two persons
should be in the vehicle during the test, the assistant
in the front passenger seat reading the pressure gauge.
(1) Disconnect the hose (black) from the boost pressure
control solenoid valve and fit the pressure gauge to this
hose.
After the hose (black) has been disconnected, fit a blank
plug to the solenoid valve nipple.
(2) Drive at full-throttle acceleration in second gear and
measure the boost pressure when the engine speed
exceeds about 3,000 r/min.
Standard value:
53 – 87 kPa {0.54 – 0.89 kg/cm2} <EVOLUTION-IV>
59 – 84 kPa {0.61 – 0.86 kg/cm2} <EVOLUTION-V>

INTAKE AND EXHAUST – On-vehicle Service 15-3
(3) If the boost pressure is lower than the standard value,
check for following which are probably the cause:
D Wastegate actuator inoperative
D Boost pressure leak
D Turbocharger defective
(4) If the boost pressure is higher than the standard value,
boost pressure control is probably faulty. Make the
following checks:
D Wastegate actuator inoperative
D Wastegate valve inoperative
D Wastegate actuator rubber hose disconnected or
cracked
Wastegate 2. BOOST PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM

solenoid valve CHECK
(1) Disconnect the hose (black) from the wastegate solenoid
valve and connect a three-way joint between the hose
and solenoid valve.
(2) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the three-way joint.
(3) Disconnect the hose (black) from the intake pipe nipple
connected to the turbocharger compressor housing and
fit a blank plug to this nipple.
(4) Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, keep it
disconnected for 10 sec. or more, and then reconnect
it back again.
(5) Block and unblock the end of the vacuum hose (black)
with a finger to apply vacuum and check for the vacuum
condition.
Engine condition Hose (black) end Normally
Stationary Unblocked Vacuum leaks.

(ignition switch: ON)
Blocked Vacuum retained.
Idling after warmup Vacuum leaks.
NOTE
If the vacuum condition is faulty, the wastegate actuator,
wastegate solenoid valve, or hose is probably defective.

15-4 INTAKE AND EXHAUST – On-vehicle Service
3. WASTEGATE ACTUATOR CHECK

(1) Connect a hand pump (pressure type) to the nipple.
(2) Gradually increase the pressure being applied to check
for the pressure at which the wastegate actuator rod starts
moving (approx. 1 mm stroke).
Standard value: Approx. 100 kPa {1.02 kg/cm2}
Caution
Do not apply a pressure more than 120 kPa {1.23
kg/cm 2} to prevent the diaphragm from being
damaged.
(3) If the pressure drastically deviates from the standard
value, check the actuator or wastegate valve and, if
necessary, replace the actuator or turbocharger assembly.
4. WASTEGATE SOLENOID VALVE CHECK

4-1 OPERATION CHECK
(1) Connect a hand vacuum pump to nipple A of the solenoid
valve.
(2) Using jumper wires, connect the solenoid valve terminal
to battery terminals.
(3) Disconnecting and reconnecting the jumper wire on the
(–) terminal side, apply vacuum to check for airtightness.
Jumper wire Nipple B condition Normally
Connected Open Vacuum leaks.
Plugged Vacuum retained.
Disconnected Open Vacuum retained.
4-2 COIL RESISTANCE CHECK

Measure the resistance across solenoid valve terminals.
Standard value: 62 – 74 Ω (at 20_C)
5. AIR BYPASS VALVE CHECK

(1) Remove the air bypass valve.
(2) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the air bypass valve
nipple.
(3) Apply a vacuum of approx. 45 kPa {340 mmHg} and
check that the valve is airtight.
(4) Increase the vacuum and check for valve operation.
Vacuum Valve operation
Approx. 53 kPa {400 mmHg} Starts moving

INTAKE AND EXHAUST – On-vehicle Service 15-5
6. SECONDARY AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
CHECK
(1) Start the engine and let it run at idle speed.
(2) Short-circuit the no. 6 terminal of the engine ECU
connector using a jumper wire and check at this time
that the secondary air valve lifts.
At this time, the engine ECU connector should be
connected.
7. SECONDARY AIR CONTROL SOLENOID

VALVE CHECK
7-1 OPERATION CHECK
(1) Disconnect the vacuum hose (white stripe, yellow stripe)
from the solenoid valve.
(2) Disconnect the harness connector.
Secondary air control

solenoid valve
(3) Connect a hand vacuum pump to nipple A of the solenoid

valve.
(4) Using jumper wires, connect the solenoid valve terminal
to battery terminals.
(5) Disconnecting and reconnecting the jumper wire on the
(–) terminal side, apply vacuum to check for airtightness.
Jumper wire Nipple B condition Normally

Battery
Connected Open Vacuum leaks.
Plugged Vacuum retained.
Disconnected Open Vacuum leaks.
7-2 COIL RESISTANCE CHECK

Measure the resistance across solenoid valve terminals.
Standard value: 28 – 36 Ω (at 20_C)

15-6 INTAKE AND EXHAUST – On-vehicle Service
8. SECONDARY AIR VALVE CHECK

(1) Remove the secondary air valve.
(2) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the secondary air valve
A nipple.
(3) Apply a vacuum of 67 kPa {500 mmHg} and check that
the vacuum is retained.
(4) Blow air from side (A) and side (B) of the secondary
air valve to check for air passage.
B Vacuum Air blowing direction Air passage
0 kPa (A) → (B) No

(vacuum not applied)
40 kPa {300 mmHg} (A) → (B) Yes

or more
(B) → (A) No
9. VACUUM TANK CHECK

(1) Connect a hand vacuum pump to nipple A of the vacuum
tank. Applying a vacuum of 67 kPa {500 mmHg}, check
that the vacuum is retained.
(2) Connect a hand vacuum pump to nipple B of the vacuum
A
tank.
B
(3) Apply a vacuum of 67 kPa {500 mmHg] with nipple A
plugged with a finger. Check that the vacuum leaks when
the finger is then released.

INTAKE AND EXHAUST – Intercooler 15-7
INTERCOOLER
D Front Bumper Removal and Installation
Hose clamp
tightening torque 7
6 {0.6}
6
8
10 – 13
{1.0 – 1.3} 2
3 4
10 – 13
{1.0 – 1.3} 11 10 9
1
5
12 13
14 15
16
10 – 13
10 – 13 {1.0 – 1.3}
{1.0 – 1.3}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Vacuum hose connection "AA 9. Air hose C
2. Air bypass valve assembly "AA 10. Air hose A
3. Breather hose connection 11. Air pipe A
4. Vacuum hose connection "AA 12. Air hose B
5. Air intake hose assembly 13. Intercooler assembly
"AA 6. Air bypass hose "AA 14. Air hose B
7. Air hose connection 15. Air pipe B
"AA 8. Air hose D 16. Air pipe bracket

"AA AIR HOSE B / AIR HOSE A / AIR HOSE C / AIR
HOSE D / AIR BYPASS HOSE INSTALLATION
Align the alignment mark (white paint) on each hose with
the protrusion on each pipe.

15-8 INTAKE AND EXHAUST – Air Control Valve
AIR CONTROL VALVE

10 – 12 {1.0 – 1.2}
1
10 – 12
{1.0 – 1.2}
4 {0.4}
5 2
4 {0.4}
24 {2.4} 12 – 15 {1.2 – 1.5}
3
4
49 {5.0}
22 {2.2}
6
24 {2.4}
7
22 {2.2} 35 {3.6}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Control harness connection 5. Air hose
2. Vacuum pipe hose assembly 6. Air control valve
3. Air pipe assembly 7. Engine hanger
"AA 4. Gasket 8. Air control valve bracket

"AA GASKET INSTALLATION
Protrusion
Install the gasket so that its protrusion is located as shown.

INTAKE AND EXHAUST – Intake Manifold 15-9
INTAKE MANIFOLD
(1) Fuel Discharge Prevention (1) Strut Tower Bar Installation
(2) Throttle Body Removal (Refer to GROUP 13.) (2) Air Control Valve Bracket Installation
(3) Front Exhaust Pipe Removal (Refer to P.15-14.) (Refer to P.15-8.)
(4) Air Control Valve Bracket Removal (Refer to P.15-8.) (3) Front Exhaust Pipe Installation (Refer to P.15-14.)
(5) Strut Tower Bar Removal (4) Throttle Body Installation (Refer to GROUP 13.)
10 – 13 {1.0 – 1.3}
13 1 3 {0.3}
7
5 2
14
17
15 3
16 6 4
7
19
10 – 12 7
20
{1.0 – 1.2}
20 {2.0}
12 11
10 12 – 15 {1.2 – 1.5}
8 15
18
35 {3.6} 22 {2.2}
20 {2.0}
9 35 {3.6}
14
30 {3.1}
O-ring
9 {0.9}
Engine oil
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Center cover 10. Intake manifold stay
2. Ignition coil connector connection 11. Oil level gauge guide assembly
3. Oxygen sensor connector connec- 12. Vacuum hose and pipe mounting
tion bolt
4. Crank angle sensor connector con- 13. Fuel return hose connection
nection "AA 14. Fuel high pressure hose connection
5. Injector connector connection AA" 15. Delivery pipe, injector, and pres-
6. PCV hose sure regulator assembly
7. Vacuum hose connection 16. Insulator
8. Brake booster vacuum hose con- 17. Insulator
nection 18. Alternator brace stay
9. Vacuum tank, solenoid valve, and 19. Intake manifold
vacuum hose assembly 20. Intake manifold gasket

15-10 INTAKE AND EXHAUST – Intake Manifold

AA" DELIVERY PIPE, INJECTOR AND PRESSURE
REGULATOR REMOVAL
Remove the delivery pipe with the injectors and pressure
regulator attached to it.
Caution
Care must be taken, when removing the delivery pipe,
not to drop the injector.

Delivery pipe
"AA HIGH-PRESSURE FUEL HOSE INSTALLATION
(1) When connecting the high-pressure fuel hose to the
delivery pipe, apply a small amount of new engine oil
to the O-ring and then insert the high-pressure fuel hose,
being careful not to damage the O-ring.
Caution
High-pressure Be careful not to let any engine oil get into the delivery
fuel hose O-ring pipe.
(2) Check to be sure that the high pressure hose turns
smoothly.
If it does not turn smoothly, the O-ring may be trapped.
Remove the high-pressure fuel hose to check for damaged
O-ring and then re-insert it into the delivery pipe and
check once again.
(3) Tighten the mounting bolts to the specification.
INSPECTION
INTAKE MANIFOLD CHECK
(1) Check the intake manifold for damage or cracking and
replace it if defective.
(2) Using a straight edge and feeler gauge, check for distortion
of the cylinder head installation surface.
Standard value: 0.15 mm or less
Limit: 0.2 mm

INTAKE AND EXHAUST – Exhaust Manifold and Turbocharger 15-11
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND TURBOCHARGER
(1) Radiator Removal and Installation (4) Air Pipe Assembly Removal and Installation
(Refer to GROUP 14.) (Refer to P.15-8.)
(2) Air Intake Hose and Air Hose A Removal and (5) Engine Oil Removal and Refilling
Installation (Refer to P.15-7.)
(3) Front Exhaust Pipe Removal and Installation
(Refer to P.15-14.)
12 – 15 {1.2 – 1.5} 29 {3.0} 54 – 64 {5.5 – 6.5}
49 {5.0} 20
19
49 {5.0}
3 27 – 32 {2.7 – 3.3}
17 {1.7}
2
10 – 12 {1.0 – 1.2}
13
49 – 59 {5.0 – 6.0} 14
15
16 6 4
17
10 {1.0}
42 {4.2}
10
12
5
10
10 {1.0}
54 – 64 {5.5 – 6.5} 11 7 18
8
9
9 {0.9} 17 – 20 {1.7 – 2.0} 30 {3.1}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Exhaust manifold heat protector 11. Air outlet fitting
AA" 2. Oxygen sensor "BA 12. Air outlet fitting gasket
3. Turbocharger heat protector 13. Turbocharger gasket
4. Water pipe assembly A connection 14. Turbocharger assembly
5. Water hose connection "AA 15. Turbocharger
AB" 6. Oil pipe 16. Exhaust fitting gasket
7. Starter 17. Exhaust fitting
8. Oil return pipe 18. Water pipe hose assembly
"CA 9. Oil return pipe gasket 19. Exhaust manifold
10. Vacuum hose connection 20. Exhaust manifold gasket

15-12 INTAKE AND EXHAUST – Exhaust Manifold and Turbocharger

AA" OXYGEN SENSOR REMOVAL
MB998770
AB" OIL PIPE REMOVAL

Caution
After the oil pipe has been removed, ensure that no foreign
matter will get into the oil passage holes in turbocharger.

"AA TURBOCHARGER INSTALLATION
(1) Clean the connections between oil pipe, oil return pipe,
and water pipe.
Caution
Ensure that no foreign matter will get into the
turbocharger.
(2) Through the oil pipe mounting hole in the turbocharger,
add fresh engine oil.
"BA AIR OUTLET FITTING GASKET INSTALLATION

Install the gasket so that its tab is located as shown.
Turbocharger
Tab

INTAKE AND EXHAUST – Exhaust Manifold and Turbocharger 15-13
"CA OIL RETURN PIPE GASKET INSTALLATION
Print
Install the gasket so that its print part is on the oil pan side.
Gasket
INSPECTION
1. TURBOCHARGER CHECK
(1) Visually check the turbine wheel and compressor wheel
for damage and cracking.
(2) Check that the turbine wheel and compressor wheel can
be turned manually with a light force.
(3) Check that there is no oil leak from the turbocharger.
Compressor wheel (4) Check to see if the wastegate valve remains open. If
any of these faulty symptoms is evident, disassemble
the turbocharger and replace the defective part.
NOTE
For the disassembly procedure, refer to ENGINE
WORKSHOP MANUAL.
2. EXHAUST MANIFOLD CHECK
(1) Check the exhaust manifold for damage and cracking
and replace it as necessary.
(2) Using a straightedge and feeler gauge, check the cylinder
head mounting surface for distortion and replace as
necessary.
Standard value: Within 0.15 mm
Limit: 0.2 mm

15-14 INTAKE AND EXHAUST – Exhaust Pipe and Muffler
EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

14
9 3 44 {4.5}
1 3
34 {3.5} 18 49 {5.0}
11
8
19 {1.9} 2
6
13
17
15
9
12
16 5 3
10
49 {5.0} 7
4
34 {3.5}
9 13 {1.3}
5 {0.5}
Hanger mounting bolt tightening

torque
3, 9, 18
13 {1.3}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Main muffler removal steps 11. High-temperature sensor

1. Bolt 12. Bolt
2. Main muffler 13. Catalytic converter
3. Hanger 14. Front floor heat protector panel
Center exhaust pipe removal steps Front exhaust pipe removal steps
1. Bolt 4. Spring
4. Spring 5. Heat protector
5. Heat protector 12. Bolt
6. Self-locking nut 15. Self-locking nut
7. Hanger bracket 16. Front exhaust pipe
8. Center exhaust pipe 17. Front exhaust pipe bracket
9. Hanger 18. Hanger
10. Protector

16-1
ENGINE
ELECTRICAL
CONTENTS
CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. Ignition Coil with Built-in Power Transistor
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2. Spark Plug Check, Cleaning, and
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND

CRANK ANGLE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

16-2 ENGINE ELECTRICAL – Charging System
CHARGING SYSTEM
ALTERNATOR
(1) Under Cover Removal (1) Strut Tower Bar Installation
(2) Engine Mount Removal (2) Engine Mount Installation
(3) Strut Tower Bar Removal (3) Under Cover Installation
(4) Drive Belt Tension Adjustment
(Refer to GROUP 11 – On-vehicle Service.)
3
10 – 13
12 – 15 {1.0 – 1.3}
{1.2 – 1.5}
6 4
7
12 {1.2}
9 {0.9}
22 {2.2}
24 {2.4} 5
44 {4.5}
1
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
AA" 1. Drive belt (Power steering, A/C) 4. Pressure hose connection
AB" 2. Delivery pipe, injector and pressure AC" 5. Alternator
regulator assembly 6. Water pump pulley
3. Oil level gauge guide 7. Alternator brace

ENGINE ELECTRICAL – Charging System 16-3
Auto tensioner AA" POWER STEERING, A/C COMPRESSOR, AND
ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELT REMOVAL
Hole in arm (2) Remove the drive belt.
Hole in bracket
Phillips
screwdriver
AB" DELIVERY PIPE, INJECTOR, AND PRESSURE

REGULATOR ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
After the mounting points have been loosened, slightly move
the corresponding part to allow for a space for removal of
the alternator.
AC" ALTERNATOR REMOVAL

Push the engine all the way up with a garage jack and remove
the alternator upward the engine compartment.

16-4 ENGINE ELECTRICAL – Ignition System
IGNITION SYSTEM
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
1. IGNITION COIL WITH BUILT-IN POWER TRANSISTOR CHECK
Secondary coil resistance measurement
Standard value: 15 – 21 kΩ
2. SPARK PLUG CHECK, CLEANING, AND REPLACEMENT

Check the plug gap and replace if the limit is exceeded.
Caution
(1) Do not attempt to adjust the gap of the platinum plug.
(2) Cleaning the platinum plug can damage platinum tips. If a cleaning is needed, use a plug
cleaner and finish cleaning within 20 seconds to protect the electrodes. Never use wire brushes.
Standard values and limits:
Manufacturer Model Standard value (mm) Limit (mm)
NGK PGR7A 0.7 – 0.8 0.95
DENSO P22PR8 0.7 – 0.8 0.95

ENGINE ELECTRICAL – Ignition System 16-5
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND CRANK ANGLE SENSOR
D Timing Belt Removal and Installation
2
3 {0.3}
9 {0.9}
39 {4.0}
1
5
3
9 {0.9}
4
9 {0.9}
49 {5.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Camshaft position sensor 4. Power steering oil pump bracket
2. Center cover 5. Crank angle sensor
AA" 3. Power steering oil pump

AA" POWER STEERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL
Remove the power steering oil pump with hose from the power
steering oil pump bracket.
NOTE
String up the oil pump which has been removed onto a location
that does not hamper removal and installation of the power
steering oil pump bracket.

17-1
ENGINE AND
EMISSION
CONTROL
CONTENTS
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . 2

SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
System Configuration Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Vacuum Hose Piping Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . 3
CANISTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
CATALYTIC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Engine Control System /
17-2 ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL – Emission Control System <MPI>
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Idle speed rpm 850 ± 50
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM <MPI>

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM
Canister
Check
valve Throttle body
Fuel pressure control

valve
Fuel pressure regulator
PCV valve
Injector
Air
High temperature sensor*
*: EVOLUTION-IV only

ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL – Emission Control System <MPI> 17-3
VACUUM HOSE PIPING CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Fuel pressure
control valve Blue White
Surge tank
Canister
Check
Secondary air valve
control solenoid Throttle body
Fuel valve
pressure Wastegate
regulator solenoid
valve
Secondary
air valve
Bypass
valve
Vacuum hose color

B: Black Front of vehicle
Wastegate
L: Blue actuator
R: Red
W: White
Y: Yellow
CANISTER
D Air Cleaner Removal and Installation
Removal steps
4 1. Vapor hose
2. Purge hose
3. Canister
4. Canister bracket

17-4 ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL – Emission Control System <MPI>
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
13 {1.3}
19 {1.9}
49 {5.0}
4
5
3
49 {5.0}
34 {3.5}
49 {5.0}
2
1
5 {0.5}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Spring 4. High temperature sensor
2. Heat protector <EVOLUTION-IV only>
3. Front exhaust pipe 5. Catalytic converter

21-1
CLUTCH
CONTENTS
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CLUTCH PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CLUTCH CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Clutch Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. Clutch Pedal Inspection and Adjustment . . 2
2. Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Service Specifications /
21-2 CLUTCH – Lubricants / On-vehicle Service
Clutch pedal height mm 162.5 – 165.5
Clutch pedal clevis pin play mm 1–3
Clutch pedal free play mm 6 – 13
Distance between the clutch pedal and the toeboard when the clutch is disengaged mm 70 or more
LUBRICANTS
Items Specified lubricants Quantity
Clutch fluid MITSUBISHI genuine brake fluid “DIA-QUEEN As required

BRAKE FLUID SUPER 4”
Push rod assembly Rubber grease
Boot
Release cylinder push rod MOLYKOT BR-2 PUS
Clutch pedal height ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

1. CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION AND
ADJUSTMENT
(1) Turn up the carpet, etc. under the clutch pedal.
(2) Measure the clutch pedal height.
A Standard value (A): 162.5 – 165.5 mm
Setting nut (3) If the height of the clutch pedal is outside the standard
Adjusting bolt
value, loosen the lock nut and adjust the pedal height
to the standard value using the adjusting bolt.
Locking
nut
13 {1.3}
6 {0.6}

CLUTCH – On-vehicle Service 21-3
Clutch pedal clevis pin play (4) Measure the clutch pedal play.
Standard value (B): 1 – 3 mm
(5) If the clutch pedal play is not within the standard value,
loosen the setting nut and move the push rod to adjust.
Caution
Do not push in the master cylinder push rod at this
B time.
Clutch pedal free Distance between the (6) After completing the adjustments, confirm that the clutch
play clutch pedal and the pedal free play (measured at the face of the pedal pad)
toeboard when the and the distance between the clutch pedal (the face of
clutch is disengaged
the pedal pad) and the toeboard when the clutch is
disengaged are within the standard value ranges.
Standard value (C): 6 – 13 mm
D Standard value (D): 70 mm or more
C (7) If the clutch pedal free play and the distance between
the clutch pedal and the toeboard when the clutch is
disengaged do not agree with the standard values, it
is probably the result of either air in the hydraulic system
or a faulty master cylinder or clutch. Bleed the air, or
disassemble and inspect the master cylinder, release
cylinder or clutch.
(8) Turn back the carpet, etc.
2. BLEEDING
Specified fluid:
MITSUBISHI genuine brake fluid “DIA-QUEEN BRAKE
FLUID SUPER 4”
Caution
Use the specified brake fluid. Avoid using a mixture of
the specified fluid and other fluid.

21-4 CLUTCH – Clutch Pedal
CLUTCH PEDAL
Post-installation Operation
D Clutch Pedal Adjustment (Refer to P.21-2.)
4
13 {1.3}
13
1
12 {1.2}
2
11
12
24 {2.4}
5 13 {1.3}
7
6
(Spring installation position)

6
13
3
5
10
8 9
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Clutch master cylinder installation 7. Pipe
nut 8. Clutch pedal
2. Master cylinder member bracket 9. Pedal pad
installation bolt 10. Stopper
3. Clevis pin 11. Adjusting bolt
4. Bolt 12. Locking nut
5. Return spring 13. Pedal and master cylinder support
6. Bushing member

CLUTCH – Clutch Control 21-5
CLUTCH CONTROL
D Clutch Fluid Draining (1) Clutch Fluid Supplying
(2) Clutch Line Bleeding (Refer to P.21-3.)
(3) Clutch Pedal Adjustment (Refer to P.21-2.)
Release Release
cylinder fork
push rod 13 {1.3} 1
2
6
Specified grease:
MOLYKOT BR-2 PLUS
19 {1.9} 7
15 {1.5} 6
5 {0.5}
6
8
5 4
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Clutch master cylinder removal Clutch line removal steps

steps 6. Clutch pipe
1. Clevis pin 7. Hose clip
2. Clutch pipe connection 8. Clutch hose
3. Clutch master cylinder
Clutch release cylinder removal
steps
4. Clutch pipe connection
5. Clutch release cylinder

21-6 CLUTCH – Clutch Control
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER

DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
7
13 {1.3}
4
1
6
8 Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
2
4 2
1
2
3
Clutch fluid: DIA-QUEEN BRAKE
Piston repair kit FLUID SUPER 4 Grease: Rubber grease
Disassembly steps
1. Piston stopper ring
2. Piston assembly
3. Push rod assembly
4. Boot
5. Reservoir cap
6. Spring pin Caution
7. Reservoir tank Do not disassemble piston assembly.
8. Clutch master cylinder body

22-1
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
CONTENTS
MANUAL TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22A
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22B

22A-1
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
CONTENTS
LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 TRANSMISSION CONTROL* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Shift Lever Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. Transmission Oil Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 TRANSFER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2. Transmission Oil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. Transfer Oil Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4. Transfer Oil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
WARNING REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES

(1) Thoroughly review this manual, especially GROUP 52B – Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before beginning any
service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component.
(2) When removing or installing the components indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*), use special care not
to apply shocks to SRS-related components.

22A-2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION – Lubricant / Special Tools
LUBRICANT
Item Specified lubricant Quantity dm3 (ȏ)
Transmission oil MITSUBISHI genuine “Dia-Queen” multi gear oil <75W/85W> 2.8 (2.8)
Transfer oil MITSUBISHI genuine “Dia-Queen Super” hypoid gear oil (GL-5) 0.62 (0.62)
SPECIAL TOOLS
MB990635 or Steering linkage Tie rod end and lower arm disconnection
MB991113 puller
Recommended Engine lifter Supporting the engine assembly during

tool MZ203826 removal and installation of the transmission
by Anzen
Jidosha or
MZ203827 by
Banzai
MB991453 Engine hanger
MB991612 Adapter Removing output shaft
MB990211 Slide hammer
MB991193 Plug Preventing oil flowing out from and foreign

matter entry into transfer.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION – On-vehicle Service 22A-3
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Transmission oil Filler plug hole
1. TRANSMISSION OIL CHECK
(1) Remove the oil filler plug.
(2) Oil level should be at the lower portion of the filler plug
hole.
(3) Check that the transmission oil is not noticeably dirty,
and that it has a suitable viscosity.
(4) Tighten the filler plug to the specified torque.
2. TRANSMISSION OIL REPLACEMENT

(1) Remove the drain plug to drain oil.
Filler plug (2) Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque.
(3) Remove the filler plug and fill with specified oil till the
level comes to the lower portion of filler plug hole.
Drain plug
Transmission oil
Specified oil:
MITSUBISHI genuine “Dia-Queen” multi gear oil
<75W/85W>
Quantity: 2.8 dm3 (2.8 ȏ)
3. TRANSFER OIL CHECK

(1) Remove the oil filler plug.
(2) Oil level should be at the lower portion of the filler plug
hole.
(3) Check that the transmission oil is not noticeably dirty,
Filler plug
and that it has a suitable viscosity.
4. TRANSFER OIL REPLACEMENT

Drain plug
(1) Remove the drain plug to drain oil.
(2) Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque.
(3) Remove the filler plug and fill with specified oil till the
level comes to the lower portion of filler plug hole.
Transfer oil Transfer oil
Specified oil:
MITSUBISHI genuine “Dia-Queen Super” hypoid
gear oil (GL-5)
Quantity: 0.62 dm3 (0.62 ȏ)

22A-4 MANUAL TRANSMISSION – Transmission Control
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Caution: SRS
D Air Cleaner Assembly Removal and Installation Be careful not to subject the SRS-ECU to any shocks
during removal and installation of the shift cable
and select cable assembly.
8
12 {1.2}
9 1
6
10
8 5
2
11 3
12 {1.2}
4
7
12
14
13
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Shift cable and select cable Shift lever assembly removal steps
assembly removal steps "BA 1. Shift knob
"BA 1. Shift knob "BA 2. Spring washer
"BA 2. Spring washer "BA 3. Nut
"BA 3. Nut D Front floor console
D Front floor console (Refer to GROUP 52.)
(Refer to GROUP 52.) 4. Snap pin
4. Snap pin 5. Select cable connection
5. Select cable connection (Shift lever side)
(Shift lever side) 6. Clip
6. Clip 7. Shift cable connection
7. Shift cable connection (Shift lever side)
(Shift lever side) 12. Shift lever assembly
8. Snap pin 13. Distance piece
"AA 9. Select cable connection 14. Bushing
(Transmission side)
"AA 10. Shift cable connection
(Transmission side)
"AA 11. Shift cable and select cable as-
sembly

MANUAL TRANSMISSION – Transmission Control 22A-5
"AA SHIFT CABLE AND SELECT CABLE ASSEMBLY
Shift lever / SHIFT CABLE CONNECTION / SELECT CABLE
CONNECTION
(1) Set the transmission side shift lever and the passenger
compartment side shift lever to the neutral position.
Neutral position
(2) For the transmission side, the white and yellow paint
marks on the shift and select cable ends should face
the snap pins.
(3) Move the shift lever to all positions and check that the
operation is smooth.
"BA NUT / SPRING WASHER / SHIFT KNOB

INSTALLATION
(1) Screw in the nut all the way by hand, turn back half
a turn, and then insert the spring washer.
(2) Screw in the shift knob until it touches the spring washer,
and make one more turn. Then turn more to adjust the
shift pattern on the shift knob.
(3) If the above steps are impossible, you can turn back
the shift knob by one turn at most after screwing in all
the way to adjust the shift pattern.

22A-6 MANUAL TRANSMISSION – Transmission Control
SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY

9 14 {1.4}
3
3
6
1
10
4 5 10 {1.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Disassembly steps
1. Bolt 6. Bolt
2. Select lever 7. Cap
3. Bushing 8. Shift lever
4. Return spring 9. Shift lever bushing
5. Collar 10. Base block

MANUAL TRANSMISSION – Transmission Assembly 22A-7
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
(1) Transmission Oil Draining (Refer to P.22A-3.) (1) Air Cleaner Assembly Installation
(2) Transfer Oil Draining (Refer to P.22A-3.) (2) Battery and Battery Tray Installation
(3) Under Cover Removal (3) Front Exhaust Pipe Installation
(4) Front Exhaust Pipe Removal (Refer to GROUP 15.) (Refer to GROUP 15.)
(5) Battery and Battery Tray Removal (4) Under Cover Installation
(6) Air Cleaner Assembly Removal (5) Transfer Oil Supplying (Refer to P.22A-3.)
(6) Transmission Oil Supplying (Refer to P.22A-3.)
(7) Shift Lever Operation Check
(8) Speedometer Operation Check
1
19 {1.9}
98 {10.0}* 5
19 {1.9}
88 {9.0}
2 48 {4.9}
6
8
4
3
7
49 {5.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Shift cable and select cable con- 7. Transmission mount bracket
nection 8. Transmission mount stopper
2. Backup lamp switch connector D Engine assembly supporting
3. Vehicle speed sensor connector
AA" 4. Starter motor Caution
5. Clutch release cylinder connection Mounting locations marked by * should be
6. Transmission assembly upper part provisionally tightened, and then fully tightened
coupling bolts when the body is supporting the full weight of the
engine.

22A-8 MANUAL TRANSMISSION – Transmission Assembly
48 {4.9}
18
26 – 33
{2.7 – 3.4} 19
16
59 – 71
{6.0 – 7.2}
17
39 {4.0}
10
52 {5.3}*
12 15
14
52 {5.3}*
12
15 – 33
{1.5 – 3.4}
69 {7.0}
13 69 {7.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Lifting up of the vehicle

9. Stabilizer bar connection AC" 17. Output shaft
10. Wheel speed sensor cable connec- D Air hose A
tion <Vehicles with ABS> (Refer to GROUP 15 – Intercooler.)
11. Brake hose clamp 18. Transmission assembly lower part
12. Tie rod end connection coupling bolts
13. Lower arm ball joint connection 19. Transmission assembly
AA" D Clutch release bearing connection
14. Centermember assembly Caution
AB" 15. Drive shaft <LH> connection Mounting locations marked by * should be
AB" 16. Drive shaft <RH> connection provisionally tightened, and then fully tightened
D Strut assembly <LH> when the body is supporting the full weight of the
(Refer to GROUP 33A.) engine.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION – Transmission Assembly 22A-9
AA" CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING SEPARATION
(1) Remove the cover from the service hole in the clutch
Release fork housing.
(2) While pushing the release fork by hand in the direction
A, insert a flap-tip screwdriver between the release bearing
and the wedge collar.
Service hole
Caution
Be sure to push the release fork in the direction A
before inserting a screwdriver.
(3) Separate the release bearing from the wedge collar by
prying with the screwdriver (turning the screwdriver grip
Wedge collar 90_).
NOTE
The release fork is forced to move fully in the direction
B by the return spring as soon as it is separated from
the wedge collar.
Caution
Release bearing If it is hard to turn the screwdriver (to pry off the
release bearing), remove the screwdriver once and
repeat the above procedure after pushing the release
fork fully in the direction A two to three times. Forcibly
prying can cause the release bearing to be damaged.
Trans-
mission AB" DRIVE SHAFT <LH> / DRIVE SHAFT <RH>
side
DISCONNECTION
(1) To disconnect the left-hand drive shaft, insert a lever
as shown and pry out the shaft from the transmission.
Lever To disconnect the right-hand drive shaft, apply a lever
and a hammer as shown and lever out the shaft from
the transfer assembly using the hammer as a fulcrum.
NOTE
Remove the drive shafts with the hub and knuckle
attached.
Projection
Caution
Do not attempt to pull out the drive shaft from the
BJ in this stage since it can cause the TJ to be
damaged. Be sure to remove the drive shaft first from
the transmission side using a lever.
(2) Suspend the removed drive shaft with a wire so that
there are no sharp bends in any of the joints.
Lever Hammer
AC" OUTPUT SHAFT REMOVAL

MB990211 (1) Use the special tools (MB991612, MB990211) to remove
MB991612
the output shaft.
(2) Use a shop towel to cover the transmission case not
to let foreign material get into it.
Output shaft
Transmission case

22A-10 MANUAL TRANSMISSION – Transfer Assembly
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
D Transmission Oil Draining and Supplying D Front Exhaust Pipe Removal and Installation
(Refer to P.22A-3.) (Refer to GROUP 15.)
D Transfer Oil Draining and Supplying
(Refer to P.22A-3.)
69 {7.0}
Gear oil:
MITSUBISHI genuine “Dia-Queen
Super” hypoid gear oil (GL-5)
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
D Drive shaft (Refer to P.22A-9.)
D Output shaft (Refer to P.22A-9.)
1. Front propeller shaft
(Refer to GROUP 25)
AA" 2. Transfer assembly
Oil seal lip MB991193 REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

AA" TRANSFER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
Caution
(1) Use care not to damage the lip of the oil seal in the
transfer case.
(2) Use the special tool to cover the opening in the transfer
case to prevent oil from flowing out or foreign materi-
als from entering the case.

22B-1
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
OVERHAUL
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 OUTPUT SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 REVERSE IDLER GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SPEEDOMETER GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SEALANTS AND ADHESIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SELECT LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 CONTROL HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
SNAP RINGS, SPACERS AND THRUST CLUTCH HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

PLATES FOR ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
TRANSMISSION CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CENTER DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
INPUT SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

22B-2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – General Information
GENERAL INFORMATION
SECTIONAL VIEW – Without Front Limited Slip Differential (Front LSD)

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – General Information 22B-3
SECTIONAL VIEW – With Front Limited Slip Differential (Front LSD)

Specifications /
22B-4 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Service Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
TRANSMISSION MODEL TABLE
Transmission model Gear ratio Speedometer gear ratio Final gear ratio Front LSD
W5M51-1-X6A A 29/36 4.529 Not available
W5M51-1-X6A1 A 29/36 4.529 Available
W5M51-1-X7A A 30/36 4.529 Not available
W5M51-1-X7A1 A 30/36 4.529 Available
W5M51-1-Z6A B 29/36 4.875 Not available
W5M51-1-Z6A1 B 29/36 4.875 Available
W5M51-1-Z7A B 30/36 4.875 Not available
W5M51-1-Z7A1 B 30/36 4.875 Available
GEAR RATIO TABLE

A B
1st 2.785 ←
2nd 1.950 ←
3rd 1.407 1.444
4th 1.031 1.096
5th 0.761 0.825
Reverse 3.416 ←
Transfer gear ratio 0.3018 ←
Items Allowable range Limit
Input shaft end play mm 0.05 – 0.17 –
Input shaft front bearing clearance mm 0 – 0.12 –
Input shaft rear bearing clearance mm 0 – 0.12 –
Input shaft 5th speed gear clearance mm 0 – 0.09 –
Output shaft preload mm 0.13 – 0.18 –
Output shaft bearing clearance mm 0 – 0.09 –
Output shaft 3rd speed gear clearance mm 0 – 0.09 –
Center differential case preload mm 0.05 – 0.11 –
Center differential case pinion backlash mm 0.025 – 0.150 –
Synchronizer ring back surface to gear clearance mm – 0.5

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Sealants and Adhesives 22B-5
SEALANTS AND ADHESIVES
TRANSMISSION
Items Specified sealants and adhesives
Clutch housing-transmission case mating surface THREEBOND 1216
Control housing-transmission case mating surface
Under cover-transmission case mating surface
Air breather THREEBOND 1501
Center differential drive gear bolt THREEBOND 1303 or LOKTITE 648
TRANSFER
Items Specified sealants and adhesives
Air breather THREEBOND 1501
FORM-IN-PLACE GASKET
The transmission has several areas where the form-in-place gasket (FIPG) is in use. To ensure that
the gasket fully serves its purpose, it is necessary to observe some precautions when applying the gasket.
Bead size, continuity and location are of paramount importance. Too thin a bead could cause leaks.
Too thick a bead, on the other hand, could be squeezed out of location, causing blocking or narrowing
of the fluid feed line. To eliminate the possibility of leaks from a joint, therefore, it is absolutely necessary
to apply the gasket evenly without a break, while observing the correct bead size.
DISASSEMBLY
The parts assembled with the FIPG can be easily disassembled without use of a special method. In
some cases, however, the sealant between the joined surfaces may have to be broken by lightly striking
with a mallet or similar tool. A flat and thin gasket scraper may be lightly hammered in between the
joined surfaces. In this case, however, care must be taken to prevent damage to the joined surfaces.
SURFACE PREPARATION
Thoroughly remove all substances deposited on the gasket application surfaces, using a gasket scraper
or wire brush. Check to ensure that the surfaces to which the FIPG is to be applied is flat. Make sure
that there are no oils, greases and foreign substances deposited on the application surfaces. Do not
forget to remove the old sealant remaining in the bolt holes.
FORM-IN-PLACE GASKET APPLICATION
Applied FIPG bead should be of the specified size and without breaks. Also be sure to encircle the
bolt hole circumference with a completely continuous bead. The FIPG can be wiped away unless it is
hardened. While the FIPG is still moist (in less than 10 minutes), mount the parts in position. When
the parts are mounted, make sure that the gasket is applied to the required area only. In addition, do
not apply any oil or water to the sealing locations or start the engine until a sufficient amount of time
(about one hour) has passed after installation is completed.
The FIPG application procedure may vary on different areas. Observe the procedure described in the
text when applying the FIPG.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION Lubricants / Snap Rings, Spacers
22B-6 OVERHAUL – and Thrust Plates for Adjustment
LUBRICANTS
TRANSMISSION
Items Specified lubricants
Drive shaft oil seal lip area DIA QUEEN MULTI-GEAR OIL 75W/85W
(Transmission oil)
Input shaft oil seal lip area
Control shaft oil seal lip area
Select lever shoe MOLYWHITE TA No.1 or No.2
TRANSFER
Items Specified lubricants
Drive shaft oil seal lip area DIA QUEEN MULTI-GEAR OIL 75W/85W
(Transmission oil)
Front differential oil seal lip area
O-rings
SNAP RINGS, SPACERS AND THRUST PLATES FOR

ADJUSTMENT
Part name Thickness mm Identification symbol Part No.
Spacer 1.34 34 MD723600

(For adj
adjustment
stment of inp
inputt shaft end pla
play))
1.43 43 MD723603
1.52 52 MD723606
1.61 61 MD723609
1.70 70 MD756760
1.79 79 MD756763
Snap ring 1.43 Green (2) MD746708

(For adjustment
adj stment of input
inp t shaft front bearing
clearance) 1.51 White (2) MD746709
1.59 Yellow (2) MD746710
Snap ring 1.44 None MD746602

(For adj
adjustment
stment of inp
inputt shaft rear bearing
clearance) 1.51 Blue MD746603
1.58 Brown MD746604

MANUAL TRANSMISSION Snap Rings, Spacers and Thrust Plates
OVERHAUL – for Adjustment 22B-7
Thrust plate 3.82 0 MD748465

adj stment of input
(For adjustment inp t shaft 5th speed gear
clearance) 3.86 2 MD748466
3.90 3 MD748467
3.94 5 MD748468
3.98 6 MD748469
4.02 7 MD748470
4.06 8 MD748471
4.10 9 MD748472
Spacer 0.86 86 MD720938

(For adjustment
adj stment of output
o tp t shaft preload)
0.89 89 MD720939
0.92 92 MD720940
0.95 95 MD720941
0.98 98 MD720942
1.01 01 MD720943
1.04 04 MD720944
1.07 07 MD720945
1.10 J MD710454
1.13 D MD700270
1.16 K MD710455
1.19 L MD710456
1.22 G MD700271
1.25 M MD710457
1.28 N MD710458
1.31 E MD706574
1.34 O MD710459
1.37 P MD710460
1.40 None MD706573
1.43 Q MD710461
1.46 R MD710462

22B-8 OVERHAUL – for Adjustment
Snap ring 1.36 Yellow MD748449

adj stment of output
(For adjustment o tp t shaft bearing clear
clear-
ance) 1.40 Green MD748450
1.44 None MD746602
1.48 Black MD748451
1.51 Blue MD746603
1.55 White MD748452
1.58 Brown MD746604
1.63 Orange MD748453
1.68 Blue MD748454
Snap ring 2.81 None MD746594

(For adjustment
adj stment of o
output
tp t shaft 3rd speed gear
clearance) 2.85 Blue MD746595
2.89 Brown MD746596
2.93 Yellow MD746597
2.97 Green MD746598
3.01 Black MD746599
3.05 White MD746600
3.09 Orange MD746601
Spacer 0.74 74 MD727660

adj stment of center differential case
(For adjustment
p
preload) 0.77 77 MD754476
0.80 80 MD727661
0.83 83 MD720937
0.86 86 MD720938
0.89 89 MD720939
0.92 92 MD720940
0.95 95 MD720941
0.98 98 MD720942
1.01 01 MD720943
1.04 04 MD720944
1.07 07 MD720945
1.10 J MD710454
1.13 D MD700270
1.16 K MD710455

OVERHAUL – for Adjustment / Torque Specifications 22B-9
Spacer 1.19 L MD710456

adj stment of center differential case
(For adjustment
p
preload) 1.22 G MD700271
1.25 M MD710457
1.28 N MD710458
1.31 E MD706574
Spacer 0.6 – MD748362

adj stment of center differential case pinion
(For adjustment
backlash) 0.7 – MD748363
0.8 – MD748364
0.9 – MD748365
1.0 – MD748366
1.1 – MD748367
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
TRANSMISSION
Items Nm {kgf@m}
Under cover mounting bolt 6.9 {0.7}
Interlock plate bolt 30 {3.1}
Clutch housing-transmission case mounting bolt 44 {4.5}
Clutch release bearing retainer mounting bolt 9.8 {1.0}
Control housing mounting bolt 18 {1.9}
Shift cable bracket mounting bolt 18 {1.9}
Speedometer gear mounting bolt 3.9 {0.4}
Stopper bracket mounting bolt 18 {1.9}
Select lever mounting bolt 18 {1.9}
Select lever mounting nut 11 {1.2}
Center differential drive gear mounting bolt 132 {13.5}
Back-up lamp switch 32 {3.3}
Poppet spring plug 32 {3.3}
Reverse idler gear shaft mounting bolt 48 {4.9}
Roll stopper bracket mounting bolt 69 {7.0}

Torque Specifications /
22B-10 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Special tools
TRANSFER
Items Nm {kgf@m}
Transfer cover mounting bolt 23 {2.4}
Transmission-transfer mounting bolt 69 {7.0}
SPECIAL TOOLS
MB990887 Arm bushing Installation of transfer oil seal
remover & installer
ring
MB990891 Bushing remover & Installation of transfer oil seal

installer base
MB990928 Installer adapter Installation of input shaft oil seal
MB990932 Installer adapter Removal of differential case taper roller bearing
MB990933 Installer adapter Installation of transfer oil seal
MB990935 Installer adapter Installation of output shaft front taper roller

bearing outer race
MB990937 Installer adapter Installation of differential case taper roller

bearing

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Special Tools 22B-11

MB990938 Handle Use with Installer adapter
MB991445 Bushing remover Installation of differential case taper roller

and installer base bearing outer race
MD998304 Oil seal installer Installation of transfer extension housing oil

seal
MD998364 Camshaft oil seal Installation of gear, bearing and sleeve

installer
MD998800 Oil seal installer Installation of differential oil seal and transfer
cover oil seal
MD998801 Bearing remover Installation and removal of gear, bearing and

sleeve
MD998812 Installer cap Use with Installer and installer adapter
MD998813 Installer-100 Use with Installer cap and installer adapter
MD998814 Installer-200 Use with Installer cap and installer adapter

22B-12 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Special Tools

MD998818 Installer adapter Installation of input shaft front bearing
(38)
MD998819 Installer adapter Installation of input shaft rear bearing and

(40) output shaft taper roller bearing
MD998820 Installer adapter Installation of reverse gear bearing sleeve

(42)
MD998821 Installer adapter Installation of 4th speed gear, 5th speed gear
(44) sleeve and 5th-reverse speed synchronizer
hub
MD998824 Installer adapter Installation of 1st-2nd speed synchronizer hub,

(50) 2nd speed gear sleeve and 3rd speed gear
MD998825 Installer adapter Installation of 1st speed gear sleeve, 3rd-4th

(52) speed synchronizer hub, 4th speed gear
sleeve, 5th speed gear and thrust plate stopper
MD998917 Bearing remover Removal and installation of gear, bearing and

sleeve
MD999566 Claw Removal of taper roller bearing outer race

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Transmission 22B-13
TRANSMISSION
18 {1.9}
18 {1.9}
32 {3.3}
5
6 32 {3.3} 10
4 11
69 {7.0} 8
3.9 {0.4}
9
7
3
3
1
69 {7.0}
69 {7.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Disassembly steps
1. Transfer "HA 7. Speedometer gear
"JA 2. O-ring 8. Back-up lamp switch
3. Roll stopper bracket 9. Gasket
4. Insulator washer 10. Plug
5. Shift cable bracket 11. Gasket
"IA 6. Select lever

22B-14 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Transmission
Apply gear oil to all

moving parts before
installation.
14
18 {1.9}
30 {3.1}
15 12
13
44 {4.5}
20
23
21
18 17
48 {4.9}
26 19
24
16
3.9 {0.7}
27
22
25
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Disassembly steps
12. Interlock plate bolt "EA 20. Transmission case
13. Gasket 21. Outer race
"GA 14. Control housing 22. Outer race
15. Neutral return spring "DA 23. Spacer
"FA 16. Under cover "DA 24. Spacer
17. Reverse idler gear shaft bolt "DA 25. Spacer
18. Gasket 26. Oil guide
19. Reverse idler gear 27. Oil guide


moving parts before 29 31
installation.
32
28
30
37 34
36
35
33
40
38
39
Disassembly steps
"CA 28. Spring pin AB" "BA 35. 5th-reverse speed shift rail
29. 1st-2nd speed shift rail AB" "BA 36. 5th-reverse speed shift fork
30. 1st-2nd speed shift fork AC" "AA 37. Center differential
"CA 31. Spring pin AC" "AA 38. Output shaft
AA" "CA 32. Spring pin AC" "AA 39. Input shaft
AB" "BA 33. 3rd-4th speed shift rail 40. Clutch housing
AB" "BA 34. 3rd-4th speed shift fork

5th-reverse DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

shift fork
AA" SPRING PIN REMOVAL
Shift the 5th-reverse shift fork in the direction shown in the
illustration.
AB" 3RD-4TH SPEED SHIFT RAIL / 3RD-4TH SPEED

3rd-4th SHIFT FORK / 5TH-REVERSE SPEED SHIFT
speed
shift rail RAIL / 5TH-REVERSE SPEED SHIFT FORK
REMOVAL
5th-reverse
shift rail Pull out the shift rails from the shift rail holes in the clutch
housing.
AC" CENTER DIFFERENTIAL / OUTPUT SHAFT /

Output shaft Input
INPUT SHAFT REMOVAL
shaft Remove the input shaft, output shaft and center differential
Center together.
differential
ADJUSTMENT BEFORE REASSEMBLY

Output shaft Input SPACER SELECTION FOR ADJUSTING INPUT SHAFT
shaft END PLAY / OUTPUT SHAFT PRELOAD /
Center DIFFERENTIAL PRELOAD
differential
(1) Install the input shaft, output shaft and center differential
as a set to the clutch housing.
Solders (2) Place two pieces of solder (1.6 mm in diameter and approx.
10 mm in length) on the input shaft rear bearing at the
positions shown in the illustration.

(3) Place two pieces of solder (1.6 mm in diameter and approx.
Solders 10 mm in length) on the transmission case at the positions
shown in the illustration.
(4) Install the bearing outer race.
(5) Install the transmission case and tighten the bolts to the
specified torque.
(6) Remove the transmission case. If the solder is not crushed,

repeat the steps (2) through (5) using the solder with
Solders
larger diameter.
(7) Measure the thickness of the crushed solder with a

micrometer and select spacers that will provide the
standard end play/preload value.
Standard value:
Input shaft end play . . . . . . . . . . 0 – 0.17 mm
Output shaft end play . . . . . . . . 0.13 – 0.18 mm
Center differential preload . . . . 0.05 – 0.11 mm
REASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

Output shaft Input "AA INPUT SHAFT / OUTPUT SHAFT / CENTER
shaft DIFFERENTIAL INSTALLATION
Center Install the input shaft, output shaft and differential as a unit.
differential
3rd-4th speed "BA 5TH-REVERSE SPEED SHIFT FORK /

shift fork 5TH-REVERSE SPEED SHIFT RAIL / 3RD-4TH
5th-reverse SPEED SHIFT FORK / 3RD-4TH SPEED SHIFT
5th-reverse speed shift rail RAIL INSTALLATION
speed shift fork
(1) Install the 3rd-4th speed shift rails and fork, and
5th-reverse speed shift rail and fork.
3rd-4th speed
shift rail

(2) Slide the shift rails into the shift rail holes in the clutch
3rd-4th speed
housing.
shift rail
5th-reverse
speed shift
rail
Shift rail "CA SPRING PIN INSTALLATION

Install the spring pin with its slit directed as shown in the
illustration.
Spring pin
"DA SPACER INSTALLATION

Install the spacer selected in the section “ADJUSTMENT
BEFORE REASSEMBLY”.
f 2 mm "EA TRANSMISSION CASE INSTALLATION

Apply sealant to the illustrated position of the transmission
case.
Specified sealant: THREEBOND 1216
Caution
Squeeze out the sealant uniformly, while making sure
that it is not broken or excessively applied.
"FA UNDER COVER INSTALLATION

f 2 mm
case.
Caution

"GA CONTROL HOUSING INSTALLATION
case.
f 2 mm Caution
"HA SPEEDOMETER GEAR INSTALLATION

Apply transmission oil to the O-ring of the speedometer gear.
Transmission oil: DIA QUEEN MULTI-GEAR OIL 75W/85W
Control shaft "IA SELECT LEVER INSTALLATION

Apply grease to the control shaft sliding portion of the select
lever shoe.
Select Specified grease: MOLYWHITE TA No.1 or No.2
lever
shoe
"JA O-RING INSTALLATION

Lubricate O-ring with transmission oil.
INSPECTION
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
Check for continuity between terminals.
Switch condition Continuity
Pressed Not exist
Released Exists

22B-20 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Input Shaft
INPUT SHAFT
Apply gear oil to all 12

moving parts before 14
installation. 13
15
16
17
9
18 10
11
2
20 4
21
22 6
7 1
8
3
18
5
19
Disassembly steps
"MA 1. Snap ring "EA 12. 3rd-4th speed synchronizer hub
AA" "LA 2. Ball bearing 13. Outer synchronizer ring
AB" "KA 3. Thrust plate stopper "DA 14. Synchronizer spring
"JA 4. Thust plate 15. Synchronizer cone
AC" "IA 5. 5th speed gear 16. Inner synchronizer ring
6. 4th speed gear 17. 3rd speed gear
7. Needle roller bearing 18. Needle roller bearing
AD" "HA 8. 4th speed gear sleeve "CA 19. Snap ring
9. Synchronizer ring AE" "BA 20. Ball bearing
"GA 10. Synchronizer spring "AA 21. Oil seal
"FA 11. Synchronizer sleeve 22. Input shaft

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Input Shaft 22B-21
MD998801 DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS
AA" BALL BEARING REMOVAL
AB" THRUST PLATE STOPPER REMOVAL

Using a screwdriver, pry up the position shown in the illustration
and remove the thrust plate stopper.
MD998801 AC" 5TH SPEED GEAR REMOVAL
AD" 4TH SPEED GEAR SLEEVE REMOVAL

MD998801 Install the special tool to the 3rd speed gear and remove
the 4th speed gear sleeve.
AE" BALL BEARING REMOVAL

MD998801


Oil seal 3.5 mm
"AA OIL SEAL INSTALLATION
Make sure that the oil seal is pressed into the position shown
in the illustration.
"BA BALL BEARING INSTALLATION

MD998812
MD998813
MD998801
MD998818
"CA SNAP RING INSTALLATION

Select and install a snap ring so that the input shaft front
bearing end play will have the standard value.
Standard value: 0 – 0.12 mm
Snap ring
"DA SYNCHRONIZER SPRING INSTALLATION

Install the synchronizer spring securely to the illustrated
position of the outer synchronizer ring.
Synchronizer spring
Installation "EA 3RD-4TH SPEED SYNCHRONIZER HUB

direction INSTALLATION
Install the synchronizer hub in such a way that it will be oriented
in the direction shown.
Identification mark

MD998812
Caution
When the hub is installed, make sure that the synchronizer
ring is not caught.
MD998813
MD998801
MD998825
"FA SYNCHRONIZER SLEEVE INSTALLATION

Identification groove
(1) Install the synchronizer sleeve in such a way that it will
be oriented in the direction shown.
Installation
direction
Synchronizer sleeve projections (2) When the synchronizer sleeve is installed, make sure
that the deep groove portion of the synchronizer hub
is aligned with the projecting portion of the sleeve.
Synchronizer hub
deep grooves
"GA SYNCHRONIZER SPRING INSTALLATION
Synchronizer spring
"HA 4TH SPEED GEAR SLEEVE INSTALLATION

MD998812
MD998813
MD998801
MD998825

"IA 5TH SPEED GEAR INSTALLATION

MD998812
MD998813
MD998801 MD998825
"JA THRUST PLATE INSTALLATION

Select and install a thrust plate so that the input shaft 5th
Stamped
surface
speed gear clearance will have the standard value.
Caution
Install the plate with its identification stamped surface
faced against the thrust plate stopper.
Thrust plate
"KA THRUST PLATE STOPPER INSTALLATION

MD998812 Install the thrust plate stopper by pressing the special tools
with hand. Make sure that the stopper is not installed aslant.
MD998813
MD998825
"LA BALL BEARING INSTALLATION

MD998812
MD998819
MD998801
"MASNAP RING INSTALLATION

Select and install a snap ring so that the input shaft rear
bearing clearance will have the standard value.
Snap ring

INSPECTION
INPUT SHAFT
(1) Check the outside diameter of the needle bearing
mounting portion for damage, abnormal wear and seizure.
(2) Check the splines for damage and wear.
NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING

(1) Check to ensure that when the input shaft and gear are
combined and made to rotate, they rotate smoothly without
looseness and noise.
(2) Check to ensure that the cage is not deformed.
SYNCHRONIZER RING
(1) Check to ensure that the clutch gear tooth surfaces are
not damaged and broken.
(2) Check to ensure that the cone inside surface is not
damaged or worn and that the threads are not crushed.
(3) Press the synchronizer ring against the gear and check
clearance “A”. If “A” is less than the limit, replace.
Gear
Synchronizer Limit: 0.5 mm
ring
OUTER SYNCHRONIZER RING / INNER

Damage, Break SYNCHRONIZER RING / SYNCHRONIZER CONE
Damage, Break (1) Check to ensure that the clutch gear tooth surface and
cone surface are not damaged and broken.
Damage,
Break

(2) Install the outer ring, inner ring and cone, press them
against the gear, and check clearance “A”. If “A” is less
Outer ring
Cone than the limit, replace.
Limit: 0.5 mm
Caution
When any of the outer ring, inner ring or cone has
to be replaced, replace them as a set.
Inner ring
SYNCHRONIZER SLEEVE AND HUB

Sleeve
(1) Check to ensure that when the synchronizer sleeve and
hub are combined and made to slide, they slide smoothly
without binding.
(2) Check to ensure that the front and rear ends of the sleeve
inside surface are not damaged.
Caution
Hub When replacement of either the synchronizer sleeve
or hub is necessary, make sure that the synchronizer
sleeve and hub are replaced as a set.
SYNCHRONIZER SPRING
Check to ensure that the spring is not sagging, deformed
or broken.
SPEED GEARS
(1) Check to ensure that the helical and clutch gear tooth
surfaces are not damaged or worn.
(2) Check to ensure that the synchronizer cone surfaces
are not roughened, damaged or worn.
(3) Check to ensure that the gear inside diameter and front
and rear surfaces are not damaged and worn.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Output Shaft 22B-27
OUTPUT SHAFT
moving parts before 21
installation. 22
23
24
26 25
28
27
30
29 19 18
20
33
4 1
5
3
32 31
35
13 2
36 12 4
15 14
17 7 6
34 8
9
11
10
13
16
Disassembly steps
"PA 1. Snap ring 19. Needle roller bearing
AA" "OA 2. Taper roller bearing AE" "GA 20. 2nd speed gear sleeve
AB" "NA 3. Reverse gear bearing sleeve 21. Inner synchronizer ring
"NA 4. Needle roller bearing 22. Synchronizer cone
"NA 5. Reverse gear 23. Outer synchronizer ring
6. Synchronizer ring "DA 24. Synchronizer spring
"LA 7. Synchronizer spring "FA 25. Synchronizer sleeve
"FA 8. Synchronizer sleeve "EA 26. 1st-2nd speed synchronizer hub
AC" "MA 9. 5th-reverse speed synchronizer hub 27. Outer synchronizer ring
10. Synchronizer ring "DA 28. Synchronizer spring
"LA 11. Synchronizer spring 29. Inner synchronizer ring
12. 5th speed gear 30. Synchronizer cone
13. Needle roller bearing 31. 1st speed gear
"KA 14. 5th speed gear sleeve 32. Needle roller bearing
"JA 15. 4th speed gear AF" "CA 33. 1st speed gear sleeve
"IA 16. Snap ring AG" "BA 34. Taper roller bearing
AD" "HA 17. 3rd speed gear "AA 35. Oil seal
18. 2nd speed gear 36. Output shaft

22B-28 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Output Shaft
MD998801
DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS
Taper roller bearing
AA" TAPER ROLLER BEARING REMOVAL
Reverse gear AB" REVERSE GEAR BEARING SLEEVE REMOVAL

MD998801 bearing sleeve Mount a special tool on the reverse gear and remove the
reverse gear bearing sleeve.
5th-reverse AC" 5TH-REVERSE SPEED SYNCHRONIZER HUB

speed REMOVAL
MD998801 synchronizer
hub Mount a special tool on the 4th speed gear and remove
the 5th-reverse speed synchronizer hub.
AD" 3RD SPEED GEAR REMOVAL

Mount a special tool on the 2nd speed gear and remove
3rd speed gear the 3rd speed gear.
MD998917
AE" 2ND SPEED GEAR SLEEVE REMOVAL

2nd speed Mount a special tool on the 1st speed gear and remove the
gear sleeve 2nd speed gear sleeve.
MD998917

AF" 1ST SPEED GEAR SLEEVE REMOVAL
MD998801 1st speed

gear sleeve
AG" TAPER ROLLER BEARING REMOVAL

MD998801 Taper roller bearing

Oil seal 3.5 mm "AA OIL SEAL INSTALLATION
Make sure that the oil seal is pressed into the position shown
in the illustration.
"BA TAPER ROLLER BEARING INSTALLATION

MD998812
MD998801 MD998819
Taper roller
bearing
"CA 1ST SPEED GEAR SLEEVE INSTALLATION

MD998812
MD998814
1st speed MD998824

gear sleeve
MD998364

"DA SYNCHRONIZER SPRING INSTALLATION
Synchronizer spring
"EA 1ST-2ND SPEED SYNCHRONIZER HUB

INSTALLATION
Install the 1st-2nd speed synchronizer hub in such a way
that it will be oriented in the direction shown.
Installation
direction
Caution
MD998812 When the hub is installed, make sure that the synchronizer
ring is not caught.
MD998814
1st-2nd speed
synchronizer MD998824
hub
MD998364
"FA SYNCHRONIZER SLEEVE INSTALLATION

Identification groove
(1) Install the synchronizer sleeve in such a way that it will
be oriented in the direction shown.
Installation
direction
Synchronizer sleeve projections (2) When the synchronizer sleeve is installed, make sure
that the deep groove portion of the synchronizer hub
is aligned with the projecting portion of the sleeve.
Synchronizer hub deep grooves

"GA 2ND SPEED GEAR SLEEVE INSTALLATION
MD998812
2nd speed MD998814

gear sleeve
MD998824
MD998364
"HA 3RD SPEED GEAR INSTALLATION

MD998812
MD998814
3rd speed gear
MD998824
MD998364
"IA SNAP RING INSTALLATION

Select and install a snap ring so that the output shaft 3rd
speed gear clearance will have the standard value.
Snap ring
MD998812 "JA 4TH SPEED GEAR INSTALLATION
MD998813
MD998821
4th speed
gear
MD998364
MD998812
"KA 5TH SPEED GEAR SLEEVE INSTALLATION
MD998813
MD998821
5th speed
gear sleeve
MD998364

"LA SYNCHRONIZER SPRING INSTALLATION
Synchronizer spring
"MA5TH-REVERSE SPEED SYNCHRONIZER HUB

INSTALLATION
Install the 5th-reverse speed synchronizer hub in such a way
that it will be oriented in the direction shown.
Installation
direction
Caution
MD998812
When the hub is installed, make sure that the synchronizer
5th-reverse speed
synchronizer hub MD998813 ring is not caught.
MD998821
MD998364
"NA REVERSE GEAR / NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING /

MD998812
REVERSE GEAR BEARING SLEEVE
MD998820 INSTALLATION
Reverse gear Reverse gear
bearing sleeve
MD998364
"OA TAPER ROLLER BEARING INSTALLATION

MD998812
MD998819
Taper roller
bearing
MD998364

"PA SNAP RING INSTALLATION
Snap ring
Select and install a snap ring so that the output shaft rear
bearing clearance will have the standard value.
INSPECTION
OUTPUT SHAFT
Check the splines for damage and wear.

(1) Check to ensure that when the bearing sleeve and gear
are combined and made to rotate, they rotate smoothly
without looseness and noise.
(2) Check the cage for deformation.
SYNCHRONIZER RING
(1) Check to ensure that the clutch gear tooth surfaces are
not damaged and broken.
(2) Check to ensure that the cone inside diameter is not
damaged or worn and that the threads are not crushed.
(3) Press the synchronizer ring against the gear and check
clearance “A”. If “A” is less than the limit, replace.
Gear
Synchronizer Limit: 0.5 mm
ring

OUTER SYNCHRONIZER RING / INNER

Damage, Break SYNCHRONIZER RING / SYNCHRONIZER CONE
Damage, Break (1) Check to ensure that the clutch gear tooth surfaces and
cone surfaces are not damaged and broken.
Damage,
Break
Gear (2) Install the outer ring, inner ring and cone, press them
against the gear, and check clearance “A”. If “A” is less
than the limit, replace.
Outer ring Limit: 0.5 mm
Cone
Caution
When any of the outer ring, inner ring or cone has
to be replaced, replace them as a set.
Inner ring
SYNCHRONIZER SLEEVE AND HUB

Sleeve
(1) Check to ensure that when the synchronizer sleeve and
hub are combined and made to slide, they slide smoothly
without binding.
(2) Check to ensure that the front and rear ends of the sleeve
inside surface are not damaged.
Caution
Hub When replacement of either the synchronizer sleeve
or hub is necessary, make sure that the synchronizer
sleeve and hub are replaced as a set.
SYNCHRONIZER SPRING
Check to ensure that the spring is not sagging, deformed
or broken.
SPEED GEARS
(1) Check to ensure that the helical and clutch gear tooth
surfaces are not damaged or worn.
(2) Check to ensure that the synchronizer cone surfaces
are not roughened, damaged or worn.
(3) Check to ensure that the gear inside diameter and front
and rear surfaces are not damaged and worn.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Reverse Idler Gear 22B-35
REVERSE IDLER GEAR

moving parts before
installation.
3
4
TFM0807
Disassembly steps
1. Snap ring
2. Thrust washer
3. Reverse idler gear
4. Needle roller bearing
5. Reverse idler gear shaft
INSPECTION
(1) Check to ensure that when the shaft and gear are combined
and made to rotate, they rotate smoothly without looseness
and noise.
(2) Check to ensure that the cage is not deformed.

22B-36 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Speedometer Gear
SPEEDOMETER GEAR

moving parts before
installation.
1
TFM0593
Disassembly steps
1. e-clip
2. Speedometer driven gear
3. O-ring
4. Sleeve

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Select Lever 22B-37
SELECT LEVER
7
1
11 {1.2}
8
2
9
3
10
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Disassembly steps
"AA 1. Dust cover 6. Select lever shoe
2. Nut 7. Select lever
3. Spring washer 8. Select lever bushing
4. Washer "AA 9. Dust cover
5. Select lever bushing 10. Select lever shaft
Dust cover REASSEMBLY SERVICE POINT

"AA DUST COVER INSTALLATION

22B-38 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Control Housing
CONTROL HOUSING
12 7
9
14 6
5 2
15 4
8 3
16
13
19
11
10
18
17
18 {1.9}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Disassembly steps
AA" "FA 1. Lock pin 11. Spacer
2. Interlock plate 12. Control shaft
3. Control finger "CA 13. Air breather
4. Pin 14. Control shaft boot
5. Return spring "BA 15. Oil seal
6. Stopper plate "AA 16. Needle bearing
"EA 7. Spring pin 17. Spring washer
"DA 8. Spring pin 18. Stopper bracket
9. Stopper body 19. Control housing
10. Neutral return spring

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Control Housing 22B-39
DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINT
Lock pin AA" LOCK PIN REMOVAL
Drive the lock pin out of position from the direction shown.
Control
finger
Control REASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

housing "AA NEEDLE BEARING INSTALLATION
Press fit the needle bearing to the position shown in the
illustration, while making sure that the model number stamped
Model Needle side is oriented in the direction shown.
number bearing
stamped
side
2 mm
"BA OIL SEAL INSTALLATION

Apply transmission oil to the oil seal lip area.
"CA AIR BREATHER INSTALLATION

(1) Apply a sealant to the outside circumference of the
inserting portion.
(2) Make sure that the projecting portion is oriented in the

direction shown.

22B-40 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Control Housing
Control shaft Stopper body "DA SPRING PIN INSTALLATION
Installation
direction
Slit
Spring pin
"EA SPRING PIN INSTALLATION

Spring pin
"FA LOCK PIN INSTALLATION

Lock pin Drive in the lock pin in the direction shown in the illustration.
Control finger

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Clutch Housing 22B-41
CLUTCH HOUSING
3
7
5*
9.8 {1.0} 1
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Disassembly steps
1. Clutch release bearing retainer "BA 5. Bushing*
"EA 2. Oil seal "AA 6. Cover-A
AA" "DA 3. Outer race "AA 7. Cover-B
AB" "CA 4. Outer race 8. Clutch housing
NOTE:
*: Never remove the bushings from the clutch housing.
Only the case when installing new bushings into a new clutch housing, refer to "BA.

22B-42 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Clutch Housing

MD999566
AA" OUTER RACE REMOVAL
Outer race
AB" OUTER RACE REMOVAL
MD999566
Cover-B REASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

"AA COVER-A / COVER-B INSTALLATION
Install the covers directed as shown in the illustration
Cover-A
"BA BUSHING INSTALLATION

Press fit the bushing to the illustrated position, while making
sure that the split ends of the bushing do not coincide with
Bushing the air purge groove.
Air purge groove
Bushing
1 mm

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Clutch Housing 22B-43
"CA OUTER RACE INSTALLATION
MB990938
MB990935
"DA OUTER RACE INSTALLATION

MB990938
MB991445
"EA OIL SEAL INSTALLATION

MB990938
MB990928

22B-44 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Transmission Case
TRANSMISSION CASE
2*
3*
Disassembly steps
"CA 1. Oil seal
"BA 2. Needle bearing*
"AA 3. Bushing*
4. Transmission case
NOTE:
*: Never remove the bearing and bushing from the transmission case.
Only the case when installing new bearing and bushing into a new transmission case, refer to "AA
and "BA.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Transmission Case 22B-45
Air purge groove

"AA BUSHING INSTALLATION
Press fit the bushing to the illustrated position, while making
sure that the split ends of the bushing do not coincide with
the air purge groove.
Bushing
Bushing
3 mm
"BA NEEDLE BEARING INSTALLATION

Needle bearing Model No.
stamped surface Press fit the needle bearing until it is flush with the case,
while making sure that the model number stamped side is
oriented in the direction shown.
"CA OIL SEAL INSTALLATION

MD998800

22B-46 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Center Differential
CENTER DIFFERENTIAL
1 3
Apply gear oil to all 2
moving parts before
installation.
12 6
7
11
132 {13.5}
12
4
17
14
9 10
12
13
12 11
8
9
16
15
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Disassembly steps
"DA 1. Center differential drive gear "CA 10. Pinion shaft holder
"CA 2. Center differential flange "CA 11. Pinion
AA" "BA 3. Taper roller bearing "CA 12. Washer
"CA 4. Snap ring "CA 13. Side gear
"CA 5. Front output shaft "CA 14. Spacer
"CA 6. Spacer AB" "AA 15. Taper roller bearing
"CA 7. Side gear 16. Speedometer drive gear
"CA 8. Lock pin 17. Differential case
"CA 9. Pinion shaft

MD998917
AA" TAPER ROLLER BEARING REMOVAL
Use the special tool to remove the taper roller bearing.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Center Differential 22B-47
AB" TAPER ROLLER BEARING REMOVAL
MD998917 Use the special tools to remove the taper roller bearing.
MB990932

MB990937
"AA TAPER ROLLER BEARING INSTALLATION
Use the special tool to install the taper roller bearing.
"BA TAPER ROLLER BEARING INSTALLATION

Use the special tools to install the taper roller bearing.
MD998823 MD998812
"CA SPACER / SIDE GEAR / WASHER /

PINION/PINION HOLDER / PINION SHAFT /
LOCK PIN / FRONT OUTPUT SHAFT / SNAP
RING / CENTER DIFFERENTIAL FLANGE
INSTALLATION
(1) Install the side gear in the center differential case with
the spacer attached.
NOTE
If a new side gear is to be installed, select a spacer
with medium thickness (0.8 – 0.9 mm).
(2) Fit the washer on the back of each pinion. Engage the
Differential case 4 pinions simultaneously in the side gear.
Lock pin Rotate the gears to place them in position, then install
Pinion shaft the pinion shaft holder.
(3) Insert the pinion shafts.
(4) Install the lock pins in the illustrated direction.

22B-48 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Center Differential
(5) Install the front output shaft to the side gear and fit the
snap ring.
(6) Attach the spacer on the other side gear, then install
the side gear in the center differential case.
NOTE
If a new side gear is to be installed, select a spacer
with medium thickness (0.8 – 0.9 mm).
(7) Install the center differential flange on the case while

aligning the mating marks, then secure it temporarily with
machine screw.
(8) Measure the backlash between the side gear and the
pinion.
(9) If the measurement deviates from the standard value,
correct the backlash using a spacer of different thickness
and check it again.
NOTE
The backlash must be the same on both sides.
"DA CENTER DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE GEAR

INSTALLATION
(1) Apply sealant to the entire threaded portion of the bolt.
Specified sealant:
THREEBOND 1303 or LOKTITE 648
1 (2) Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in the illustrated

3 10 sequence.
5
8
7
6
9
4
2

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Transfer 22B-49
TRANSFER
1
3
6
4
8
7 11

9 moving parts before
installation.
10
23 {2.4}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Disassembly steps
"FA 1. Air breather
2. Dust seal guard
"EA 3. Oil seal
"DA 4. Oil seal
"AA 5. O-ring
"AA 6. O-ring
"CA 7. Oil seal
"BA 8. Oil seal
"AA 9. O-ring
10. Transfer cover
11. Transfer

22B-50 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Transfer

"AA O-RING INSTALLATION
Apply transmission oil to the O-ring.

MD998800 (1) Apply transmission oil to the oil seal lip area.
Transmission oil:
DIA QUEEN MULTI-GEAR OIL 75W/85W
(2) By using the special tool, install the oil seal.
"CA OIL SEAL INSTALLATION

MB990938
MB990933 (1) Apply transmission oil to the oil seal lip area.
Transmission oil:
MB990891
"DA OIL SEAL INSTALLATION
MB990887 (1) Apply transmission oil to the oil seal lip area.
Transmission oil:
"EA OIL SEAL INSTALLATION

(1) Apply transmission oil to the oil seal lip area.
MD998304
Transmission oil:

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL – Transfer 22B-51
"FA AIR BREATHER INSTALLATION
Apply sealant to the air breather.

26-1
FRONT AXLE
CONTENTS
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 AXLE HUB AND KNUCKLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

26-2 FRONT AXLE – Service Specifications / Special Tools
Items Limit
Hub axial play mm 0.05
Hub rotation starting torque Nm {kgf@m} 1.8 {1.8}
SPECIAL TOOLS
MB990635 or Steering linkage Ball joint disconnection
MB991113 puller
MB990767 End holder Fixing of hub
MB991354 Puller body Removal of drive shaft
MB990241 Axle shaft puller

A: MB990242 A: Puller shaft
B
B: MB990244 B: Puller bar
A: MB991017 A, B: Front hub D Temporary fixing of unit bearing

B: MB990998 remover & D Measurement of hub rotation starting
C: MB991000 installer torque
C: Spacer D Measurement of hub axial play
Use MB991000 (component of
MB990998) for the spacer.
MB990326 Preload socket Measurement of hub rotation starting torque

FRONT AXLE – Axle Hub and Knuckle 26-3
AXLE HUB AND KNUCKLE
D Check the Dust Cover for Cracks or Damage by
Pushing it with Finger.
25 {2.6}
108 – 127 12 88 {9.0}

{11.0 – 13.0}
1
25 {2.6}
13
10
7 9 {0.9}
11
6
3
90 – 110
{9.2 – 11.2} 5
4
113 {11.5}
8
2
177 – 275
{18.0 – 28.0}
15 – 33 9
{1.5 – 3.4}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Front speed sensor Caution
<Vehicles with AYC> (1) For vehicles with AYC, be careful when handling
AA" 2. Caliper assembly the pole piece at the tip of the speed sensor
3. Brake disc so as not to damage it by striking against other
4. Split pin parts.
AB" "AA 5. Drive shaft nut (2) For vehicles with AYC, be careful not to damage
6. Front hub assembly the rotors installed to B.J. outer race during
7. Dust shield removal and installation of the drive shaft.
8. Connection for lower arm ball joint
9. Split pin
AC" 10. Connection for tie rod end
AD" 11. Front drive shaft
12. Front strut mounting bolt
13. Knuckle

26-4 FRONT AXLE – Axle Hub and Knuckle

AA" CALIPER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
Secure the removed caliper assembly with wire, so that it
does not fall.
AB" DRIVE SHAFT NUT REMOVAL
Caution
Do not apply the vehicle weight to the wheel bearing
MB990767 while loosening the drive shaft nut.
AC" TIE ROD END DISCONNECTION

MB990635 or
MB991113 Use the special tool to disconnect the ball joint.
Caution
Nut (1) Use the special tool to loosen the nut only; do not
Cord
remove it from the ball joint.
(2) Tie the special tool with a cord not to let it fall off.
Ball joint
AD" DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL

MB990244 (3)
MB990767
MB991354
MB990242
177 – 275 Nm INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

{18.0 – 28.0 kgf@m}
Washer "AA DRIVE SHAFT NUT INSTALLATION
(1) Install the drive shaft washer in the specified direction.
(2) Using the special tool, tighten the drive shaft nut.
Caution
Before securely tightening the drive shaft nuts, make
sure there is no load on the wheel bearings.
(3) If the position of the split pin holes does not match, tighten
MB990767 the nut up to the first matching holes.
Install the split pin and bend it securely.

FRONT AXLE – Axle Hub and Knuckle 26-5
INSPECTION
MB991000 MB991017
(MB990998) MB990326 1. HUB ROTATION STARTING TORQUE CHECK
(1) Install the special tool to the front hub assembly and
tighten the nut to the specified torque.
(2) Use the special tool to measure the hub rotation starting
torque.
Limit: 1.8 Nm {18.0 kgf@cm}
177 – 275 Nm
{18.0 – 28.0 kgf@m} (3) The hub rotation starting torque should be within the limit
value range, and there should be no engagement or
feeling of roughness.
2. HUB AXIAL PLAY CHECK
Wooden blocks
(1) Measure the hub play in the axial direction.
Limit: 0.05 mm
NOTE
Measure the hub play while clamping the hub in a vice
with wooden blocks against the bearing section.
(2) If the limit value of hub axial play cannot be obtained
with the nut tightened to the specified torque (177 to
Wooden blocks MB991017 275 Nm {18.0 to 28.0 kgf@m}), replace the front hub
assembly.

27-1
REAR AXLE
CONTENTS
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REAR HUB ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
LUBRICANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 KNUCKLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
SEALANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER

<EVOLUTION-IV, EVOLUTION-V GSR> . 39
TROUBLESHOOTING <AYC> . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE <EVOLUTION-V RS> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
<VEHICLES WITH AYC> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1. Rear Axle Total Backlash Check . . . . . . . 27 TORQUE TRANSFER DIFFERENTIAL
<VEHICLES WITH AYC> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2. Gear Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3. Gear Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 LSD CASE ASSEMBLY
4. Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 <VEHICLES WITHOUT AYC> . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5. Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 HYDRAULIC UNIT
6. Differential Carrier Oil Seal <VEHICLES WITH AYC> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
7. Speed Sensor Output Voltage SENSOR RELAY
Measurement <Vehicles without ABS> . 31 <VEHICLES WITH AYC> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
8. Action When Battery Runs Out . . . . . . . . 32
AYC-ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

27-2 REAR AXLE – Service Specifications / Lubricant / Sealant
<Vehicles with AYC>
Rear axle total backlash mm – 5
Pressure generated by hydraulic unit MPa {kgf/cm2} 0 – 1.6 {10.0 – 16.0} –
Wheel bearing axial play mm – 0.05
Wheel bearing rotation starting torque Nm {kgf@cm} – 1.0 {10.5} or less
<Vehicles without AYC>

Right-to-left difference in combined thickness of friction plate and fric- 0 – 0.05 –

tion disc mm
Clearance between spring plate and differential case mm 0.06 – 0.25 –
LSD differential torque When new clutch plate is installed 5 – 19 {0.5 – 1.9} –
Nm {kgf@m}
When existing clutch plate is installed 2 – 19 {0.2 – 1.9} –
Distortion of friction plate and friction disc mm – 0.08
Difference in thickness between friction plate, friction disc, and spring – 0.1
plate mm
LUBRICANT
<Vehicles with AYC>
Items Specified lubricant Capacity
Gear oil Torque Differential MITSUBISHI GENUINE DIA QUEEN SUPER 0.41 ± 0.02 dm3
transfer HYPOID GEAR OIL (GL-5) {0.41 ± 0.02 ȏ}
differential
Torque transfer MITSUBISHI GENUINE DIA QUEEN AYC FLUID )0 3
0.70*0.05 dm
mechanism
)0
{0.70 *0.05 ȏ}
Hydraulic piping fluid MITSUBISHI GENUINE DIA QUEEN ATF-SPII 1 dm3 {1 ȏ}
Torque transfer mechanism oil seal lips Vaseline As required
SEALANT
<Vehicles with AYC>
Items Specified sealant
Torque transfer differential vent plug Semi-drying sealant: THREEBOND 1281B (460 g)
Torque transfer mechanism cover

REAR AXLE – Special Tools 27-3
SPECIAL TOOLS
MB991529 Diagnosis code Inspection of AYC (diagnosis display by AYC
check harness warning lamp)
MD998330 Oil pressure Hydraulic pressure measurement <vehicles

(MD998331) gauge with AYC>
(2,942 kPa
{30 kgf/cm2})
MB991705 Hose adapter
MB990925 Bearing & oil seal Pressfitting of oil seal <differential>

installer set
MB991115 Oil seal installer Pressfitting of oil seal <differential> (used in

combination with MB990938)
MD998812 Installer cap Pressfitting of oil seal <torque transfer mecha-

nism of vehicles with AYC>
MD998813 Installer 100
MD998829 Installer adapter

(60)
MB990767 End yoke holder Fixing of hub

27-4 REAR AXLE – Special Tools

MB990241 Rear axle shaft D Removal of drive shaft
A: MB990242 puller D Removal of rear hub assembly
B
B: MB990244 A: Puller shaft
B: Puller bar
A
MB991354 Puller body
A: MB991017 A, B: Front hub D Temporary fixing of unit bearing

B: MB990998 remover & D Measurement of wheel bearing rotation
C: MB991000 installer starting torque
C: Spacer D Measurement of wheel bearing axial play
Use MB991000 (component
of MB990998) for the spacer.
MB990326 Preload socket D Measurement of wheel bearing rotation
starting torque
D Measurement of drive pinion preload
MB991406, Steering linkage D Disconnection of ball joint

MB990635, or puller D Removal of hub bolt
MB991113
MB991460 Plug Prevention of differential oil from being dis-

charged and entry of foreign matter <differen-
tial>
MB990988 Side gear holding Measurement of clutch plate preload <vehicles

tool set without AYC>
MB990850 End yoke holder Removal and installation of companion flange

REAR AXLE – Special Tools / Troubleshooting <AYC> 27-5
MB990988 Number Name O.D. mm

1 MB990551 Box –
2 MB990989 Base –
3 (MB990990) Tool A 25
(MB990991) Tool B 28
(MB990992) Tool C 31
MB990925
Brass bar Toolbox
Bar (one-touch type)

Installer adapter
Tool number (MB990925) O.D. mm Tool number (MB990925) O.D. mm

A MB990926 39.0 A MB990933 63.5
MB990927 45.0 MB990934 67.5
MB990928 49.5 MB990935 71.5
MB990929 51.0 MB990936 75.5
MB990930 54.0 MB990937 79.0
MB990931 57.0 B MB990938 –
MB990932 61.0 C MB990939 –
TROUBLESHOOTING <AYC>
1. BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING CONDITIONS
Before starting the troubleshooting procedure, make sure that the following items have been checked
okay.
D The correct steering wheel has been properly installed in the neutral position of the steering column
shaft.
D Tire and wheel sizes are correct with correct specifications. Inflation pressure, balance, and wear
conditions are okay.
D Wheel alignment is correct.
D The engine, suspension, and other parts have not been remodeled so as to affect the AYC system.
2. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
READING THE DIAGNOSIS CODE
Read the diagnosis code using AYC warning lamp.

27-6 REAR AXLE – Troubleshooting <AYC>
3. INSPECTION CHART FOR DIAGNOSIS CODE

Diagnosis Diagnosis items Ref. page
code No.
12 Power supply voltage (valve power supply) system (open- or short-circuit) 27-7
21 FR wheel speed sensor system (open- or short-circuit) 27-7
22 FL wheel speed sensor system (open- or short-circuit) 27-7
23 RR wheel speed sensor system (open- or short-circuit) 27-7
24 RL wheel speed sensor system (open- or short-circuit) 27-7
25 Wrong-diameter tire 27-9
26 Faulty wheel speed sensor 27-10
31 Steer sensor (ST-1, ST-2, ST-N) system (open-circuit) 27-11
32 Steer sensor (ST-N) system (short-circuit) 27-11
33 Steer sensor (ST-N) system 27-12
34 Steer sensor (ST-1, ST-2) system (short-circuit) 27-12
41 TPS system (open- or short-circuit) 27-13
51 Longitudinal acceleration sensor system (open- or short-circuit) 27-13
52 Longitudinal acceleration sensor 27-14
56 Lateral acceleration sensor system (open- or short-circuit) 27-13
61 Stop lamp switch system (open-circuit) 27-14
65 ABS monitor system (open-circuit or defective ABS) 27-15
71 Proportioning valve system (open- or short-circuit) 27-15
72 Directional control valve (right) system (open- or short-circuit) 27-16
73 Directional control valve (left) system (open- or short-circuit) 27-17
81 AYC relay system (open- or short-circuit) 27-18
82 Electric pump system 27-19
83 Electric pump system 27-20

REAR AXLE – Troubleshooting <AYC> 27-7
4. INSPECTION PROCEDURES FOR DIAGNOSIS CODES
Code No. 12: Power supply voltage (valve power supply) Probable cause
system
This code is output when the AYC-ECU power supply voltage drops below, goes D Defective harness or connector
beyond, a specified level. D Defective battery
D Defective AYC-ECU
NOTE
Refer to the corresponding item if any other diagnosis code is being output.
NG
Is the battery voltage correct? Replace
OK
NG NG
Measure at B-96 AYC-ECU connector. Check the following connectors: Repair
D Disconnect the connector and B-96, B-94, B-49, B-75, B-76
OK
D Voltage across 31 and body ground Check the trouble symptom.
OK: Battery voltage
NG
OK
Check and repair harness between
Replace AYC-ECU. ignition switch (IG2) and AYC-ECU.
Code No. 21, 22, 23, 24: Wheel speed sensor system Probable cause
This code is output if any one of three wheel speed sensors fails to provide an input D Defective harness or connector
even after the other wheel exceeded 8 km/h. D Defective ABS-ECU
D Defective AYC-ECU
<Vehicles with ABS>

YES
Is an ABS diagnosis code No. 21, 22, Troubleshooting
23, or 24 output?
NO
OK NG
Measure at B-95 AYC-ECU connector. Check the following connector: Repair
D Disconnect the connector and B-95
OK
D Turn tire at 1/2 to 1 revolution/sec. Check the trouble symptom.
D Voltage across 6/7/8/9 and body
ground OK
OK: 42 mV or more (when mea-
sured with a circuit tester) Replace AYC-ECU.
120 mV-P or more (when
measured with an oscillo-
scope)
NG
NG
Check the following connectors: Repair
B-24, B-95
OK
Check the trouble symptom.

NG
NG
Check harness between AYC-ECU Repair
and ABS-ECU.
OK
Replace ABS-ECU.

<Vehicles without ABS>
NG
Check the installation of speed sensor. Repair
OK
NG NG
Measure at B-95 AYC-ECU connector. Check the speed sensor. Replace
D Disconnect the connector and OK
D Resistance across 7-20 (front, LH), NG
6-19 (front, RH), 9-22 (rear, LH), B-95, B-52, B-17, A-26, A-50, D-04,
and 8-21 (rear, RH). D-14, D-19
OK: 1.4 – 1.8 kΩ.
OK
OK
NG
Check and repair the harness between

speed sensor and AYC-ECU.
NG NG
Check the speed sensor output volt- Check the speed sensor and rotor. Replace
age. (Refer to P.27-31.)
OK
OK
Check the wheel bearing.
NG
B-95
OK

NG
Replace AYC-ECU.

Code No. 25: Wrong-diameter tire Probable cause
This code is output if the speed of any one of the four wheels exceeds a specified D Defective harness or connector
level with respect to the average of the four wheel speed sensor outputs when the D Defective AYC-ECU
steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position and the vehicle speed exceeds 20 D Defective ABS-ECU
km/h. At this time, the warning lamp does not light up.
<Vehicles with ABS>
NO
Are correct tires mounted on all four Repair
wheels?
YES
YES
Is ABS diagnosis code No. 15 output? Troubleshooting
NO
OK NG
OK
D Ignition switch: OK
ground. NG
scope)
NG
NG
B-24, B-95
OK

NG
NG
and ABS-ECU.
OK
Replace ABS-ECU.
NO
Are correct tires mounted on all four Repair
wheels?
YES
NG
Check speed sensor for installation. Repair
OK
NG NG
Check speed sensor output voltage. Check speed sensor and rotor. Replace
(Refer to p. 27-31.) OK
OK
NG
B-95
NG
OK Check wheel bearing. Replace
OK
NG
NG Check the following connectors: Repair
B-95, B-52, B-17, A-26, A-50, D-04,
Replace AYC-ECU. D-14, D-19
OK

NG


Code No. 26: Wheel speed sensor system (faulty output Probable cause
signal)
This code is output if the speed of one of the four wheels exceeds a specified level D Defective harness or connector
when the vehicle speed is 20 km/h or more. At this time, the warning lamp is turned D Defective AYC-ECU
on. D Defective ABS-ECU
<Vehicles with ABS>

YES
Is ABS diagnosis code No. 15 output? Troubleshooting
NO
NG NG
OK
ground. NG
scope)
NG
NG
B-24, B-95
OK

NG
NG
and ABS-ECU.
OK
Replace ABS-ECU.

NG
Check speed sensor for installation. Repair
OK
NG NG
Check speed sensor output voltage. Check speed sensor and rotor. Replace
(Refer to P.27-31.) OK
OK
NG
B-95
NG
OK Check wheel bearing. Replace
OK
NG
NG Check the following connectors: Repair
B-95, B-52, B-17, A-26, A-50, D-04,
Replace AYC-ECU. D-14, D-19
OK

NG


Code No. 31: Steer sensor (ST-1, ST-2, ST-N) system Probable cause
This code is output when any of the steer sensors ST-1, ST-2, and ST-N is open-circuited D Defective steer sensor
or the steer sensor ground wire is open-circuited. D Defective harness or connector
D Defective AYC-ECU
OK NG
D Connector connected. NG: Voltage B-95
D Ignition switch: ON remains
OK
D Voltage across 4/5/17 and body ground. at 0 V.
OK: The voltage alternates between about Check the trouble symptom.
3 V and about 0.5 V when the steering
wheel is turned. NG
NG: Voltage alternates NG: Voltage remains Replace AYC-ECU.
between 4 V or at 4 V or more.
more and 0.5 V.
NG NG
Measure at B-98 steer sensor connec- Check the following connectors: Repair
tor. B-98, B-50
OK
D Continuity across 3 and body Check the trouble symptom.
ground
OK: Conducting NG
OK Check and repair the harness between
NG
B-95, B-65, B-98
OK

NG
NG
Check the harness between steer sen- Repair
sor and AYC-ECU.
OK
Replace the steer sensor.
Code No. 32: Steer sensor (ST-N) system Probable cause

This code is output when the steering wheel is considered to be turned 40_ or more D Defective steer sensor
as determined with ST-1 and ST-2 with ST-N ON (LOW voltage). D Defective harness or connector
D Defective AYC-ECU
OK NG
D Connector connected. B-95
OK
D Turn steering wheel about 90_ in
either direction from the straight- Check the trouble symptom.
ahead position.
D Voltage across 17 and body NG
ground.
OK: The voltage increases from Replace AYC-ECU.
about 0.5 V or less to about
3.5 V.
NG
NG NG
D Disconnect the connector and B-95, B-65, B-98
OK
D Turn steering wheel about 90_ in Check the trouble symptom.
either direction from the straight-
ahead position. NG
ground. Check the harness between steer sen- Repair
OK: No continuity sor and AYC-ECU.
OK OK
Replace AYC-ECU. Replace the steer sensor.

Code No. 33: Steer sensor (ST-N) system Probable cause

This code is output when the steering wheel is turned 400_ or more in the same D Defective steer sensor
direction with ST-N OFF (HIGH voltage). D Defective harness or connector
D Defective AYC-ECU
NG NG
D Connector connected. B-95, B-65, B-98
OK
D Turn steering wheel about 90_ in
either direction from the straight- Check the trouble symptom.
ahead position.
ground. NG
OK: The voltage increases from Check the harness between steer sen- Repair
about 0.5 V or less to about sor and AYC-ECU.
3.5 V. OK
OK
Replace AYC-ECU.

NG
Replace AYC-ECU.
Code No. 34: Steer sensor (ST-1, ST-2) system Probable cause
This code is output if a turning condition is detected for a cumulative period of time D Defective steer sensor
of 15 min. or more, during which there is no change in the steer sensor (ST-1, ST-2) D Defective harness or connector
signals with the wheel speed 15 km/h or more. D Defective AYC-ECU
NG NG
D Connector connected. B-95, B-65, B-98
OK
D Voltage across 4/5 and body
ground Check the trouble symptom.
OK: The voltage alternates
between about 0.5 V and NG
about 3 V as the steering NG
wheel is turned. Check the harness between steer sen- Repair
sor and AYC-ECU.
OK
OK
Replace AYC-ECU.

NG
Replace AYC-ECU.

Code No. 41: TPS system Probable cause
This code is output when the input from the throttle position sensor falls short of D Defective TPS
0.2 V. D Defective harness or connector
D Defective AYC-ECU
YES
Is the MPI diagnosis code No. 14 out- Refer to GROUP 13 TROUBLE-
put? SHOOTING.
NO
NG NG
OK
D Voltage across 18 and body ground
D Fully open the throttle valve. Check the trouble symptom.
OK: 4.5 – 5.0 V
NG
OK
Replace AYC-ECU. AYC-ECU and TPS.
Code No. 51: Longitudinal acceleration sensor system Probable cause

Code No. 56: Lateral acceleration sensor system
This code is output when the output from the acceleration sensor becomes 0.5 V D Defective longitudinal acceleration sensor
or less or 4.5 V or more. D Defective lateral acceleration sensor
D Defective harness or connector
D Defective AYC-ECU
OK NG
OK
D Voltage across 1/3 and body
ground NG
Check the trouble symptom. Replace AYC-ECU.
OK: 0.5 – 4.5 V
NG
OK NG
Measure at D-20, D-32 acceleration Check the following connectors: Repair
sensor connector. D-20, D-32
D Connector connected.
OK
D Voltage across 2 and body ground NG
Check the trouble symptom. Check and repair the harness between
OK: 0.5 – 4.5 V acceleration sensor and AYC-ECU.
NG: 0.5 V or less NG: 4.5 V or more
NG
Check the acceleration sensor. (Refer Replace
to P.27-54.)
NG

acceleration sensor and AYC-ECU.
NG
Check at D-20, D-32 acceleration sen- Check the following connectors:
sor connector. D-20, D-32, B-49, B-75, B-76
OK
D Ignition switch: ON Check the trouble symptom.
OK: Battery voltage OK
acceleration sensor and ignition
Check the following connectors: switch.
D-20, D-32
OK

NG
Replace the acceleration sensor.

Code No. 52: Longitudinal acceleration sensor system Probable cause

This code is output when the longitudinal acceleration exceeds a predetermined value D Defective longitudinal acceleration sensor
while the vehicle is running with both ABS and brakes being inactive. D Defective harness or connector
D Defective AYC-ECU
NG
Check the acceleration sensor. Replace
(Refer to P.27-52.)
OK
NG NG
D Connector connected B-95, B-52, D-20
OK
OK: 2.4 V to 2.6 V (where vehicle Check the trouble symptom.
in horizontal position)
NG
OK
NG
B-95
longitudinal acceleration sensor and
Check the trouble symptom. AYC-ECU.
NG
Replace AYC-ECU.
Code No. 61: Stop lamp switch system Probable cause

This code is output under either of the following conditions: D Defective stop lamp switch
D Stop lamp switch remains ON for 15 min. or more. D Defective harness or connector
D There is an open-circuit in the harness between AYC-ECU and stop lamp switch. D Defective AYC-ECU
NG
Check the stop lamp switch. Replace
OK
NG
Measure at the B-95 AYC-ECU con- Check and repair the harness between
nector. AYC-ECU and stop lamp switch.
D Brake pedal not depressed.
OK: 1 V or less
OK
NG
B-95
OK

NG
Replace AYC-ECU.

Code No. 65: ABS monitor system Probable cause
This code is output when ABS is considered to remain activated (motor relay remains D Defective harness or connector
ON) for a continuous 1-min.-or-more period. D Defective AYC-ECU
It is output also when there is an open-circuit in the harness between ABS motor
relay and AYC-ECU.
YES
Is the ABS diagnosis code output? Troubleshooting
NO
NG
B-95
OK

NG
NG
Check the harness between ABS Repair
motor relay and AYC-ECU.
OK
Replace AYC-ECU.
Code No. 71: Proportioning valve system Probable cause

This code is output when the proportioning valve control circuit is open- or short-circuited. D Defective proportioning valve
D Defective AYC-ECU
NG
Measure at F-27 proportioning valve Replace the hydraulic unit.
connector.
measure at the proportioning valve.
D Resistance across 2 – 3
OK: 4.7 Ω or less
OK
NG NG
Measure at F-27 proportioning valve Check the following connectors: Repair
connector. F-27, F-30
OK
ground
OK: Conducting OK
NG Check and repair the harness between
proportioning valve and body ground.
NG
B-96, B-94, D-06, F-30, F-27
OK

NG
NG
Check the harness between propor- Repair
tioning valve and AYC-ECU.
OK
Replace AYC-ECU.

Code No. 72: Directional control valve (right) system Probable cause
This code is output when the directional control valve (right) control circuit is open- D Defective directional control valve (right)
or short-circuited. D Defective harness or connector
D Defective AYC-ECU
NG
Measure at F-29 directional control Replace the hydraulic unit.
valve (right) connector.
measure at the directional control
valve side.
OK: 19 – 21 Ω or less
OK
NG NG
Measure at F-29 directional control Check the following connectors: Repair
valve (right) connector. F-29, F-30
OK
valve side. Check the trouble symptom.
D Continuity across 1 and body
ground OK
OK: Conducting
OK directional control valve (right) and
body ground.
NG
B-96, B-94, D-06, F-30, F-29
OK

NG
NG
Check the harness between directional Repair
control valve (right) and AYC-ECU.
OK
Replace AYC-ECU.

Code No. 73: Directional control valve (left) system Probable cause
This code is output when the directional control valve (left) control circuit is open- D Defective directional control valve (left)
or short-circuited. D Defective harness or connector
D Defective AYC-ECU
NG
Measure at F-28 directional control Replace the hydraulic unit.
valve (left) connector.
valve side.
OK: 19 – 21 Ω or less
OK
NG NG
Measure at F-28 directional control Check the following connectors: Repair
valve (left) connector. F-28, F-30
OK
valve side. Check the trouble symptom.
D Continuity across 1 and body
ground NG
OK: Conducting
OK directional control valve (left) and body
ground.
NG
B-96, B-94, D-06, F-30, F-28
OK

NG
NG
Check the harness between directional Repair
control valve (left) and AYC-ECU.
OK
Replace AYC-ECU.

Code No. 81: AYC relay system Probable cause

This code is output when the coil circuit of the AYC relay is open- or short-circuited. D Defective AYC relay
D Defective AYC-ECU
NG
Check the AYC relay. Replace the AYC relay.
(Refer to P.27-52.)
OK
NG NG
Measure at A-126 AYC relay connec- Check the following connector: Repair
tor. A-126
ground
OK: Conducting NG
AYC relay and body ground.
NG
B-96, B-126
NG

NG
NG
Check the harness between AYC relay Repair
and AYC-ECU.
OK
Replace AYC-ECU.

Code No. 82: Electric pump system Probable cause
This code is output if the pressure switch is not set to high-pressure position despite D Low hydraulic oil level
the AYC-ECU’s command to drive the AYC relay for a given period of time. D Oil leak
D Defective fusible link
D Defective AYC relay
D Defective AYC motor
D Defective accumulator pressure switch
D Defective AYC-ECU
NO
Is the hydraulic oil level correct in the reservoir tank? Is there a hydraulic oil leak?
(Refer to P.27-29.)
YES NO
YES
Add hydraulic oil. Repair the leak.
YES
Is diagnosis code no. 81 output? Check the AYC relay system. (Refer to P.27-18.)
NO
YES
Can pump be operated? Measure at F-31 accumulator pressure switch connector.
NG D Disconnect the connector and measure at the harness side.
Measure at A-126 AYC relay connector. D Voltage across 2 and body ground
D Disconnect the connector and measure at the harness side. OK: Battery voltage
D Voltage across 5 and body ground NG OK
OK: Battery voltage
NG Replace the hydraulic unit
OK
NG for a defective accumula-
Check the following Repair tor pressure switch.
connector: A-126
NG
OK Check the following Repair
connectors: B-95, B-94,
Check the trouble symp- D-06, F-30, F-31
tom.
OK
NG
Check and repair the har-
ness between fusible link NG
no. 10 and AYC relay. NG
Check the harness Repair
between AYC-ECU and
NG accumulator pressure
D Check AYC relay for Repair
switch.
continuity.
(Refer to P.27-52.) OK
D Check AYC motor for
operation. Replace AYC-ECU.
OK
NG
connectors:
A-126, B-94, B-27, F-32
OK

NG
NG
Check the harness Replace
between AYC relay and
AYC motor, and between
AYC motor and body
ground.
OK
Replace AYC-ECU.

Code No. 83: Electric pump system Probable cause

This code is output if the pressure switch is not set to low-pressure position despite D Defective accumulator pressure switch
the AYC-ECU’s command to change the driving force. D Defective harness or connector
YES NG
Does the AYC motor continue turning Check the AYC relay for continuity. Repair
when the ignition switch is turned ON? (Refer to P.27-52.)
NO OK

AYC relay and AYC motor.
YES
Is diagnosis code no. 71, 72, or 73 D Check the proportioning valve
output? system (code no. 71).
NO (Refer to P.27-15.)
D Check the directional control valve
(right) system (code no. 72).
(Refer to P.27-16.)
D Check the directional control valve
(left) system (code no. 73).
(Refer to P.27-17.)
OK
Measure at F-31 accumulator pressure Replace the hydraulic unit for a defec-
switch connector. tive accumulator pressure switch.
measure at the harness side. (1) NG NG
D Ignition switch: ON Check the following connectors: Repair
(1) Voltage across 2 and body ground B-95, B-94, D-06, F-30, F-31
OK: Battery voltage
(2) Continuity across 1 and body OK
ground
OK: Conducting
NG
(2) NG
NG
Check the harness between AYC-ECU Repair
and accumulator pressure switch.
OK
Replace AYC-ECU.
NG
F-31, F-30
OK

NG

accumulator pressure switch and body
ground.

5. INSPECTION CHART FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS
Trouble symptom Inspection Ref. page
procedure No.
AYC warning lamp does not light up when the ignition key is turned to “ON” (engine 1 27-21
stationary).
AYC warning lamp remains lit up after the engine has started. 2 27-22
AYC is inoperative. 3 27-22

Unable to start or accelerate on slippery road surfaces.
Rear tires are noisy during low-speed cornering. 4 27-23

Vehicle skews.
6. INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS

INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1
AYC warning lamp does not light up when the ignition key Probable cause
is turned to “ON” (engine stationary).
The lamp power supply circuit is probably open-circuited, lamp bulb is out, or the D Blown fuse
circuit between AYC warning lamp and AYC-ECU or AYC-ECU itself is defective. D AYC warning lamp out
D Defective AYC-ECU
NG NG
Measure at B-08 combination meter Check the following connectors: Repair
connector. B-08, B-74, B-76
OK
D Ignition switch: ON Check the trouble symptom.
OK: Battery voltage NG
ignition switch (IG2) and AYC warning
lamp.
NG NG
Measure at B-96 AYC-ECU connector. Check the lamp bulb. Replace
D Ignition switch: ON NG
D Warning lamp when 36 is grounded B-96, B-94, B-08
to body
OK: Lit up OK
OK Check the trouble symptom.
Replace AYC-ECU. NG
NG
Check the harness between AYC Repair
warning lamp and AYC-ECU.
OK
Replace combination meter.

AYC warning lamp remains lit up after the engine has Probable cause
started.
The AYC warning lamp ON circuit is probably short-circuited. D Defective combination meter
D Defective harness (short-circuit)
D Defective AYC-ECU
NOTE
This symptom is limited only when AYC-ECU power supply is in normal condition and the diagnosis
code is correct.
YES
Does the AYC warning lamp goes out Replace AYC-ECU.
when the B-96 AYC-ECU connector
is disconnected?
NO
NG
Check the harness between AYC Repair
warning lamp and AYC-ECU.
OK
Replace combination meter.
AYC is inoperative. Probable cause
Unable to start or accelerate on slippery road surfaces.
The hydraulic oil level is probably low, there is an oil leak, the hydraulic unit is defective, D Low hydraulic oil level
or the torque transfer differential is defective. D Oil leak
D Defective hydraulic unit
D Defective torque transfer differential
NOTE
This symptom is limited only when the diagnosis code is correct.
NG OK
Check the hydraulic oil level. Check for oil leak. Repair
OK NG
Add hydraulic oil.
OK OK
Check the AYC for operation. Check the AYC fluid. Correct
NG NG
Replace AYC fluid.

NG
Replace the torque transfer differential.
NG
Check hydraulic pressure. Bleed the system of air.
OK
YES
Is foreign matter trapped in the hydrau- Repair
lic line?
NO Check the trouble symptom.
NG
Replace the hydraulic unit.

Rear tires are noisy during low-speed cornering. Probable cause
The hydraulic unit or torque transfer differential is probably defective. D Defective hydraulic unit
D Defective torque transfer differential
NOTE
This symptom is limited only when the diagnosis code is correct.
OK OK
Check the AYC for operation. Check the AYC fluid. Correct
NG NG
Replace AYC fluid.

NG
NG
Check hydraulic pressure. Bleed the system of air.
OK
YES
Is foreign matter trapped in the hydrau- Repair
lic line?
NO Check the trouble symptom.
NG
Replace the hydraulic unit.

7. CHECK AT AYC-ECU TERMINALS

7-1 TERMINAL VOLTAGE LISTING
(1) The voltage is to be measured across each terminal and ground terminal.
(2) Fig. below shows the arrangement of the terminals.
Terminal Check item Check requirement Normally

No.
1 Lateral acceleration sensor Ignition switch: ON 2.4 – 2.6 V

(horizontal position)
2 Longitudinal acceleration At all times 0V

sensor ground
Lateral acceleration sensor
ground
3 Longitudinal acceleration Ignition switch: ON 2.4 – 2.6 V

sensor (horizontal position)
4 Steer sensor (ST-2) Engine: Idle speed 0 V ↔ approx. 3 V

Turn steering wheel slowly. flashing
5 Steer sensor (ST-1) Engine: Idle speed 0 V ↔ approx. 3 V

Turn steering wheel slowly. flashing
6*1 FR wheel speed Vehicle stationary 1 V or less
Forward vehicle slowly. 0–5V
7*1 FL wheel speed Vehicle stationary 1 V or less
8*1 RR wheel speed Vehicle stationary 1 V or less
9*1 FL wheel speed Vehicle stationary 1 V or less
10 Diagnosis selection input Battery voltage
11 Stop lamp switch Ignition switch: Stop lamp switch: ON Battery voltage
ON
Stop lamp switch: OFF 1 V or less
12*1 ABS monitor When ABS monitor is activated Battery voltage
When ABS monitor is deactivated 1 V or less
17 Steer sensor (ST-N) Engine: Steering wheel: Neutral position 0.5 V or less
Idle speed
Steering wheel: Turned 90_ from 2.5 – 3.5 V
neutral position


No.
18 TPS Ignition switch: Accelerator pedal: Fully closed 0.3 – 1.0 V

ON
Accelerator pedal: Fully open 4.5 – 5.0 V
23 Diagnosis data input/output 1 V or less
24 Idle position switch Ignition switch: Accelerator pedal: Fully closed 2 V or less
ON
Accelerator pedal: Fully open 4.5 – 5.0 V
25 Accumulator pressure Ignition switch: Accumulator internal pressure: 2 V or less

switch ON Low
Accumulator internal pressure: Battery voltage

High
26 ECU ground At all times 0V
31 AYC-ECU power supply Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
Ignition switch: OFF 0V
35 AYC motor relay Ignition switch: When motor is energized Battery voltage
ON
When motor is deenergized 2 V or less
36 AYC warning lamp Ignition switch: When lamp is OFF Battery voltage
ON
When lamp is ON 2 V or less
37 Directional control valve Ignition switch: Right clutch: ON Battery voltage

(right) ON
Right clutch: OFF 0V
38 Proportioning valve Ignition switch: AYC-ON 0 V to battery volt-

ON age
AYC-OFF 0V
39 ECU backup power supply At all times Battery voltage
45 Directional control valve Ignition switch: Left clutch: ON Battery voltage

(left) ON
Left clutch: OFF 0V
46 ECU ground At all times 0V
NOTE
*1: Indicates the vehicles with ABS.

7-2 LISTING OF RESISTANCE AND CONTINUITY ACROSS CONNECTOR TERMINALS ON

HARNESS SIDE
(1) Measure the resistance and check for continuity with the ignition switch in the “OFF” position and
AYC-ECU connector disconnected.
(2) Measure the resistance and check for continuity across terminals listed below.
(3) Fig. below shows the arrangement of terminals.
Terminal No. Signal name Normally
2 – body ground Longitudinal acceleration sensor ground, lateral acceleration sensor ground Conducting
26 – body ground ECU ground Conducting
35 – body ground AYC motor relay Conducting
37 – body ground Directional control valve (right) 15.4 – 16.4 Ω
38 – body ground Proportioning valve 3.4 – 4.0 Ω
45 – body ground Directional control valve (left) 15.4 – 16.4 Ω
46 – body ground ECU ground Conducting
6 – 19*2 Speed sensor (front, RH) 1.4 – 1.8 Ω
7 – 20*2 Speed sensor (front, LH) 1.4 – 1.8 Ω
8 – 21*2 Speed sensor (rear, RH) 1.4 – 1.8 Ω
9 – 22*2 Speed sensor (rear, LH) 1.4 – 1.8 Ω
NOTE
*2: Indicates the vehicles without ABS.

REAR AXLE – On-vehicle Service <Vehicles with AYC> 27-27
Alignment marks ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

<VEHICLES WITH AYC>
1. REAR AXLE TOTAL BACKLASH CHECK
If the drive system roars or the vehicle vibrates, use the
following procedure to measure total backlash in the rear
axle. Based on the measurement taken, determine whether
the differential carrier assembly needs to be removed or not.
(1) Place the shift lever in the neutral position and operate
the parking brake.
(2) Turn the propeller shaft fully clockwise and make an
alignment mark on the companion flange dust cover and
gear carrier.
(3) Turn the propeller shaft fully counterclockwise and
measure the deviation between the alignment marks.
Limit: 5 mm
(4) If the backlash exceeds the limit, replace the differential
carrier assembly.
Filler plug 2. GEAR OIL LEVEL CHECK

49 Nm
{5.0 kgf@m} 2-1 DIFFERENTIAL
(1) Remove the filler plug.
(2) Check that the gear oil level is within the specified range
from the bottom end of the filler plug hole.
Standard value (A): 6 mm
(3) If the gear oil level exceeds the standard value, add the
specified gear oil up to the bottom end of the filler plug
hole.
Specified gear oil:
MITSUBISHI GENUINE DIA QUEEN SUPER
HYPOID GEAR OIL (GL-5)
Gear oil NOTE
10_C or more: #90, less than 10_C: #80
(4) Fit the filler plug and tighten it to the specified torque.
Upper
limit
Lower
limit

27-28 REAR AXLE – On-vehicle Service <Vehicles with AYC>
2-2 TORQUE TRANSFER MECHANISM

Filler plug
49 Nm {5.0 kgf@m} (1) Remove the filler plug.
(2) Check that the gear oil level is up to the bottom end
of the filler plug hole.
(3) If the gear oil level is lower than the bottom end of the
filler plug hole, add the specified gear oil up to the bottom
end of the filler plug hole.
Specified gear oil:
MITSUBISHI GENUINE DIA QUEEN SUPER AYC
FLUID
Gear oil
Filler plug 3. GEAR OIL CHANGE

49 Nm
{5.0 kgf@m} 3-1 DIFFERENTIAL
(1) Remove the drain plug to discharge the gear oil.
(2) Fit the drain plug and tighten it to the specified torque.
(3) Remove the filler plug and add the specified gear oil
up to the bottom end of the filler plug hole.
Specified gear oil:
Drain plug
MITSUBISHI GENUINE DIA QUEEN SUPER
HYPOID GEAR OIL (GL-5)
Quantity used: 0.41 ± 0.02 dm3 {0.41 ± 0.02 ȏ}
NOTE
Gear oil
10_C or more: #90, less than 10_C: #80

Filler plug
49 Nm {5.0 kgf@m} (1) Remove the drain plug to discharge the gear oil.
(2) Fit the drain plug and tighten it to the specified torque.
(3) Remove the filler plug and add the specified gear oil
up to the bottom end of the filler plug hole.
Specified gear oil:
MITSUBISHI GENUINE DIA QUEEN SUPER AYC
FLUID
Drain plug )0 )0
49 Nm Quantity used: 0.70 *0.05 dm3 {0.70 *0.05 ȏ}
{5.0 kgf@m}
4. FLUID LEVEL CHECK

(1) Remove the maintenance lid located in the luggage
Gear oil compartment.
(2) If the vehicle has been run, leave it for 5 min. or more
in an ordinary temperature (10_C to 30_C) to allow the
accumulator internal pressure to drop.
NOTE
If the ambient temperature is less than 10_C or less,
allow more time to leave the vehicle to stand idle.
(3) Check that the fluid level in the oil reservoir is in the
range between MAX and MIN.
(4) If the fluid level is lower than MIN, add the specified
fluid.
Specified fluid: MITSUBISHI DIA QUEEN ATF-SPII
(5) Reinstall the maintenance lid.
5. BLEEDING
Vinyl hose (1) Lift up the vehicle.
(2) Remove the cap of the left bleeder screw on the torque
transfer differential and connect a vinyl hose.
Bleeder (3) Gradually turn the steering wheel clockwise from the
screws
straight-ahead position. At this time, loosen the left bleeder
screw and check that fluid is discharged with air.
(4) After air has been completely discharged, tighten the
bleeder screw.
Caution
While the system is being bled of air, add fluid as
necessary to ensure that it is left in the oil reservoir
during the entire procedure.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) two to three times until no air
bubbles are recognized in the fluid that comes out. Then,
tighten the bleeder screw to the specified torque.
(6) Perform steps (2) through (5) for the right bleeder screw.
Note, however, that the steering wheel should be turned
counterclockwise.

(7) After the system has been completely bled of air, check
for the fluid level.
Caution
If the system is not completely bled of air, the hydraulic
unit could generate noise, degrading pump durability.
6. DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER OIL SEAL

REPLACEMENT
MB990938
6-1 DIFFERENTIAL
(1) Remove the drive shaft. (Refer to p. 27-36.)
(2) Remove the oil seal from the differential carrier.
(3) Using the special tool, drive a new oil seal all the way
into position.
MB991115 (4) Coat the oil seal lips and the drive shaft surface in contact
with the oil seal with multi-purpose grease.
(5) Replace the drive shaft circlip with a new one and mount
the drive shaft to the differential carrier. (Refer to P.27-36.)
(6) Check for correct wheel alignment. (Refer to GROUP
MD998829 34 – On-vehicle Service.)
(1) Remove the drive shaft. (Refer to p. 27-36.)
(2) Remove the oil seal from the differential carrier.
(3) Using the special tool, drive a new oil seal all the way
into position.
MD998812 (4) Coat the oil seal lips and the drive shaft surface in contact
with the oil seal with the specified grease.
MD998813
Specified grease: Vaseline
(5) Replace the drive shaft circlip with a new one and mount
the drive shaft to the differential carrier. (Refer to P.27-36.)
(6) Check for correct wheel alignment. (Refer to GROUP
34 – On-vehicle Service.)

7. SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE
MEASUREMENT <VEHICLES WITHOUT
ABS>
(1) Lift up the vehicle and release the parking brake.
(2) Disconnect the AYC-ECU harness connector and take
measurements on the harness side connector.
Caution
Insert the probe from the harness side with the double
lock of the connector unlocked. Inserting it to the
terminal side could result in poor contact.
(3) Turn the wheel to be tested at about 1/2 to one
AYC-ECU connector harness side revolution/sec. and check for the output voltage using
a circuit tester (AC mV range) or oscilloscope.
Terminal nos.
Front LH Front RH Rear LH Rear RH
7 6 9 8
20 19 22 21
Output voltage:
When circuit tester is used: 70 mV or more
When oscilloscope is used: 200 mVp-p or more
(4) If the output voltage is lower than the above value, it
is probably attributable to the following faults. Check or
replace the speed sensor as necessary.
D Excessive clearance between the pole piece and rotor
of the speed sensor
D Defective speed sensor
When turned manually Waveform Check Using Oscilloscope

Check the harness and connector of the speed sensor for
connection. Then, use an oscilloscope to check for output
voltage waveform of each speed sensor as follows.
Start the engine and monitor the sensor by turning the wheel;
for a driving wheel, let it turn by shifting into the 1st gear
and for a driven wheel turn it manually at a constant speed.
NOTE
(1) Waveform may be observed by actually running the
vehicle.
(2) The output voltage is low when the wheel speed remains
At idle (5 to 6 km/h) low and builds up as the wheel speed increases.
1st gear

Waveform Observation Points

Symptom Probable cause Action
Waveform amplitude is too small, or no Defective speed sensor Replace sensor.

waveform.
Waveform amplitude varies greatly. (No Excessive axle hub lateral and radial runout Replace hub.
problem if the smallest amplitude is 100
mV or more) Poor AYC-ECU grounding Repair.
Noise on waveform or disturbed Open-circuited sensor Replace sensor.

waveform
Open-circuited harness Repair harness.
Improperly mounted speed sensor Correct sensor installation.
Missing or collapsed rotor tooth Replace rotor.
Caution
Since the speed sensor cable follows the movement of the front or rear suspension, it may be
open-circuited only when the vehicle is run on rough roads and not on ordinary road. The speed
sensor output voltage waveform should therefore be checked also by rocking the sensor harness
so that driving on rough roads may be simulated.
8. ACTION WHEN BATTERY RUNS OUT

AYC fusible link When the engine is started using a booster cable where the
battery has completely run down and you attempt to start
the vehicle without waiting for the battery to recover a certain
charge, the engine can misfire and you just cannot start to
move it. In such cases, charge the battery sufficiently; or,
remove the AYC fusible link from the engine compartment
relay box to make AYC inactive before attempting to start
the vehicle. When the fusible link is removed, the AYC warning
lamp lights up. After the battery has been recharged, fit the
fusible link back again and start the engine to ensure that
the AYC warning lamp is off.

REAR AXLE – Rear Hub Assembly 27-33
REAR HUB ASSEMBLY
7 2
196 – 255
49 – 59 1 {20.0 – 26.0}
{5.0 – 6.0} 118 {12.0}
8
6
74 – 88
{7.5 – 9.0} 4
5
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
AA" 1. Caliper assembly AB" "AA 6. Drive shaft nut
2. Brake disc AC" 7. Rear hub assembly
3. Shoe & lining assembly 8. Backing plate
(Refer to GROUP 36 – Parking
Brake.) Caution
4. Clip Do not disassemble the rear hub assembly.
5. Parking brake cable connection

AA" CALIPER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
Secure the removed caliper assembly with a wire so that
it will not fall.
AB" DRIVE SHAFT NUT REMOVAL
MB990767
AC" REAR HUB ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

MB990767 (1) Using the special tool, remove the drive shaft from the
rear hub assembly.
(2) Remove the mounting bolts and remove the rear hub
assembly from the knuckle.
MB990244 (3)
MB990242 MB991354

27-34 REAR AXLE – Rear Hub Assembly
Washer INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

"AA DRIVE SHAFT NUT INSTALLATION
(1) Install the washer on the drive shaft in the direction shown
on the left.
(2) Using the special tool, tighten the drive shaft nut to the
specified torque.
Caution
196 – 255 Nm Before torquing the drive shaft nut to specification,
{20.0 – 26.0 kfg@m}
MB990767 do not apply vehicle weight to the wheel bearing.
(3) If, at this time, the split pin holes are not aligned, tighten
the nut further (within 255 Nm {26.0 kgf@m}), insert the
split pin in the first matching holes, and bend it securely.
MB991000 INSPECTION
(MB990998)
MB990326 1. REAR WHEEL BEARING ROTATION STARTING
MB991017
TORQUE
(1) Install the special tool to the rear hub assembly and tighten
it to the specified torque.
(2) Using the special tool, measure the wheel bearing rotation
starting torque.
196 – 255 Nm Wood block Limit: 1.0 Nm {10.5 kgf@cm}
{20.0 – 26.0 kfg@m}
(3) The wheel bearing starting torque should be within the
limit and the hub should be free of binding or rough motion
when turned.
Wood block
2. WHEEL BEARING AXIAL PLAY CHECK
(1) Check the wheel bearing for axial play.
Limit: 0.05 mm
(2) If the specified torquing range (196 to 255 Nm {20.0
to 26.0 kgf@m}) does not bring the wheel bearing axial
play into the limit, replace the rear hub assembly.
Wood block MB991017

REAR AXLE – Knuckle 27-35
KNUCKLE
D Rear Hub Assembly and Backing Plate Removal (1) Check Each Ball Joint Dust Cover for Cracks or
(Refer to P.27-33.) Damage by Pushing It with Finger.
(2) Rear Hub Assembly and Backing Plate Installation
(Refer to P.27-33.)
74 – 87 5
{7.5 – 8.9}
25 {2.6}
1
74 – 87
{7.5 – 8.9}
6
4
74 – 87
{7.5 – 8.9}*
88 {9.0}*
3
2
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Rear speed sensor connection Caution
<Vehicles with AYC> *: Indicates parts which should be temporarily
AA" 2. Trailing arm connection tightened, and then fully tightened with the
3. Lower arm connection vehicle on the ground in the unladen condition.
AA" 4. Toe control arm connection
AA" 5. Upper arm connection
6. Knuckle
MB990635, REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

MB991113 or Cord
MB991406
AA" TRAILING ARM / TOE CONTROL ARM / UPPER
ARM DISCONNECTION
Nut Caution
(1) Use the special tool to loosen the nut only; do not
remove it from the ball joint.
Ball joint

27-36 REAR AXLE – Drive Shaft
DRIVE SHAFT
(1) Gear Oil Draining (Refer to P.27-28.) (1) Checking Each Ball Joint Dust Cover for Cracks
(2) Center Exhaust Pipe Removal and Damages by Pressing Dust Cover with Finger
(Refer to GROUP 15.) (2) Center Exhaust Pipe Installation
(3) Gear Oil Filling (Refer to P.27-28.)
(4) Parking Brake Lever Stroke Check and Adjustment
(5) Wheel Alignment Check and Adjustment
25 {2.6} 49 – 59 {5.0 – 6.0}

7 1
11
74 – 87 {7.5 – 8.9}
2
10
6
4
5 74 – 87 88 {9.0}* 9
{7.5 – 8.9}* 8
196 – 255 {20.0 – 26.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Caliper assembly Caution
(Refer to P.27-33.) (1) With the part marked with *, first temporarily
2. Brake disc tighten it, then ground the vehicle and tighten
3. Shoe & lining assembly (Refer to it to specification in unloaded condition.
GROUP 36 – Parking Brake.) (2) When removing the drive shaft from, and
4. Clip reinstalling it to, a vehicle with AYC, use care
5. Parking brake cable connection not to damage the rotor mounted on the BJ outer
AA" "BA 6. Drive shaft nut race.
7. Rear speed sensor coupling
<vehicles with AYC>
8. Trailing arm coupling
9. Lower arm coupling
10. Toe control arm coupling
AB" "AA 11. Drive shaft

REAR AXLE – Drive Shaft 27-37
AA" DRIVE SHAFT NUT REMOVAL
Caution
Do not apply the vehicle weight to the wheel bearing
with the drive shaft nut loosened.
MB990767
AB" DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL

MB990767 (1) Using the special tool, drive the drive shaft out of the
hub.
MB990244 (3)
MB990242 MB991354
(2) Apply a lever to the protrusion of the drive shaft and

remove the drive shaft from the differential carrier.
Caution
(1) Be sure to remove the drive shaft from the
differential side using a lever. Removing it from
the BJ side could damage the parts.
(2) Do not apply the vehicle weight to the wheel

MB991000
(MB990998) bearing with the drive shaft removed. If it is
unavoidable to apply the weight for reasons of
moving the vehicle, use the special tool to
temporarily secure it in position.
MB991017
(3) To prevent entry of foreign matter into the

differential carrier, use the special tool as a cover.
<Except vehicles with AYC (RH)>
MB991460

27-38 REAR AXLE – Drive Shaft

"AA DRIVE SHAFT INSTALLATION
Caution
Use care not to allow the drive shaft splines to damage
the oil seal of the differential carrier.
Washer "BA DRIVE SHAFT NUT INSTALLATION

(1) Install the washer on the drive shaft in the direction shown
on the left.
(2) Using the special tool, tighten the drive shaft nut to the
specified torque.
Caution
Before torquing the drive shaft nut to specification,
196 – 255 Nm do not apply vehicle weight to the wheel bearing.
{20.0 – 26.0 kfg@m} (3) If, at this time, the split pin holes are not aligned, tighten
MB990767
the nut further (within 255 Nm {26.0 kgf@m}), insert the
split pin in the first matching holes, and bend it securely.

REAR AXLE – Differential Carrier <EVOLUTION-IV, EVOLUTION-V GSR> 27-39
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
<EVOLUTION-IV, EVOLUTION-V GSR>
<Vehicles with AYC>
(1) Hydraulic Piping Fluid Draining (1) Drive Shaft Installation (Refer to P.27-36.)
(2) Gear Oil Draining (Refer to P.27-28.) (2) Rear Stabilizer Installation (Refer to GROUP 34.)
(3) Lower Arm Assembly Removal (3) Lower Arm Assembly Installation
(Refer to GROUP 34.) (Refer to GROUP 35.)
(4) Rear Stabilizer Removal (Refer to GROUP 34.) (4) Gear Oil Filling (Refer to P.27-28.)
(5) Drive Shaft Removal (Refer to P.27-36.) (5) Hydraulic Piping Fluid Filling and Bleeding
(Refer to P.27-29.)
12 {1.2}
6 5
88 {9.0}
1
7
3
34 {3.5}
108 – 127 {11.0 – 13.0} 3
8
88 {9.0}
9
2
10
11 44 {4.5}
88 {9.0}
9
4
29 – 34
{3.0 – 3.5}
88 {9.0}
88 {9.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Hydraulic unit hose assembly con- 5. Differential support member
nection 6. Upper stopper
"BA 2. Propeller shaft connection 7. Lower stopper
3. Differential support member mount- 8. Differential support arm
ing bolt 9. Differential mount bracket
AA" "AA 4. Rear crossmember and differential 10. Differential mount bracket
carrier assembly 11. Differential carrier

27-40 REAR AXLE – Differential Carrier <EVOLUTION-IV, EVOLUTION-V GSR>

AA" REAR CROSSMEMBER AND DIFFERENTIAL
CARRIER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
(1) Using a jack, support the differential carrier from its
underside.
(2) Remove the rear crossmember mounting bolts and
remove the differential carrier, where it is attached to
the rear crossmember, from the vehicle.

3 3 "AA REAR CROSSMEMBER AND DIFFERENTIAL
CARRIER ASSEMBLY
Front of vehicle
Tighten the rear crossmember mounting bolts in the numerical
order shown.
NOTE
To ensure both good installation accuracy and ease of
1 4 4 2 installation, the rear crossmember mounting holes have
5 5 different diameters between front and rear. This is the reason
for specifying the tightening sequence of the mounting bolts.
"BA PROPELLER SHAFT CONNECTION
Bolt size (thread dia. × length mm)
1 to 3: Flange bolt (with washer) 12 × 70 Align the alignment mark on the differential carrier with that
4: Flange bolt (with washer) 12 × 152 of the propeller shaft at installation.
5: Bolt (with spring washer + washer) 12 × 105
Caution
Oil or grease on the threads of the mounting bolt or nut
can allow the bolt or nut to come loose. Be sure to
degrease the threads before installation.

REAR AXLE – Differential Carrier <EVOLUTION-V RS> 27-41
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER <EVOLUTION-V RS>
(1) Differential Gear Oil Draining (1) Drive Shaft Installation
(2) Lower Arm Assembly Removal (2) Rear Stabilizer Installation
(3) Rear Stabilizer Removal (3) Lower Arm Assembly Installation
(4) Drive Shaft Removal (4) Differential Gear Oil Filling
69 {7.0}
2
5 2
88 {9.0}
108 – 127
{11.0 – 13.0}
69 {7.0} 8
3
3
3
88 {9.0} 10 3
6
9
1
6 108 – 127
{11.0 – 13.0}
9
88 {9.0} 4
7
7
108 – 127 29 – 34 108 – 127

{11.0 – 13.0} {3.0 – 3.5} {11.0 – 13.0}
88 {9.0} 88 {9.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
AA" "BA 1. Propeller shaft connection 5. Differential support member
2. Toe control bar 6. Upper stopper
3. Differential support member mount- 7. Lower stopper
ing bolt and nut 8. Differential support arm
AB" "AA 4. Rear crossmember and differential 9. Differential mount bracket
carrier assembly 10. Differential carrier

27-42 REAR AXLE – Differential Carrier <EVOLUTION-V RS>

AA" PROPELLER SHAFT DISCONNECTION
Make an alignment mark on the companion flange and flange
yoke, then disconnect the propeller shaft from the companion
flange.
Caution
Suspend the propeller shaft from the body with a wire
to prevent the bend at the joint from catching and
damaging the joint boot.
AB" REAR CROSSMEMBER AND DIFFERENTIAL
CARRIER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
(1) Using a jack, support the differential carrier from its
underside.
(2) Remove the rear crossmember mounting bolts and
remove the differential carrier, where it is attached to
the rear crossmember, from the vehicle.

3 3 "AA REAR CROSSMEMBER AND DIFFERENTIAL
CARRIER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
Tighten the rear crossmember mounting bolts in the numerical
order shown.
NOTE
1 4 4 2 installation, the rear crossmember mounting holes have
5 5 different diameters between front and rear. This is the reason
for specifying the tightening sequence of the mounting bolts.
1 to 3: Flange bolt (with washer) 12 × 105 Align the alignment mark on the companion flange with that
4: Flange bolt (with washer) 12 × 152 of the flange yoke at installation.
5: Bolt (with spring washer + washer) 12 × 70
Caution

REAR AXLE – Torque Transfer Differential <Vehicles with AYC> 27-43
TORQUE TRANSFER DIFFERENTIAL <VEHICLES WITH AYC>
49 {5.0}
5
3 9 {0.9}
14 4
13 6
11
10
9
8
3 12
2
186 {19.0} 1 7
4
49 {5.0}
49 {5.0} 9 {0.9}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Disassembly steps
1. Drain plug 11. Oil seal
2. Packing "BA 12. Oil seal
3. Filler plug "AA 13. Oil seal
4. Gasket 14. Differential carrier assembly
5. Vent plug
6. Bleeder screw Caution
7. Cover (1) The differential carrier assembly is non-main-
AA" 8. Self-locking nut tainable.
9. Washer (2) No foreign matter should be allowed inside and
10. Companion flange at the joints of the differential carrier assembly.

27-44 REAR AXLE – Torque Transfer Differential <Vehicles with AYC>
GREASE AND SEALANT APPLICATION POINTS
Grease: Vaseline THREEBOND 1281B
φ3.0 mm
THREEBOND 1281B

REAR AXLE – Torque Transfer Differential <Vehicles with AYC> 27-45
AA" SELF-LOCKING NUT REMOVAL
MB990850
ASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

MD998829
(1) Using the special tool, pressfit the oil seal as far as it
will go.
(2) Apply the specified grease to the oil seal lip.
Specified grease: Vaseline
MD998812
MD998813

MB990938
(1) Using the special tool, pressfit the oil seal as far as it
will go.
(2) Apply the multi-purpose grease to the oil seal lip.
MB991115

27-46 REAR AXLE – LSD Case Assembly <Vehicles without AYC>
LSD CASE ASSEMBLY <VEHICLES WITHOUT AYC>

10
11
11
1 20
19 Differential gear set
1817
16 15
14 13
10
11 12
10
9
8
7 6
5
4 3
2
Disassembly steps
"CA D LSD differential torque check 11. Pinion gear
AA" "BA 1. Screw 12. Pinion shaft
2. Differential case A 13. Pressure ring
3. Spring plate 14. Friction plate
4. Friction plate 15. Friction disc
5. Friction disc 16. Friction plate
6. Friction plate 17. Friction disc
7. Friction disc 18. Friction plate
8. Friction plate 19. Spring plate
9. Pressure ring "AA 20. Differential case B
10. Side gear

AA" SCREW REMOVAL
(1) Check out the alignment marks.
(2) Loosen a uniform amount little by little the screws securing
differential case A to B.
(3) Separate differential case B from differential case A and
remove their components.
Keep the removed spring plates, friction plates, and friction
discs organized in the order of removal and for right and
left use.

REAR AXLE – LSD Case Assembly <Vehicles without AYC> 27-47
ASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS
"AA INSTALLATION TO DIFFERENTIAL CASE B
Before starting the assembly procedure, perform the following
steps to adjust dimensional differences (clutch plate friction
force) in the axial direction of the components inside the
differential case and axial clearance of the differential side
gear.
(1) Place friction discs (two each) and friction plates (three
each) one on top of another as illustrated and, using
a micrometer, measure the thickness of each of the right
and left assemblies. Select different discs and plates so
that the difference between the right and left assemblies
falls within the specified range.
NOTE
If a new part is used, note that the friction disc comes
in two thicknesses: 1.6 mm and 1.7 mm.
(2) Measure the thickness of each of the right and left spring
Groove plates.
(3) Assemble the pressure ring internal parts (pinion shaft
and pressure ring), friction plates, and friction discs and,
using a micrometer, measure the overall width.
NOTE
When taking measurements, press the assembly from
both sides so that the pinion shaft makes a positive contact
with the groove in the pressure ring.
(4) Find value (A) which is the thickness measured in step
(3) added to the thickness of two spring plates.
Differential Differential case B (5) Find dimension (B) between the spring plate faying
case A surfaces when differential case A and B are assembled
together.
B = C + D – E
(6) If the clearance between the spring plate and differential
case (B – A) is outside the specified range, change the
friction discs and make adjustments.
Spring plate (7) Coat each part with the specified gear oil and mount
Friction disc it in the specified direction and order into differential case
B.
Gear oil: DIA QUEEN LSD GEAR OIL
NOTE
Apply a careful coat of gear oil to the contacting and
sliding surfaces.
Friction plate

27-48 REAR AXLE – LSD Case Assembly <Vehicles without AYC>
"BA SCREW TIGHTENING

(1) Align the alignment mark on differential case A with that
on differential case B.
(2) Tighten the screws connecting differential case A and
B a uniform amount little by little in the diagonal order.
NOTE
If tightening the screws does not bring the two cases
properly together, spring plates are not probably
assembled properly. Reassemble from the start.
"CA LSD DIFFERENTIAL TORQUE CHECK

MB990990 (1) Using the special tool, check for differential torque.
Standard value:
MB990989 When new clutch plate is When existing clutch plate is

installed Nm {kgf@m} reused Nm {kgf@m}
5 – 19 {0.5 – 1.9} 2 – 19 {0.2 – 1.9}
NOTE
Before measuring the differential torque, first turn the
gears so they snug each other, then take measurements
during rotation.
(2) If the measurement falls outside the specified range,
disassemble the differential case assembly and repair
or replace defective parts.
Friction disc
INSPECTION
1. DIFFERENTIAL CASE INTERNAL PARTS
CONTACT/SLIDING SURFACE CHECK
(1) Clean the disassembled parts with cleaning oil and dry
them with compressed air.
(2) Check each plate, disc, and pressure ring for the following:
A. Friction and sliding surfaces of friction discs, friction
Friction plate Spring plate plates, and spring plates.
Replace a defective part with heat discoloration and
excessive wear with a new one, as it degrades locking
performance.
NOTE
If the inner periphery of the friction face shows traces
of harsh contact, it is because of the spring tension
Pressure ring of each plate, disc and other part. Do not confuse
this with abnormal wear.
B. Inner periphery and outer periphery protrusions of
friction discs, friction plates, and spring plates.
Replace a cracked or damaged part with a new one.
C. Friction and sliding surfaces between pressure rings
and friction discs.

REAR AXLE – LSD Case Assembly <Vehicles without AYC> 27-49
Grind a dented or scratched part with oil stone and
then lap and correct with a compound on a surface
plate.
NOTE
If the inner periphery of the friction face shows traces
of harsh contact, it is because of the spring tension
of each plate, disc and other part. Do not confuse
this with abnormal wear.
(3) Check the following parts for contact and sliding surfaces
(D to M) and correct burrs and dents with oil stone.
D: Sliding surfaces of side gear and case
E: Contacting surfaces of differential case and spring
plate
F: Contacting surfaces of pressure ring and differential
case inner face
G: Sliding surfaces of pressure ring hole and side gear
H: Protrusions on outer periphery of pressure ring
I: Pressure ring inner surface and differential pinion
gear spherical surface
J: Pressure ring V-groove and pinion shaft V
K: Sliding surfaces of pinion shaft and differential pinion
gear hole
L: Side gear grooves on outer periphery
M: Slits in inner periphery of differential
2. FRICTION PLATE AND FRICTION DISC

DISTORTION CHECK
Apply a dial indicator to the friction plate or disc on a surface
plate and, turning the friction plate or disc, measure the
distortion (flatness).
Limit: 0.08 mm (total runout)
3. FRICTION PLATE, FRICTION DISC, AND SPRING

PLATE WEAR CHECK
(1) For the purpose of determining wear, measure thickness
(A, B) of the friction surface and protrusion at several
places and find the difference between the two.
Limit: 0.1 mm
(2) If the wear exceeds the limit, replace the part with a
new one.

27-50 REAR AXLE – Hydraulic Unit <Vehicles with AYC>
HYDRAULIC UNIT <VEHICLES WITH AYC>

(1) Trunk Side Trim Removal (1) Hydraulic Piping Fluid Filling and Bleeding
(2) Hydraulic Piping Fluid Draining (Refer to P.27-29.)
(2) Trunk Side Trim Installation
14
12 {1.2}
9
12
8
6 5
13 7
4
18 {1.8}
11 4
12 {1.2}
18 {1.8}
3
2 10 34 {3.5}
12 {1.2}
12 {1.2}
34 {3.5}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Dust guard 9. Hydraulic unit bracket
2. Suction hose and return hose con- 10. Hydraulic unit hose assembly
nection "BA 11. Return hose
3. Hydraulic unit hose assembly con- "BA 12. Suction hose
nection "AA 13. Grommet
4. Hydraulic unit and bracket assem- 14. Oil reservoir
bly mounting bolt
"CA 5. Hydraulic unit and bracket assem- Caution
bly (1) When connecting the return hose and suction
6. Hydraulic unit hose, do not apply lubricant.
7. Hydraulic unit bracket (2) No foreign matter should be allowed in the
8. AYC harness hydraulic piping and joints.

REAR AXLE – Hydraulic Unit <Vehicles with AYC> 27-51
Grommet "AA GROMMET INSTALLATION
On the vehicle mounted with a sun roof, mount the drain
pipe to the grommet as illustrated.
Drain pipe
25 ± 5 mm
"BA SUCTION HOSE / RETURN HOSE INSTALLATION

Fit the suction hose and return hose to the nipple of hydraulic
unit as illustrated.
15 mm
Nipple
Suction hose and

return hose
"CA HYDRAULIC UNIT AND BRACKET ASSEMBLY

INSTALLATION
Hook Hook the hydraulic unit bracket hook to the rear floor side
member and install the hydraulic unit and bracket assembly
mounting bolt.
Rear floor side member

27-52 REAR AXLE – Sensor Relay <Vehicles with AYC>
SENSOR RELAY <VEHICLES WITH AYC>

3
1
Steer sensor removal steps Acceleration sensor and AYC relay

D Steering wheel and column cover removal
(Refer to GROUP 37 – Steering Wheel 2. Longitudinal acceleration sensor
and Shaft.) 3. Lateral acceleration sensor
AA" 1. Steer sensor 4. AYC relay
NOTE
For the wheel speed sensor, refer to GROUP 35B.

Slit plate
AA" STEER SENSOR REMOVAL
Remove the steer sensor from the column switch.
Caution
(1) A photocoupler is used as the steer sensor. Use care
not to allow dust or grease to be on the sensor.
Steer sensor
(2) Do not bend or dirty with grease the slit plate on
the column switch side.

REAR AXLE – Sensor Relay <Vehicles with AYC> / AYC-ECU 27-53
INSPECTION
1. LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR CHECK
Refer to GROUP 35B – Acceleration Sensor.
2. AYC RELAY CONTINUITY CHECK
Battery voltage Terminal No.

1 3 4 5
When not energized
When energized
AYC-ECU
D Front Floor Console Removal and Installation
5 {0.5}
AYC-ECU
5 {0.5}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}

32-1
POWER PLANT
MOUNT
CONTENTS
ROLL STOPPER AND CENTERMEMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

32-2 POWER PLANT MOUNT – Roll Stopper and Centermember
ROLL STOPPER AND CENTERMEMBER

Caution
When tightening the portion marked with *, first
temporarily tighten it, then torque to specification
with the engine weight applied to the body.
34 {3.5}
34 {3.5}
3 4
2
52 {5.3}*
1
2
2 5 93 {9.5}
93 {9.5}
69 {7.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Front crossmember bar <vehicles NOTE
with 17’ wheels> The conventional service procedures apply for the
2. Bolt installation service points.
"BA 3. Front roll stopper bracket assembly
"AA 4. Rear roll stopper bracket assembly
5. Centermember

33A-1
FRONT
SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 STRUT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 LOWER ARM <EVOLUTION-IV> . . . . . . . . . . 5
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 LOWER ARM <EVOLUTION-V> . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Wheel Alignment Check and Adjustment
<EVOLUTION-V> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

33A-2 FRONT SUSPENSION – Service Specifications / Special Tools
<EVOLUTION-IV>
Toe-in mm –3 X 3
Camber –1_00’ ± 30’

(difference between right and left wheel: less than 30’)
Caster 3_50’ ± 30’

Kingpin inclination 13_25’
Lower arm ball joint rotation starting torque Nm {kgf@cm} 2.0 – 8.8 {20 – 90}
<EVOLUTION-V>
Same as EVOLUTION-IV except for following.
Camber (selectable from 2 options) –1_00’ ± 30’ or –2_00’ ± 30’

Caster 3_54’ ± 30’

Kingpin inclination 14_18’
SPECIAL TOOLS
A
A: MB991237 A: Spring Coil spring compression
B: MB991238 compressor
body
B: Arm set
B
MB991006 Preload socket Lower arm ball joint rotation starting torque
measurement

FRONT SUSPENSION – On-vehicle Service 33A-3
<Camber: –1_00’> <Camber: –2_00’> ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Bolt coupling strut
assembly to WHEEL ALIGNMENT CHECK AND
knuckle ADJUSTMENT <EVOLUTION-V>
Use the conventional procedures to measure wheel alignment.
1. CAMBER
Standard value:
–1_00’ ± 30’ (difference between right and left
wheel: less than 30’) or
–2_00’ ± 30’ (difference between right and left
wheel: less than 30’)
Select the camber angle as follows.
If the arrow on the bolt that couples the strut assembly
to knuckle faces inboard → –1_00’ ± 30’.
If the arrow on the bolt that couples the strut assembly
to knuckle faces outboard → –2_00’ ± 30’.
2. CASTER
Standard value: 3_54’ ± 30’ (difference between right
and left wheel: less than 30’)
NOTE
The suspension system is designed so as to retain the
preset caster value, requiring no adjustment for caster.

33A-4 FRONT SUSPENSION – Strut Assembly
STRUT ASSEMBLY
D Front Wheel Alignment Adjustment
(Refer to P.33A-3.)
3
44 {4.5}
1 2
6
108 – 127
{11.0 – 13.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Brake hose clamp 4. Strut tower bar
2. Front speed sensor bracket 5. Plain washer
<Vehicles with ABS> AA" 6. Bolts
3. Flange nut 7. Strut assembly

AA" BOLTS REMOVAL
(1) Suspend the lower arm from the vehicle with wire.
(2) Remove the strut and knuckle connection.

FRONT SUSPENSION – Lower Arm <EVOLUTION-IV> 33A-5
LOWER ARM <EVOLUTION-IV>
(1) Push the Dust Cover of the Lower Arm and Stabilizer
Link Ball Joint with a Finger to Check for Possible
Cracks or Damage.
113 {11.5}
6
Molybdenum disulfide-base chassis
grease:
2 SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU SUNLITE
MB2, NISSEKI CLAKNOCK FL, or
equivalent
39 {4.0}
3 5
4
106 {10.8}* 137 {14.0}
6 88 {9.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Stabilizer link mounting nut Caution
AA" 2. Lower arm to knuckle coupling bolt The part marked with * should be first temporarily
3. Bolt tightened, then torqued to specification with the
4. Stabilizer bracket vehicle on the ground in unloaded condition.
"AA 5. Bushing assembly
6. Lower arm assembly NOTE
Follow the conventional procedures for removal service
points.

33A-6 FRONT SUSPENSION – Lower Arm <EVOLUTION-IV>

Bushing assembly
"AA BUSHING ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
Install the bushing assembly to the lower arm assembly with
a relative angle as shown and tighten the self-locking nut
to the specified torque.
Lower arm assembly
INSPECTION
BALL JOINT ROTATION STARTING TORQUE
MB991006
Use the conventional procedures except the special tool used
and the standard value as given below.
Standard value: 2.0 – 8.8 Nm {20 – 90 kgf@cm}
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT DUST COVER

REPLACEMENT
Replace the dust cover by using the conventional procedure
only if it has been inadvertently damaged during servicing.
After the dust cover has been replaced with a new one, push
it with a finger to check for possible cracks or damage.

FRONT SUSPENSION – Lower Arm <EVOLUTION-V> 33A-7
LOWER ARM <EVOLUTION-V>
Caution Post-installation Operation
To prevent bushing from being galled, the part (1) Push the Dust Cover of the Lower Arm and Stabilizer
marked with * should be first temporarily tightened, Link Ball Joint with a Finger to Check for Possible
then torqued to specification with the vehicle on Cracks or Damage.
the ground in unloaded condition. (2) Wheel Alignment Check and Adjustment
(Refer to P.33A-3.)
108 {11.0} Molybdenum disulfide-base chassis

grease:
SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU SUNLITE
2 MB2, NISSEKI CLAKNOCK FL, or
equivalent
39 {4.0}
1
5
3
106 {10.8}* 4
137 {14.0}
88 {9.0}
6
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Stabilizer link mounting nut NOTE
AA" "BA 2. Lower arm to knuckle coupling bolt Follow the conventional procedures for removal service
3. Bolt points.
4. Stabilizer bracket
"AA 5. Bushing assembly
6. Lower arm assembly

33A-8 FRONT SUSPENSION – Lower Arm <EVOLUTION-V>
Knuckle
"AA BUSHING ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
Follow the conventional procedure.
Lower arm
assembly
"BA LOWER ARM TO KNUCKLE COUPLING BOLT

INSTALLATION
(1) Install the lower arm assembly to the knuckle.
Caution
To prevent the dust cover lip from being recessed
and grease from flowing out, ensure that protrusion
A of the ball joint stud from knuckle measures 4 mm
or less during installation of the lower arm assembly.
(2) Should the knuckle be pushed in excessively and grease
flow out from the dust cover, replace the dust cover with
a new one.
(3) Check that there is no clearance between the knuckle
and dust cover.
INSPECTION
BALL JOINT ROTATION STARTING TORQUE
Use the conventional procedures.
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT DUST COVER
REPLACEMENT
if it has been inadvertently damaged or grease flown out
during servicing.

FRONT SUSPENSION – Stabilizer Bar 33A-9
STABILIZER BAR
D Crossmember Removal (1) Crossmember Installation
(2) Check the Stabilizer Link Ball Joint Dust Cover for
Cracks or Damage by Pushing it with Finger.
22 {2.2}
4
39 {4.0}
5
1
SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU

VARIANT R-2 or equivalent
39 {4.0}
2
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Stabilizer link
2. Stabilizer bar bracket
"AA 3. Fixture
"AA 4. Bushing
5. Stabilizer bar

Approx. 10 mm
"AA FIXTURE / BUSHING INSTALLATION
Install the stabilizer bar so that the identification mark is
positioned at left. Fit the bushing so that the mark may protrude
about 10 mm from the inner end of the bushing, then secure
it with the fixture.

33A-10 FRONT SUSPENSION – Stabilizer Bar
INSPECTION
STABILIZER LINK BALL JOINT ROTATION STARTING
TORQUE
Follow the conventional procedures.
STABILIZER LINK DUST COVER

REPLACEMENT
only if it has been inadvertently damaged during servicing.

34-1
REAR
SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 UPPER ARM ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
LUBRICANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 TRAILING ARM ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 LOWER ARM AND TOE CONTROL

ARM ASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1. Rear Wheel Alignment Check and SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . 13
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2. Ball Joint Dust Cover Check . . . . . . . . . . . 3
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 4

34-2 REAR SUSPENSION – Service Specifications / Lubricant / Special Tools
Toe-in mm 3±2
Camber –1_00 ± 30’
Rear thrust angle 0_00 ± 9’
Upper arm ball joint turning torque Nm {kgf@cm} 0.5 – 2.5 {5 – 25}
Trailing arm ball joint turning torque Nm {kgf@cm} 0.5 – 2.5 {5 – 25}
Toe control arm ball joint turning torque Nm {kgf@cm} 0.5 – 2.5 {5 – 25}
Toe control arm slide bushing operating torque Nm {kgf@cm} 0.2 – 1.5 {2 – 15}
Stabilizer link ball joint turning torque Nm {kgf@cm} 1.7 – 3.1 {17 – 32}
LUBRICANT
Items Specified lubricant Quantity
Inside and lips of upper arm ball joint dust cover Molybdenum disulfide-base chassis grease: As required
SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU SUNLITE MB2, MB2
Inside and lips of trailing arm ball joint dust cover NISSEKI CLAKNOCK FL, or equivalent
Inside and lips of control arm ball joint dust cover
Inside and lips of stabilizer link ball joint dust cover SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU VARIANT R-2 or
equivalent
SPECIAL TOOLS
MB991004 Wheel alignment Measurement of wheel alignment <vehicles
gauge attachment with aluminum wheels>
MB990326 Preload socket Measurement of ball joint turning torque
MB990635, Steering linkage Disconnection of ball joint from knuckle

MB991113, or puller
MB991406
MB990800 Ball joint remover & Pressfitting of ball joint dust cover
installer

REAR SUSPENSION – On-vehicle Service 34-3
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
1. REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT CHECK AND
ADJUSTMENT
(1) The rear suspension and wheels should be serviced to
the normal condition prior to measurement of wheel
alignment.
(2) Measure the wheel alignment with the vehicle parked
on level ground.
1-1 CAMBER
Compensator
Standard value: –1_00’ ± 30’
(The difference between the left and right wheels
should be 30’ or less.)
NOTE
For vehicles equipped with aluminium wheels, measure the
camber using a compensator. If no compensator is available,
measure the camber after tightening the special tool
(MB991004) to the specified torque 196 – 255 Nm {20.0
– 26.0 kgf@m}.
Caution
Never subject the wheel bearings to the full vehicle load
when the flange nuts/drive shaft nuts are loosened.
Camber adjusting bolt
If outside the standard value, adjust by the following
procedure.
(1) Adjust by turning the camber adjusting bolt (mounting
bolt for the lower arm and rear crossmember).
Left wheel: clockwise + camber
Right wheel: clockwise – camber
Lower arm
The scale has gradations of approximately 14’.
(2) After adjusting the camber, be sure to adjust the toe-in.
1-2 TOE-IN
Standard value:
At the centre of tyre tread 3 ± 2 mm
If outside the standard value, adjust by the following
procedure.
(1) Be sure to adjust the camber before adjusting the toe-in.
Toe-in adjusting bolt
(2) Adjust by turning the toe adjusting bolt (inner mounting
bolt toe control arm).
Control link
LH: Turning clockwise → toe-in direction
RH: Turning clockwise → toe-out direction
The scale has gradations of approximately 3.3 mm (single
side toe angle equivalent to 19’).
2. BALL JOINT DUST COVER CHECK
(1) Check the dust cover for cracks or damage by pushing
it with finger.
(2) If the dust cover is cracked or damaged, replace the
appropriate suspension arm assembly or stabilizer link.
NOTE
Cracks or damage of the dust cover may cause damage
of the ball joint.

34-4 REAR SUSPENSION – Rear Suspension Assembly
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY

(1) Center Exhaust Pipe Removal (1) AYC Fluid Refilling and Bleeding
(Refer to GROUP 15.) (Refer to GROUP 27 – On-vehicle Service.)
(2) Trunk Room Side Trim Removal <GSR> (2) Center Exhaust Pipe Installation
(3) AYC Fluid Draining (Refer to GROUP 15.)
(Refer to GROUP 27 – On-vehicle Service.) (3) AYC Operation Check
(4) Parking Brake Cable Stroke Check
(Refer to P.34-3.)
EVOLUTION-V RS
4 5
1
2
69 25 {2.5} 44 {4.5}
Toe control bar
{7.0} 34 {3.5}
59 – 68 {6.0 – 7.0}*
29 – 34
{3.0 – 3.5}
17 12
10
6
11
54 {5.5}
8
14
13
137 – 156 {14.0 – 16.0}*
15 15
88 {9.0}
3
9 88 {9.0}
16
15
93 {9.5}*
25 {2.6}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m} 108 – 127 {11.0 – 13.0}
7
Removal steps
1. Fuel filler cap AB" "BA 11. Propeller shaft connection
2. Bolt 12. Upper arm mounting bolt
3. Filler neck protector 13. Trailing arm mounting bolt
4. Cap 14. Toe control arm mounting bolt
5. Shock absorber mounting nut AC" "AA 15. Crossmember mounting bolt
AA" 6. Brake caliper assembly 16. Differential support assembly
7. Rear speed sensor <vehicles with mounting bolt
AYC> 17. Rear suspension assembly
8. Brake disc
9. Parking brake cable end (Refer to Caution
GROUP 36.) The parts marked with * should be first temporarily
10. AYC fluid line connection <vehicles tightened, then torqued to specification with the
with AYC> vehicle on the ground in unloaded condition.

REAR SUSPENSION – Rear Suspension Assembly 34-5
AA" BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
Remove the brake caliper assembly and secure it with a
wire.
AB" PROPELLER SHAFT DISCONNECTION
(1) Make an alignment mark on the differential carrier
companion flange and propeller shaft flange yoke.
(2) Remove the mounting bolts and nuts of the differential
carrier and propeller shaft.
AC" CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING BOLT REMOVAL
Support the differential case with a garage jack or transmission
jack and then remove the crossmember mounting bolt.

3 3 "AA CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING BOLT
Front of vehicle INSTALLATION
Tighten the mounting bolts in the numerical order shown.
NOTE
1 4 2 installation, the crossmember mounting holes have different
4 diameters between front and rear. This is the reason for
5 5 specifying the tightening sequence of the mounting bolts.
Align the alignment mark on the differential carrier with that
1 to 3: Flange bolt (with washer) 12 × 70 of the propeller shaft at installation.
4: Flange bolt (with washer) 12 × 152
5: Bolt (with spring washer + washer) 12 × 105 Caution

34-6 REAR SUSPENSION – Upper Arm Assembly
UPPER ARM ASSEMBLY

(1) Push the Dust Cover of the Upper Arm Ball Joint
with a Finger to Check for Possible Cracks or
Damage.
(Refer to P.34-3.)
59 – 69 {6.0 – 7.0}*
5
6
2 1
39 {4.0}
7
49 {5.0}
74 – 87 {7.5 – 8.9}
3
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Fuel filler capK NOTE
2. BoltK Parts marked with K apply only when RH side is removed
3. Filler neck protectorK and installed.
AA" 4. Upper arm assembly to knuckle
coupling Caution
5. Upper arm assembly mounting bolt The part marked with * should be first temporarily
6. Stopper tightened, then torqued to specification with the
7. Upper arm assembly vehicle on the ground in unloaded condition.

MB991113 or
MB991406
AA" UPPER ARM ASSEMBLY DISCONNECTION
FROM KNUCKLE
Ball joint Caution
String (1) Only loosen the nut, and not remove it from the ball
joint, and use the special tool.
(2) Hang the special tool with a string to prevent the
parts including the tool from falling apart.
Nut

REAR SUSPENSION – Upper Arm Assembly 34-7
INSPECTION
1. UPPER ARM BALL JOINT TURNING TORQUE
MB990326
CHECK
(1) Rock the upper arm ball joint stud several times; then,
mount a nut to the stud and, using the special tool,
measure the turning torque of the upper arm ball joint.
(2) If the measurement exceeds the standard value, replace
the upper arm assembly.
(3) If the measurement falls short of the standard value, check
that the ball joint turns smoothly without excessive play.
If so, the ball joint should still be in good condition for
continued use.
2. UPPER ARM BALL JOINT DUST COVER CHECK

it with a finger.
upper arm assembly.
NOTE
A cracked or damaged dust cover can lead to a damaged
ball joint.
If the dust cover is damaged during servicing, replace
it with a new one.
UPPER ARM BALL JOINT DUST COVER

REPLACEMENT
MB990800
Only when the dust cover is damaged accidentally during
service work, follow these steps to replace it with a new one.
(1) Remove the dust cover.
(2) Pack and apply the specified grease to the inside and
lips of the dust cover.
Molybdenum disulfide-base chassis grease:
SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU SUNLITE MB2, NISSEKI
CLAKNOCK FL, or equivalent
(3) Using the special tool, press the dust cover until it contacts
the snap ring.
(4) Push the dust cover with a finger to ensure that it is
free from cracks or damage.

34-8 REAR SUSPENSION – Trailing Arm Assembly
TRAILING ARM ASSEMBLY

(1) Push the Dust Cover of the Trailing Arm Ball Joint
with a Finger to Check for Possible Cracks or
Damage.
(Refer to P.34-3.)
74 – 87 {7.5 – 8.9}
137 – 156 {14.0 – 16.0}* 1
4
2
5
4
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Parking brake cable bolt Caution
AA" 2. Trailing arm assembly to knuckle The part marked with * should be first temporarily
coupling tightened, then torqued to specification with the
3. Trailing arm assembly mounting vehicle on the ground in unloaded condition.
bolt
4. Stopper
5. Trailing arm assembly

MB991113 or String
MB991406
AA" TRAILING ARM ASSEMBLY DISCONNECTION
FROM KNUCKLE
Nut Caution
(1) Only loosen the nut, and not remove it from the ball
joint, and use the special tool.
(2) Hang the special tool with a string to prevent the
parts including the tool from falling apart.
Ball joint

REAR SUSPENSION – Trailing Arm Assembly 34-9
INSPECTION
1. TRAILING ARM BALL JOINT TURNING TORQUE
MB990326
CHECK
(1) Rock the trailing arm ball joint stud several times; then,
mount a nut to the stud and, using the special tool,
measure the turning torque of the ball joint.

the trailing arm assembly.
that the ball joint turns smoothly without excessive play.
If so, the ball joint should still be in good condition for
continued use.
2. TRAILING ARM BALL JOINT DUST COVER CHECK

it with a finger.
trailing arm assembly.
NOTE
ball joint.
it with a new one.
TRAILING ARM BALL JOINT DUST COVER

REPLACEMENT
MB990800
the snap ring.

34-10 REAR SUSPENSION – Lower Arm and Toe Control Arm Assemblies
LOWER ARM AND TOE CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLIES

(1) Check the Toe Control Arm Ball Joint Dust Cover (2) Wheel Alignment Check and Adjustment
for Cracks or Damage by Pushing it with Finger (Refer to P.34-3.)
93 {9.5}*
5
6
74 – 87 {7.5 – 8.9}*
2 93 {9.5}*
2
3
88 {9.0}*
88 {9.0}*
1
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Lower arm assembly removal steps Toe control arm assembly removal
1. Lower arm assembly and shock steps
absorber connecting bolt AB" 4. Toe control arm and knuckle
AA" 2. Lower arm assembly mounting bolt connection
"AA 3. Lower arm assembly AC" 5. Toe control arm assembly mounting
bolt
6. Toe control arm assembly
Caution
The part marked with * should be first temporarily
tightened, then torqued to specification with the
vehicle on the ground in unloaded condition.

Mating marks
AA" LOWER ARM ASSEMBLY MOUNTING BOLT
REMOVAL
Place mating marks on the lower arm and the eccentric cam
bolt before removal.

REAR SUSPENSION – Lower Arm and Toe Control Arm Assemblies 34-11
MB990635, AB" TOE CONTROL ARM AND KNUCKLE
MB991113 or DISCONNECTION
MB991406
Caution
(1) Use the special tool to loosen the nut only; do not
Ball joint removal it from the ball joint.
String
Nut
Mating marks AC" TOE CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY MOUNTING

BOLT REMOVAL
Place mating marks on the toe control arm and the eccentric
cam bolt before removal.
Eccentric
cam bolt

L: LH side
"AA LOWER ARM ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
R: RH side Install the lower arm assemblies according to the identification
mark stamped in the illustrated position.
INSPECTION
1. TOE CONTROL ARM BALL JOINT TURNING
MB990326
TORQUE CHECK
(1) After shaking the ball joint stud several times, install the
nut to the stud and use the special tool to measure the
turning torque of the ball joint.
(2) When the measured value exceeds the standard value,

replace the toe control arm assembly.
(3) When the measured value is lower than the standard
value, check that the ball joint turns smoothly without
excessive play. If so, it is possible to use that ball joint.

34-12 REAR SUSPENSION – Lower Arm and Toe Control Arm Assemblies
2. TOE CONTROL ARM SLIDE BUSHING OPERATING

MB990326 TORQUE CHECK
(1) Insert a bolt into the slide bushing of the toe control arm.
Fit a washer onto the bolt from the opposite end and
screw a nut onto it. Turn the inner cylinder (together with
the washer) several turns, then measure the toe control
arm slide bushing operating torque using the special tool.
the toe control arm assembly.
that the slide bushing turns smoothly without excessive
play. If so, the slide bushing should still be in good condition
for continued use.
3. TOE CONTROL ARM BALL JOINT DUST COVER
CHECK
it with a finger.
toe control arm assembly.
NOTE
ball joint.
it with a new one.
TOE CONTROL ARM BALL JOINT DUST

COVER REPLACEMENT
MB990800
the snap ring.

REAR SUSPENSION – Shock Absorber Assembly 34-13
SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
D Trunk Room Side Trim Removal and Installation
<GSR>
44 {4.5}
88 {9.0}*
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Cap Caution
2. Shock absorber mounting nuts The part marked with * should be first temporarily
3. Bolt tightened, then torqued to specification with the
4. Shock absorber assembly vehicle on the ground in unloaded condition.

34-14 REAR SUSPENSION – Stabilizer Bar
STABILIZER BAR
D Check the Stabilizer Link Ball Joint Dust Cover for
Cracks or Damage by Pushing it with Finger.
4
39 {4.0}
39 {4.0}
20 {2.0}
39 {4.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Stabilizer link mounting nuts
2. Stabilizer link
"AA 3. Stabilizer bar bracket
"AA 4. Bushing
"AA 5. Stabilizer bar

REAR SUSPENSION – Stabilizer Bar 34-15
"AA STABILIZER BAR / BUSHING / STABILIZER BAR
BRACKET INSTALLATION
Position the stabilizer bar such that the identification mark
may protrude toward the vehicle center as shown in the figure,
and tighten first the stabilizer bar bracket mounting bolt 1
then the mounting bolt 2.
Approx. 10 mm
INSPECTION
MB990326
1. STABILIZER LINK BALL JOINT TURNING TORQUE
CHECK
(1) After shaking the ball joint stud several times, install the
nut to the stud and use the special tool to measure the
turning torque of the ball joint.
(2) When the measured value exceeds the standard value,

replace the stabilizer link.
(3) When the measured value is lower than the standard
value, check that the ball joint turns smoothly without
excessive play. If so, it is possible to use that ball joint.
2. STABILIZER LINK BALL JOINT DUST COVER

CHECK
it with finger.
stabilizer link.
NOTE
Cracks or damage of the dust cover may cause damage
of the ball joint. When it is damaged during service work,
replace the dust cover.

34-16 REAR SUSPENSION – Stabilizer Bar
STABILIZER LINK BALL JOINT DUST COVER

REPLACEMENT
service work, replace the dust cover as follows:
(1) Remove the clip ring and the dust cover.
Clip ring
(2) Apply the specified grease to the lip and inside of the
dust cover.
Specified grease:
SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU VARIANT R-2 or
equivalent
(3) Wrap plastic tape on the stabilizer link threads as shown

in the illustration, and then install the dust cover to the
stabilizer link.
(4) Secure the dust cover with the clip ring.
When installing the clip ring, align the ends at a 90_
angle from the axis of the stabilizer link.
it with finger.
Clip ring ends (180_ on

opposite side also possible)

35-1
SERVICE BRAKES
CONTENTS
BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35A
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35B

35A-1
BASIC BRAKE
SYSTEM
CONTENTS
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 MASTER CYLINDER AND BRAKE

Outline of Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 BOOSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Brake Pedal Check and Adjustment . . . . . . . . 2 DISC BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
BRAKE PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

35A-2 BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM – General / On-vehicle Service
GENERAL
OUTLINE OF CHANGE
D The service procedures for left-hand drive vehicles have been established as described below.
D The service procedures for the front and rear disc brakes have been changed since they had been
replaced by a different type. <EVOLUTION-VI with BREMBO braking system>
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
BRAKE PEDAL CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
Stop lamp <L.H. DRIVE VEHICLES>
Operating
rod switch 1. Turn up the carpet, etc under the brake pedal.
2. Measure the brake pedal height as illustrated. If the brake
Operating pedal height is not within the standard value, follow the
rod lock nut
procedure below.
Standard value: 163.5–166.5 mm
(1) Disconnect the stop lamp switch connector.

Pedal down (2) Adjust the brake pedal height by turning the operating
rod with pliers (with the operating rod lock nut
loosened), until the correct brake pedal height is
obtained.
(3) Secure by tightening the lock nut of the operating
rod.
Pedal up
Lock nut
(4) Push the stop lamp switch in the direction of the

pedal stroke until it stops. (The switch will slide if
it is pushed firmly.)
(5) Lift up the pedal until the operating rod is fully
Lock nut extended, and then slide the stop lamp switch back
Outer case to the required position. Adjust the position of the
switch by turning it until the distance shown in the
0.5 – 1.0 mm illustration is correct.
(6) Connect the connector of the stop lamp switch.
(7) Check that the stop lamp is not illuminated with the
brake pedal unpressed.
3. With the engine stopped, depress the brake pedal two

or three times. After eliminating the vacuum in the power
brake booster, press the pedal down by hand, and confirm
that the amount of movement before resistance is met
(the free play) is within the standard value range.
Standard value: 3–8 mm

BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM – On-vehicle Service 35A-3
If the free play exceeds the standard value, it is probably
due to excessive play between the retaining ring bolt
and brake pedal arm.
Check for excessive clearance and replace faulty parts
as required.
4. Start the engine, depress the brake pedal with

approximately 490 N of force, and measure the clearance
between the brake pedal and the floorboard.
Standard value: 80 mm or more
If the clearance is outside the standard value, check for
air trapped in the brake line, clearance between the lining
and the drum and dragging in the parking brake.
Adjust and replace defective parts as required.
5. Turn back the carpet, etc.

35A-4 BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM – Brake Pedal
BRAKE PEDAL <L.H. DRIVE VEHICLES>

D Instrument Under Cover Removal D Accelerator Pedal Installation
D Steering Column Assembly Removal D Steering Column Assembly Installation
(Refer to GROUP 37A – Steering Wheel and Shaft.) (Refer to GROUP 37A – Steering Wheel and Shaft.)
D Accelerator Pedal Removal D Instrument Under Cover Installation
D Brake Pedal Adjustment (Refer to P.35A-2.)
11 29 Nm
12 Nm
14 Nm 13 Nm 2 1
9
8 10 8
9
3
4
7
Removal steps
1. Stop lamp switch connector 7. Brake pedal pad
2. Stop lamp switch 8. Brake pedal return spring
3. Snap pin 9. Bushing
4. Clevis pin 10. Pipe
5. Brake pedal shaft bolt 11. Pedal support member
6. Brake pedal

BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM – Master Cylinder and Brake Booster 35A-5
MASTER CYLINDER AND BRAKE BOOSTER
<L.H. DRIVE VEHICLES>
D Brake Fluid Draining D Brake Fluid Supplying
D Air Intake Hose Removal D Brake Line Bleeding
D Brake Pedal Adjustment (Refer to P.35A-2.)
D Air Intake Hose Installation
4
3
2
6
1
14 Nm
9
15 Nm
1 8
10 Nm
5 15 – 18 Nm
5
4
Sealant: 3M ATD Part No.

8661 or equivalent
Removal steps
1. Brake pipe connection 5. Fitting
2. Brake fluid level sensor connector 6. Snap pin
3. Master cylinder assembly 7. Clevis pin assembly
"BA D Clearance adjustment between brake 8. Brake booster
booster push rod and primary piston 9. Sealer
"AA 4. Vacuum hose
(With built-in check valve)

35A-6 BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM – Master Cylinder and Brake Booster

"AA VACUUM HOSE CONNECTION
Insert securely and completely until the vacuum hose at the
engine side contacts the edge of the hexagonal part of the
fitting, and then secure by using the hose clip.
"BA CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN BRAKE

C BOOSTER PUSH ROD AND PRIMARY PISTON
Calculate clearance A from the B, C and D measurements.
A = B – C – D
D Standard value: 0.65–0.85 mm
A B
Measuring Measuring
distance B distance D
Block
gauge
If the clearance is not within the standard value range, adjust

by changing the push rod length by turning the screw of
the push rod.

BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM – Master Cylinder and Brake Booster 35A-7
MASTER CYLINDER
11
2
1
3
13 12
4
14
6
5 Master cylinder kit
15
7
8
12
9
14 13
10
11 13
14
Brake fluid: DOT3 or DOT4
15
Disassembly steps
1. Reservoir cap assembly 8. Reservoir tank
2. Reservoir cap 9. Reservoir seal
3. Diaphragm AA" 10. Piston stopper bolt
4. Filter 11. Gasket
5. Brake fluid level sensor AB" 12. Piston stopper ring
6. Float 13. Primary piston assembly
7. Reservoir stopper bolt 14. Secondary piston assembly
15. Master cylinder body

35A-8 BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM – Master Cylinder and Brake Booster

AA" PISTON STOPPER BOLT DISASSEMBLY
Remove the piston stopper bolt, while depressing the piston.
AB" PISTON STOPPER RING DISASSEMBLY

Remove the piston stopper ring, while depressing the piston.
INSPECTION
D Check the inner surface of master cylinder body for rust
or pitting.
D Check the primary and secondary pistons for rust, scoring,
wear, damage or wear.
D Check the diaphragm for cracks and wear.

BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM – Disc Brake 35A-9
DISC BRAKE
<EVOLUTION-VI WITH BREMBO BRAKING SYSTEM>
Front Brake
5
6
6 7
9
8
10
4
3
5
1
6
7 9
6 8 2
10
5 5
9
7
1 7
9
Brake caliper kit Seal & boot kit Shim set

3 4
2
1
3
1
2
4
Clip set Pad set
Disassembly steps
1. Pin 6. Air bleeder screw
2. Cross spring 7. Piston boot
3. Pad & wear indicator assembly 8. Piston
4. Pad assembly 9. Piston seal
5. Shim 10. Caliper body

35A-10 BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM – Disc Brake
Rear Brake
5 4
6 2
3
5
10
7
9
8
6 10 2
9
8 7
9 5
7 6
1
7 5
9
Brake caliper kit Seal & boot kit Shim set
3 4 4
1 3
2
1
2
Clip set Pad set
Disassembly steps
1. Pin 6. Air bleeder screw
2. Cross spring 7. Piston boot
3. Pad & wear indicator assembly 8. Piston
4. Pad assembly 9. Piston seal
5. Shim 10. Caliper body

35B-1
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKING
SYSTEM (ABS)
CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

1. Inspection Chart for Diagnosis Codes . . . 2 Wheel Speed Sensor Output Voltage
Measurement <EVOLUTION-V> . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2. Inspection Procedure for Diagnostic
Trouble Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR . . . 17
3. Inspection Chart for Trouble Symptoms 11
4. Inspection Procedure for Trouble WHEEL SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5. Check at ABS-ECU Terminals . . . . . . . . . 15

35B-2 ABS – Troubleshooting
The EVOLUTION-V is provided with a lateral acceleration sensor in addition to the longitudinal acceleration
sensor, and the ABS-ECU connector is changed in terminal arrangement. When servicing EVOLUTION-V,
therefore, use the following service procedures.
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. INSPECTION CHART FOR DIAGNOSIS CODES
Diagnosis Diagnosis items Reference Page
code No.
11 Wheel speed sensor (FR) system (open- or short-circuit) 35B-3
12 Wheel speed sensor (FL) system (open- or short-circuit) 35B-3
13 Wheel speed sensor (RR) system (open- or short-circuit) 35B-3
14 Wheel speed sensor (RL) system (open- or short-circuit) 35B-3
15 Wheel speed sensor system (abnormal output signal) 35B-4
16 ABS-ECU power supply voltage system (abnormal voltage drop or rise) 35B-5
21 Wheel speed sensor (FR) system 35B-2
22 Wheel speed sensor (FL) system 35B-2
23 Wheel speed sensor (RR) system 35B-2
24 Wheel speed sensor (RL) system 35B-2
27 AYC monitor system (detective AYC) 35B-6
32 Longitudinal acceleration sensor circuit system 35B-6
33 Stop lamp switch system 35B-7
41 Solenoid valve (FR) system 35B-7
42 Solenoid valve (FL) system 35B-7
43 Solenoid valve (RR) system 35B-7
44 Solenoid valve (RL) system 35B-7
51 Valve relay system 35B-8
53 Motor relay system 35B-9
63 ABS-ECU failure Replace ABS-ECU.
71 Lateral acceleration sensor system 35B-10

ABS – Troubleshooting 35B-3
2. INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
Code Nos.11, 12, 13 and 14: Wheel speed sensor Probable cause
(open circuit or short circuit)
Code Nos.21, 22, 23 and 24: Wheel speed sensor
Code Nos 11, 12, 13 and 14 are output if the ABS-ECU detects an open circuit or D Malfunction of wheel speed sensor
short-circuit in the (+) wire or (–) wire in any one of the four wheel speed sensors. D Malfunction of wiring harness or connector
D Malfunction of ABS-ECU
Code Nos.21, 22, 23 and 24 are output in the following cases. D Malfunction of wheel speed sensor
D When there is no input from any one of the four wheel speed sensors when travelling D Malfunction of wiring harness or connector
at 8 km/h or more, even though open circuit can not be verified. D Too much gap between the sensor and the rotor
D When a chipped or blocked-up ABS rotor is detected and if the anti-lock system D Malfunction of ABS-ECU
operates continuously because a malfunctioning sensor or a warped ABS rotor D Malfunction of wheel bearing
is causing sensor output to drop.
NG
Wheel speed sensor installation check Replace
OK
NG NG
Measure at the ABS-ECU connector Wheel speed sensor check Replace
B-24. (Refer to P.35B-29.)
OK
measure at the harness side
connector. OK
Check the following connectors: Check the trouble symptom.
D Resistances between 8 and 21, B-24, B-52, B-17, A-26, A-50, D-04,
10 and 19, 7 and 20, 9 and 22 NG
D-14, D-19
OK: 1.4 – 1.8 kΩ
NG Check the harness wire, and repair
OK if necessary.
Repair D Between each wheel speed sensor
and ABS-ECU
NG NG
Wheel speed sensor output voltage Wheel speed sensor check Replace
check (Refer to P.35B-17.) OK
OK
NG
B-24
NG
OK ABS rotor check Replace
OK
NG Wheel bearing check
Replace the ABS-ECU.

Code No.15: Wheel speed sensor (abnormal output Probable cause

signal)
This code is output when there is an abnormality in the output signal from any one D The four vehicle tires are of different sizes
of the four wheel speed sensors while driving (except for an open circuit or short D Malfunction of wheel speed sensor
circuit). D Malfunction of wiring harness or connector
D Malfunction of wheel bearing
NO
Are the sizes of all four tires identical? Equip the vehicle with tires of identical
YES sizes.
OK
NG
NG
Wheel speed sensor installation check Repair
OK
NG NG
Wheel speed sensor output voltage Wheel speed sensor check Replace
check (Refer to P.35B-17.)
OK
OK
NG
B-24
NG
OK ABS rotor check Repair
OK
NG Wheel bearing check
OK
Check the harness wire, and repair
if necessary.
D Between each wheel speed sensor
and ABS-ECU

Code No.16: ABS-ECU power supply system (abnormal Probable cause
voltage drop or rise)
This code is output if the ABS-ECU or valve relay power supply voltage drops below D Malfunction of battery
or rises above the rated values. D Malfunction of wiring harness or connector
The valve relay power supply voltage is detected based on the voltage in the valve D Malfunction of valve relay
relay monitor line. D Malfunction of ABS-ECU
Caution
If battery voltage drops or rises during inspection, this code will be output as well, making it
impossible to obtain correct diagnostic results.
Before carrying out the following inspection, check the battery level, and refill it if necessary.
NG NG
Measure at the ABS-ECU connector Check the following connectors: Repair
B-24. B-24, B-52, B-74, B-76
OK
connector. NG
Check the trouble symptom. Check the harness wire, and repair
D Start the engine. if necessary.
D Voltage between 13 and body D Between ignition switch and
ground ABS-ECU
OK: Battery voltage
OK
(1) NG NG
Measure at the valve relay connector Check the following connector: Repair
A-76. A-76
OK
connector. NG
D Ignition switch: ON if necessary.
(1) Voltage between 6 and body D Between fusible link No. 8 and
ground valve relay
OK: Battery voltage
(2) Voltage between 2 and body (2) NG
NG
ground Check the following connector: Repair
OK: Battery voltage A-76
OK OK
NG
if necessary.
NG D Between general-purpose fuse
Check the valve relay. Replace No. 6 and valve relay
OK
(1) NG NG
Measure at the ABS-ECU connector Check the following connectors: Repair
B-25. A-76, B-25
D Connector connected
OK
(1) Voltage between 37 and body (2) NG NG
ground if necessary.
OK: Battery voltage D Between general-purpose fuse
(2) Voltage between 48 and body No. 6 and valve relay
ground
OK: Battery voltage OK NG
NG
OK Check the following connectors: Repair
A-76, B-25 Repair
OK
Replace ABS-ECU.
NG
NG
Check the harness wire, and repair Repair
if necessary.
D Between valve relay and ABS-ECU
OK
OK NG
Replace the ABS-ECU. Check the harness wire for short Repair
circuit, and repair if necessary.
D Between valve relay and hydraulic
unit
D Between valve relay and motor
relay

Code No. 27: AYC monitor system (defective AYC) Probable cause
This code is output when the AYC monitor signal becomes faulty. D Defective AYC-ECU
D Defective ABS-ECU
NG
B-25, B-96
OK
NG
Check the harness between ABS-ECU Repair
and AYC-ECU.
OK
NG
MUT-II data list Replace AYC-ECU.
AYC signal
OK OFF to be displayed when the
engine runs at idle with the
vehicle stationary.
OK
Code No. 32: Acceleration sensor (longitudinal accelera- Probable cause

tion) circuit system
This code is output under either of the following conditions: D Defective acceleration sensor (longitudinal accelera-
D The output from the acceleration sensor (longitudinal acceleration) becomes 0.5 tion)
V or less, or 4.5 V or more. D Defective harness or connector
D The acceleration sensor (longitudinal acceleration) harness is open- or D Defective ABS-ECU
short-circuited.
(1) NG NG
Measure at D-20 acceleration sensor Check the following connectors: Repair
(longitudinal acceleration) connector. D-20, B-49, B-75
OK
D Ignition switch: ON (2) NG NG
(1) Voltage across 1 and body ground general-purpose fuse No. 6 and
OK: Battery voltage acceleration sensor (longitudinal
(2) Continuity across 3 and body acceleration).
ground
OK: Conducting
NG
OK Check the following connector: Repair
D-20, B-49, B-75
NG OK
Check the valve relay. Replace
OK
NG
NG
Check the harness between accelera- Repair
tion sensor (longitudinal acceleration)
and ABS-ECU.
OK
Replace ABS-ECU.
NG NG
Measure at B-24 ABS-ECU connector. Check the following connectors: Repair
D Connect the connector. B-24, D-20, B-52
OK
D Voltage across 4 and 17
OK: 2.4 – 2.6 V NG
(horizontal position) acceleration sensor (longitudinal
OK acceleration) and ABS-ECU.
NG
B-24
OK
NG
Check the trouble symptom. Replace ABS-ECU.

Code No.33: Stop lamp switch system (open circuit or Probable cause
stop lamp stays ON)
This code is output, if the stop lamp switch is continuously on for 15 minutes or D Malfunction of stop lamp switch
more. D Malfunction of wiring harness or connector
NO NG
Does the stop lamp turn on and off Stop lamp switch installation check Repair
normally? OK
YES NG
Stop lamp switch check Repair
OK
NG
B-15, B-21, B-25, B-32, B-65
OK
NG
if necessary.
Measure at the ABS-ECU connector D Between dedicated fuse No. 11
B-25. and ABS-ECU
measure at the harness side NG NG
connector. Check the following connectors: Repair
D Stop lamp switch: ON B-25, B-32, B-65
D Voltage between 34 and body OK
ground NG
OK: Battery voltage Check the trouble symptom. Check the harness wire, and repair
OK if necessary.
D Between stop lamp switch and
NG ABS-ECU
B-25
OK
NG
Check the trouble symptom. Replace the ABS-ECU.
Code No. 41, 42, 43, 44: Solenoid valve system Probable cause
ABS-ECU monitors the solenoid valve energization circuit at all times. This code is D Defective hydraulic unit
output when no current flows through the solenoid even when ABS-ECU energizes D Defective harness or connector
it or when current continues flowing through the solenoid even when ABS-ECU D Defective ABS-ECU
deenergizes it, which is considered to be attributable to an open- or short-circuited
solenoid coil or open- or short-circuited harness.
NG
Check the solenoid valve. Replace the hydraulic unit.
OK
NG NG
Measureat A-22 hydraulic unit connec- Check the following connectors: Repair
tor and A-76 valve relay connector. A-22, A-76
OK
D Continuity across the following NG
terminals hydraulic unit and valve relay.
Hydraulic Valve relay
unit side side
11 – 3
OK: Battery voltage
OK
NG
A-21, B-24, B-25
OK
NG NG
Check the trouble symptom. Check the harness between hydraulic Repair
unit (solenoid valve) and ABS-ECU.
OK

Code No. 51: Valve relay system Probable cause

This code is output under any of the following conditions: D Defective ABS valve relay
D The solenoid valve power is not supplied when ABS-ECU attempts to turn ON D Defective harness or connector
the valve relay as part of the initial check when the ignition switch is turned ON. D Defective ABS-ECU
D The solenoid valve power remains supplied when ABS-ECU attempts to turn OFF
the valve relay as part of the initial check when the ignition switch is turned ON.
D The solenoid valve power is not supplied while the valve relay remains ON under
normal conditions.
NOTE
In the diagnosis code reading by means of the ABS warning lamp, this code is output in addition to
the actual diagnosis code since the valve relay connector is disconnected.
If the ABS warning lamp turns ON even when the spot represented by the diagnosis code output in
addition to this code has been repaired, and if no diagnosis code other than No. 51 is output, then
the valve relay system is probably defective. Make the following checks.
NG
Check the valve relay. Replace
OK
(1) NG NG
Measure at A-76 valve relay connector. Check the following connector: Repair
D Disconnect the connector and A-76
measure at the harness side. (2) NG OK
(1) Voltage across 6 and body ground NG
(2) Voltage across 2 and body ground fusible link No. 8 and valve relay.
OK: Battery voltage
OK NG
A-76
OK
NG
general-purpose fuse No. 6 and valve
relay.
NG NG
Measure at A-76 valve relay connector Check the following connectors: Repair
and B-25 ABS-ECU connector. A-76, B-25
OK
terminals valve relay and ABS-ECU.
OK: Conducting
Valve relay ABS-ECU
side side
3 – 48
5 – 37
OK
NG
A-76, B-25
OK

NG

Code No. 53: Motor relay system Probable cause
This code is output under any of the following conditions: D Defective motor relay
D No signals are input to the motor monitor when the motor relay is ON (motor D Defective harness or connector
does not run, etc.). D Defective hydraulic unit
D A signal is being input to the motor monitor for 3 sec. or more when the motor D Defective ABS-ECU
relay is OFF (motor continues running, etc.).
D The motor relay is inoperative.
Caution
(1) If the motor relay contacts fuse, the motor continues running even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF. In this case, immediately remove fusible link No. 8 (60 A) or disconnect the
A-22 connector or A-77 motor relay connector of the hydraulic unit. Overloading the motor
results in a rundown battery.
(2) Driving the motor through actuator test runs down the battery. After the test, run the engine
for some while.
NG
Check the motor relay. Replace the motor relay.
OK
NG NG
Measure at A-77 motor relay connec- Check the following connector: Repair
tor. A-77
OK
D Voltage across 5 and body ground NG
OK: Battery voltage fusible link No. 8 and motor relay.
OK
NG NG
Measure at A-77 motor relay connector Check the following connectors: Repair
and A-22 hydraulic unit connector. A-22, A-77
OK
terminals motor relay and hydraulic unit.
Motor relay Hydraulic
side unit side
4 – 12
OK: Conducting
OK
NG NG
Measure at A-77 motor relay connector Check the following connectors: Repair
and B-25 ABS-ECU connector. A-77, B-25
OK
terminals motor relay and ABS-ECU motor
Motor relay ABS-ECU monitor terminal No. 49.
side side
4 – 49
OK: Conducting
OK
NG
Check the motor for operation. Replace the hydraulic unit.
OK
NG
A-22, A-77, B-25
OK
NG
Check the motor for operation. Replace ABS-ECU.

Code No. 71: Acceleration sensor (lateral acceleration) Probable cause

system
This code is output under either of the following conditions: D Defective acceleration sensor (lateral acceleration)
D The output from the acceleration sensor (lateral acceleration) becomes 0.5 V or D Defective harness or connector
less, or 4.5 V or more. D Defective ABS-ECU
D The acceleration sensor (lateral acceleration) harness is open- or short-circuited.
(1) NG NG
Measure at D-32 acceleration sensor Check the following connectors: Repair
(lateral acceleration) connector. D-32, B-49, B-75
OK
D Ignition switch: ON (2) NG NG
(1) Voltage across 1 and body ground general-purpose fuse No. 6 and
OK: Battery voltage acceleration sensor (lateral accelera-
(2) Continuity across 3 and body tion).
ground
OK: Conducting
NG
OK Check the following connector: Repair
D-32, B-49, B-75
NG OK
Check the acceleration sensor (lateral Replace
acceleration). (Refer to P.35B-17.)
OK Check the trouble symptom.
NG
NG
Check the harness between accelera- Repair
tion sensor (lateral acceleration) and
ABS-ECU.
OK
Replace ABS-ECU.
NG NG
Measure at B-24 ABS-ECU connector. Check the following connectors: Repair
D Connect the connector. B-24, D-32, B-52
OK
D Voltage across 17 and 18
OK: 2.4 – 2.6 V NG
(horizontal position) acceleration sensor (lateral accelera-
OK tion) and ABS-ECU.
NG
B-24
OK
NG
Check the trouble symptom. Replace ABS-ECU.

3. INSPECTION CHART FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS
Get an understanding of the trouble symptoms and check according to the inspection procedure chart.
Trouble symptoms Inspection pro- Reference page

cedure No.
When the ignition key is turned to “ON” (engine stopped), the ABS warning lamp 1 35B-12
does not illuminate.
Even after the engine is started, the ABS warning lamp remains illuminated. 2 35B-13
After the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the ABS warning lamp blinks twice, and 3 35B-13
when turned to “START”, it illuminates. When returned to “ON”, the lamp
flashes once, and then switches off.
When the ignition key is turned to “START”, the ABS warning lamp does not 4 35B-14
illuminate.
Brake operation is abnormal 5 35B-14
Caution
(1) If steering movements are made when driving at high speed, or when driving on road surfaces
with low frictional resistance, or when passing over bumps, the ABS may operate even though
sudden braking is not being applied. Because of this, when getting information from the customer,
check if the problem occurred while driving under such conditions as these.
(2) During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate or may not be able to be depressed. Such
phenomena are due to intermittent changes in hydraulic pressure inside the brake line to prevent
the wheels from locking and is not an abnormality.

4. INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS

When the ignition key is turned to “ON” (engine stopped), Probable cause
the ABS warning lamp does not illuminate.
The ABS-ECU turns the valve relay ON → OFF → ON for initial checking when D Blown fuse
it is powered ON. Accordingly, the ABS warning lamp illuminates twice even if the D Burn out ABS warning lamp bulb
circuit between the ABS warning lamp and ABS-ECU is faulty. D Malfunction of wiring harness or connector
The cause may be an open circuit in the lamp power supply circuit, a blown lamp,
an open circuit between the ABS warning lamp and ABS-ECU or between the ABS
warning lamp and the valve relay.
NG
Fuse check Replace fuse after eliminating the
General-purpose fuse No.4 cause.
OK
NG NG
Measure at the combination meter con- Check the following connectors: Repair
nector B-08. B-08, B-75, B-76
OK
connector. NG
D Ignition switch: ON if necessary.
D Voltage between 42 and body D Between ignition switch and ABS
ground warning lamp
OK: Battery voltage
OK
NG NG
Measure at the combination meter con- Check whether the ABS warning lamp Replace the ABS warning lamp bulb.
nector B-09. bulb is burnt out.
D Disconnect the connector, and OK
measure at the combination meter
side connector. NG
D Ignition switch: ON B-08, B-09
D ABS warning lamp condition when
terminal 12 is grounded. OK
OK: Illuminates NG
Check the trouble symptom. Replace the combination meter.
OK
NG
A-76, B-09, B-52
OK
NG
Check the motor for operation. Check the harness wire, and repair
if necessary.
D Between ABS warning lamp and
ABS-ECU
D Between ABS warning lamp and
valve relay

Even after the engine is started, the ABS warning lamp Probable cause
remains illuminated.
The cause is probably a short-circuit in the ABS warning lamp illumination circuit. D Malfunction of combination meter
D Malfunction of wiring harness (short circuit)
NOTE
This trouble symptom is limited to cases where ABS-ECU power supply is normal and the diagnosis
code is a normal diagnosis code.
YES
Does the ABS warning lamp stay illuminated when the connector Replace the combination meter.
B-52 is disconnected and the ignition switch is turned to ON?
NO
YES
D Disconnect the ABS-ECU connector B-25. Replace the ABS-ECU.
D Disconnect the valve relay connector A-76.
D Does the ABS warning lamp go off?
NO
Check the harness wire, and repair if necessary.

D Between ABS warning lamp and ABS-ECU
D Between ABS warning lamp relay and valve relay
After the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the ABS warning Probable cause
lamp blinks once, and when turned to “START”, it
illuminates. When returned to “ON”, the lamp flashes
once, and then switches off.
The ABS-ECU causes the ABS warning lamp to illuminate during the initial check. D Malfunction of wiring harness or connector
During the initial check, the valve relay turns from off to on, off and back to on again. D Malfunction of ABS-ECU
If there is an open circuit in the harness between the ABS-ECU and the ABS warning
lamp, the lamp will illuminate only when the valve relay is OFF during valve relay
test, etc.
NG NG
Measure at ABS-ECU connector B-25. Check the following connector: Repair
meeasure at the harness side.
OK
D Disconnect valve relay connector
A-76. NG
Check the trouble symptom. Check the harness between the com-
D Ignition switch: ON bination meter and the ABS-ECU, and
D Voltage between 50 and body repair if necessary.
ground
OK: Battery voltage
OK
NG
B-25
OK
NG
Check the trouble symptom. Replace the ABS-ECU.

When the ignition key is turned to “START”, the ABS Probable cause
warning lamp does not illuminate.
The ABS-ECU is powered through IG2 which is turned off when the ignition key D Malfunction of wiring harness or connector
is in START position. The ABS warning lamp is powered through IG1 which is not D Malfunction of valve relay
turned off even when the ignition key is in START position. So the cause must be
a defective circuit on valve relay side.
NG
ABS valve relay check. Replace the valve relay.
OK
NG NG
Measureat valve relay connector A-76. Check the following connectors Repair
D Disconnect the connector and and diode:
measure at the harness side. A-76, B-26
D Disconnect ABS-ECU connector OK
B-25.
D Ignition switch: ON NG
Check the trouble symptom. Check the harness between the com-
D Voltage between 3 and body bination meter and valve relay, and
ground repair if necessary.
OK: Battery voltage
OK
NG
A-76
OK
NG
Check the motor for operation. Check the harness between the valve
relay and ground, and repair if neces-
sary.
Brake operation is abnormal Probable cause
The varies depending on the driving conditions and the road surface conditions, so D Improper installation of wheel speed sensor
problem diagnosis is difficult. However, if a normal diagnosis code is displayed, carry D Incorrect sensor harness contact
out the following inspection. D Foreign material adhering to wheel speed sensor
D Malfunction of wheel speed sensor
D Malfunction of wheel bearing
D Malfunction of hydraulic unit
OK
Hydraulic unit check Wheel speed sensor inspection. [Refer to Inspection Procedure
for “when either of diagnosis codes No. 11 to 14 is output” (P.35B-3).]
NG
Repair

5. CHECK AT ABS-ECU TERMINALS
5-1 TERMINAL VOLTAGE LISTING
(1) The voltage is to be measured across each terminal and ground terminal.
(2) Fig. below shows the arrangement of the terminals.

No.
1 Solenoid valve OUT (FL) output Ignition switch: ON (after initial check) Battery voltage
2 Solenoid valve OUT (RR) output Ignition switch: ON (after initial check) Battery voltage
3 Solenoid valve IN (RR) output Ignition switch: ON (after initial check) Battery voltage
4 Acceleration sensor (longitudinal Ignition switch: ON 2.4 – 2.6 V
acceleration) input (horizontal position)
11 Wheel speed (FL) output Vehicle stationary 1 V or less
Moving forward slowly 0–5V
13 ABS-ECU power supply Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
14 Solenoid valve IN (FL) output Ignition switch: ON (after initial check) Battery voltage
15 Ground At all times 0V
17 Acceleration sensor ground At all times 0V
18 Acceleration sensor (lateral Ignition switch: ON 2.4 – 2.6 V
acceleration) input (horizontal position)
24 Wheel speed (RL) output Vehicle stationary 1 V or less
32 ABS-ECU backup power supply At all times Battery voltage
33 Wheel speed (FR) output Vehicle stationary 1 V or less
34 Stop lamp switch input Stop lamp switch: ON Battery voltage
Stop lamp switch: OFF 0V
37 Valve relay output Ignition switch: When relay is ON 0V
ON
When relay is OFF Battery voltage
38 Motor relay output Ignition switch: When motor is energized 0V
ON
When motor is deenergized Battery voltage
40 Solenoid valve OUT (RL) output Ignition switch: ON (after initial check) Battery voltage
41 Solenoid valve OUT (FR) output Ignition switch: ON (after initial check) Battery voltage


No.
44 Wheel speed (RR) output Vehicle stationary 1 V or less

48 Valve relay monitor input Ignition switch: ON (after initial check) Battery voltage
49 Motor relay monitor output Ignition switch: When motor is energized 0V
ON
When motor is deenergized Battery voltage
50 ABS warning lamp output Ignition switch: When lamp is off Battery voltage
ON
When lamp is on 0V
51 Solenoid valve IN (RL) output Ignition switch: ON (after initial check) Battery voltage
52 Solenoid valve IN (FR) output Ignition switch: ON (after initial check) Battery voltage
5-2 LISTING OF RESISTANCE AND CONTINUITY ACROSS CONNECTOR TERMINALS ON

HARNESS SIDE
(1) Measure the resistance and check for continuity with the ignition switch in the ”OFF” position and
ABS-ECU connector disconnected.
(2) Measure the resistance and check for continuity across terminals listed below.
(3) Fig. below shows the arrangement of terminals.
Terminal No. Signal name Normally
1 – body ground Solenoid valve OUT (FL) output 4.04 – 4.54 Ω

2 – body ground Solenoid valve OUT (RR) output 4.04 – 4.54 Ω
3 – body ground Solenoid valve IN (RR) output 8.04 – 9.04 Ω
7 – 20 Wheel speed sensor (FL) input 1.4 – 1.8 kΩ
8 – 21 Wheel speed sensor (RR) input 1.4 – 1.8 kΩ
9 – 22 Wheel speed sensor (RL) input 1.4 – 1.8 kΩ
10 – 23 Wheel speed sensor (FR) input 1.4 – 1.8 kΩ
14 – body ground Solenoid valve IN (FL) output 8.04 – 9.04 Ω
15 – body ground Ground Conducting
40 – body ground Solenoid valve OUT (RL) output 4.04 – 4.54 Ω
41 – body ground Solenoid valve OUT (FR) output 4.04 – 4.54 Ω
48 – body ground Valve relay monitor input Conducting
49 – body ground Motor relay monitor input Conducting
51 – body ground Solenoid valve IN (RL) output 8.04 – 9.04 Ω
52 – body ground Solenoid valve IN (FR) output 8.04 – 9.04 Ω

ABS – On-vehicle Service / Lateral Acceleration Sensor 35B-17
ABS-ECU connector harness side ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE
MEASUREMENT <EVOLUTION-V>
The EVOLUTION-V has the ABS-ECU connector terminal
arranged as shown at left. Accordingly, the terminals to
measure the output voltage of the wheel speed sensors are
different from EVOLUTION-V.
Follow the conventional procedures except these pick-out
terminals.
Measurement terminals:
Front LH Front RH Rear LH Rear RH
7 10 9 8
20 23 22 21
LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR

INSPECTION
Use the same procedures as those for the conventional
Longitudinal
acceleration longitudinal acceleration sensor.
sensor
Lateral acceleration sensor

35B-18 ABS – Wheel Speed Sensor
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

D Wheel Speed Sensor Output Voltage Measurement
25 {2.6}
25 {2.6}
1 4
25 {2.6}
2
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Front speed sensor removal steps

D Splash shield NOTE
1. Front speed sensor The front rotor and rear rotor are integrated with the drive
2. Front rotor (Refer to GROUP 26 shaft and thus nonmaintainable.
DRIVE SHAFT.)
Caution
Rear speed sensor removal steps When removing and installing the speed sensor and
3. Rear speed sensor rotor, use care not to allow the surfaces of the ball
4. Rear rotor (Refer to GROUP 27 piece and rotor at the end of the speed sensor to
REAR AXLE HUB.) be hit against a metal or other object, damaging
it.

36-1
PARKING
BRAKES
CONTENTS
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1. Parking Brake Lever Stroke Check and
LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. Lining Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
PARKING BRAKE CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PARKING BRAKE DRUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

36-2 PARKING BRAKE – Service Specifications / Lubricants / Special Tools
The parking brake is designed as a drum-in-disc brake acting on the rear wheel. This brake is a little
different in construction between EVOLUTION-IV and EVOLUTION-V but much alike in the service procedure
of the parking brake section. In this group, therefore, the description is made only for EVOLUTION-IV.
Parking brake lever stroke (operating force approx. 196 N {20 kgf}) 5 – 7 notches –
Brake lining thickness mm 2.8 1.0
Brake drum I.D. mm 168 169
LUBRICANTS
Items Specified lubricant Quantity
Backing plate CHUO YUKA AKB100 As required
Shoe & lining assembly
Adjuster
SPECIAL TOOLS
MB990767 End yoke holder Fixing of hub
MB990241 Axle shaft puller Removal of drive shaft

A: MB990242 A: Puller shaft
B: MB990244 B: Puller bar
MB991354 Puller body

PARKING BRAKE – On-vehicle Service 36-3
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
1. PARKING BRAKE LEVER STROKE CHECK
AND ADJUSTMENT
1-1 STROKE CHECK
Standard value: 5 – 7 notches
[Operating force of approx. 196 N {20 kgf}]
Rear floor console Adjusting nut 1-2 STROKE ADJUSTMENT

If the parking brake lever stroke is not the standard value,
Nut
holder
adjust as described below.
(1) Loosen the adjusting nut at the floor console to release
the cable.
(2) Remove the adjustment hole plug, and then use a flat-tip
Adjuster
(–) screwdriver to turn the adjuster in the direction of
the arrow (the direction which expands the shoe) until
the disc cannot be rotated by both hands.
Return the adjuster five notches in the direction opposite
to the direction of the arrow. (Reference: shoe clearance
on one side 0.19 mm)
(3) Turn the adjusting nut to adjust the parking brake lever
stroke to the standard value. After adjusting, check that
there is no space between the adjusting nut and the
parking brake lever.
Check also that the adjusting nut is firmly held by the
nut holder.
Caution
If the parking brake lever stroke is below the standard
value and the braking is too firm, the rear brakes
may drag.
(4) After adjusting the parking brake lever stroke, jack up
the rear of the vehicle. Release the parking brake and
turn the rear wheels to check that the rear brakes are
not dragging.

36-4 PARKING BRAKE – On-vehicle Service
2. LINING RUNNING-IN
Carry out running-in by the following procedure when replacing
the parking brake linings or the rear brake disc rotors, or
when brake performance is insufficient.
Caution
Carry out running-in in a place with good visibility, and
pay careful attention to safety.
(1) Adjust the parking brake stroke to the specified value.
Standard value: 5 – 7 notches
[Operating force of approx. 196 N {20 kgf}]
(2) Hook a spring balance onto the center of the parking

Pull
brake lever grip and pull it with a force of 98 – 147 N
Spring {10 – 15 kgf} in a direction perpendicular to the handle.
balance (3) Drive the vehicle at a constant speed of 35 – 50 km/h
for 100 metres.
(4) Release the parking brake and let the brakes cool for
5 – 10 minutes.
Approx. (5) Repeat the procedure in steps (2) to (4) 4 – 5 times.
40 mm

PARKING BRAKE – Parking Brake Cable 36-5
PARKING BRAKE CABLE
D Floor Console and Rear Seat Removal (1) Parking Brake Lever Stroke Check and Adjustment
(Refer to P.36-3.)
(2) Floor Console and Rear Seat Installation
49 – 59
{5.0 – 6.0}
12
13 3
6
11
9
8
7 10
10 11 4
9 8 5
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Backing plate
11
11
Brake grease: CHUO YUKA AKB100
Removal steps
AA" 1. Rear brake caliper assembly AB" 8. Shoe hold-down cup
2. Rear brake disc 9. Shoe hold-down spring
"BA 3. Shoe-to-anchor spring 10. Shoe hold-down pin
4. Adjusting screw spring 11. Shoe and lining assembly
"AA 5. Adjuster 12. Clip
6. Strut 13. Parking brake cable
7. Strut return spring

36-6 PARKING BRAKE – Parking Brake Cable
Shoe
hold-down AA" REAR BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
cup
Remove the rear brake caliper assembly and support it with
wire or similar.
AB" SHOE HOLD-DOWN CUP REMOVAL
Extend the shoe and lining assembly, and remove the shoe
hold-down cup.

"AA ADJUSTER INSTALLATION
Install the adjuster so that the shoe adjusting bolt of left hand
wheel is attached towards the front of the vehicle, and the
shoe adjusting bolt of right hand wheel is towards the rear
of the vehicle.
Shoe adjusting
bolt
"BA SHOE-TO-ANCHOR SPRING INSTALLATION

Install the shoe-to-anchor springs in the order shown in the
illustration.
Caution
The load on the respective shoe-to-anchor springs is
different, so the spring in the figure has been painted.
Rear
NOTE
The figure shows the left wheel; for the right wheel, the position
1 2 (Painted) is symmetrical.

PARKING BRAKE – Parking Brake Drum 36-7
PARKING BRAKE DRUM
D Parking Brake Lever Stroke Check and Adjustment
(Refer to P.36-3.)
16 2
49 – 59
{5.0 – 6.0} 1 196 – 255
{20.0 – 26.0}
118 {12.0}
17 15
14
3
6
11
9
8
74 – 88 4
{7.5 – 9.0} 10
7
12
13
11 5
9 8
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
17
11
11
Brake grease: CHUO YUKA AKB100
Removal steps
1. Rear brake caliper 9. Shoe hold-down spring
(Refer to P.36-6.) 10. Shoe hold-down pin
2. Rear brake disc 11. Shoe and lining assembly
3. Shoe-to-anchor spring 12. Clip
(Refer to P.36-6.) 13. Parking brake cable
4. Adjusting screw spring 14. Split pin
5. Adjuster AA" "AA 15. Drive shaft nut
6. Strut AB" 16. Rear hub assembly
7. Strut return spring 17. Backing plate
8. Shoe hold-down cup
(Refer to P.36-6.)

36-8 PARKING BRAKE – Parking Brake Drum

AA" DRIVE SHAFT NUT REMOVAL
MB990767
AB" REAR HUB ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

MB990244
(3) (1) Using the special tool, remove the drive shaft from the
rear hub assembly.
(2) Remove the mounting bolts and remove the rear hub
MB990767
assembly from the knuckle.
MB991354
MB990242
Washer
"AA DRIVE SHAFT NUT INSTALLATION
(1) Install the drive shaft washer in the direction shown.
(2) Use the special tool as you did during removal and tighten
the drive shaft nut to the specified torque.
Tightening torque: 196 – 255 Nm {20.0 – 26.0 kgf@m}
INSPECTION
BRAKE LINING AND BRAKE DRUM WEAR CHECK
(1) Measure the thickness of the brake lining at a location
that wears most.
Standard value: 2.8 mm
Limit: 1.0 mm
(2) If the measurement exceeds the limit, replace the shoe
& lining assembly of both sides as a set.
(3) Measure I.D. of the brake disc at two or more places.

Standard value: 168.0 mm
Limit: 169.0 mm
(4) If the measurement exceeds the limit or there is an
excessive eccentric wear evident, replace the brake disc.

37A-1
STEERING
CONTENTS
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 STEERING WHEEL

<EVOLUTION-IV RS> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
POWER STEERING GEAR & LINKAGE . . . 3
1. Steering Angle Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2. Oil Pump Belt Tension Check and POWER STEERING FLUID COOLER . . . . . 9
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

37A-2 STEERING – Service Specifications / Special Tools / On-vehicle Service
Steering angle EVOLUTION-IV Inner wheel 33_30’ ± 2_
Outer wheel 28_20’
EVOLUTION-V Inner wheel 33_10’ ± 2_
Outer wheel 28_10’
Steering gear Pinion total turning torque Total turning torque 0.9 – 1.7 {9 – 17}
Nm {kgf
{kgf@cm}
cm}
Torque fluctuations 0.4 {4} or less
SPECIAL TOOLS
MB991197 Installer bar Pressfitting of gear housing oil seal
MB991199 Oil seal installer
MB991214 Oil seal protector Installation of rack assembly
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
1. STEERING ANGLE CHECK
Locate front wheels on turning radius gauge and measure
steering angle.
Standard value:
Inner wheel
33_30’ ± 2_ <EVOLUTION-IV>
33_10’ ± 2_ <EVOLUTION-V>
Outer wheel
28_20’ <EVOLUTION-IV>
28_10’ <EVOLUTION-V>
When the angle is not within the standard value, the toe
is probably incorrect. Adjust toe (Refer to GROUP 33A –
On-vehicle Service) and recheck steering angle.
2. OIL PUMP BELT TENSION CHECK AND

ADJUSTMENT
Refer to GROUP 11 – Engine Adjustments.

Steering Wheel <EVOLUTION-IV RS> /
STEERING – Power Steering Gear & Linkage 37A-3
STEERING WHEEL
<EVOLUTION-IV RS>
STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL
(1) Peel off the dual lock fasteners from the steering wheel
Dual lock spokes and remove the horn pad.
fastener
(2) Remove the bolts indicated by arrows in the illustration

and remove the steering wheel from the boss plate.
(3) Using the special tool, remove the boss plate from the
steering column.
Boss plate
MB990803
POWER STEERING GEAR &

LINKAGE
For removal, installation and inspection procedure, follow the
conventional procedures except the following.
INSPECTION
PINION TOTAL TURNING TORQUE
The conventional procedures apply except for the standard
value.
Standard value:
Total turning torque 0.9 to 1.7 Nm {9 to 17 kgf@cm}
Torque fluctuations 0.4 Nm {4 kgf@cm} or less

37A-4 STEERING – Power Steering Gear & Linkage
22 {2.2}
23 Repair kit grease
22
22 2 20
21 18
17 2
20 10
7
19 7
18
34
33 10 16
16 35 30 28 27
25 {2.5} 31
32
59 { 6.0}
34 Steering gear seal kit
1
15
29 14 Flare nut
13 12
11 1
26 59 {6.0}
28 27
25
24
10
9
13 {1.3}
30 6
3
4
31
88 {9.0}
7 5
8
49 – 59
{5.0 – 6.0}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Disassembly steps
1. Feed pipe AB" "HA 18. Lower oil seal
2. O-ring AB" 19. Pinion & valve assembly
"NA 3. Lock nut AC" "GA 20. Seal ring
"NA 4. Tie rod end AD" "FA 21. Upper bearing
"MA 5. Dust cover AD" "FA 22. Upper oil seal
6. Clip 23. Valve housing
"LA 7. Band AE" "EA 24. Circlip
8. Bellows AF" 25. Rack stopper
"KA 9. Tie rod AF" "DA 26. Rack bushing
"KA 10. Tab washer AG" "DA 27. Oil seal
"JA D Pinion total turning torque adjustment 28. O-ring
11. Lock nut AF" "CA 29. Rack assembly
AA" 12. Rack support cover AC" 30. Seal ring
13. Support spring 31. O-ring
14. Rack support AH" "BA 32. Lower bearing
"IA 15. End plug AI" "BA 33. Needle bearing
16. Lock nut AJ" "AA 34. Oil seal
17. Valve housing assembly 35. Gear housing

STEERING – Power Steering Gear & Linkage 37A-5
LUBRICANT AND SEALANT APPLICATION POINTS
Same as before.

Follow the conventional procedures.

Follow the conventional procedures except followings.

MB991199
Gear housing
MB991197
Oil seal
"CA RACK ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

(1) Apply a coating of repair kit grease to the rack tooth
Vent hole face.
Caution
Do not close the vent hole in the rack with grease.
Seal ring, O-ring
(2) Cover rack serrations with special tool.

(3) Apply the specified fluid on the special tool, seal ring
Oil seal and O-ring surfaces.
Specified fluid:
MITSUBISHI GENUINE ATF II
Caution
Do not use ATF-SP II.
MB991214 (4) Slowly insert the special tool-covered rack into the gear
housing from power cylinder side.
Caution
When inserting the rack, align the oil seal center with
the tip of the special tool to prevent the retainer spring
from slipping.

37A-6 STEERING – Power Steering Gear & Linkage
"JA ADJUSTMENT OF PINION TOTAL TURNING

MB990607 TORQUE
(1) With special tool, tighten rack support cover to 15 Nm
{1.5 kgf@m}.
(2) Return rack support cover approx. 30_.
(3) Using the special tools, rotate the pinion shaft at the
MB991006 rate of one rotation in approximately 4 to 6 seconds to
check that the turning torque and the torque fluctuation
confirm to the standard values.
Standard value:
Pinion total turning torque
0.9 – 1.7 Nm {9 – 17 kgf@cm}
Torque fluctuation 0.4 Nm {4 kgf@cm} or less
(4) If either the turning torque or the torque fluctuation
deviates from the standard value, turn back the rack
support cover within the range of 0 to 30_ to adjust it
for the standard value.
Caution
1. When adjusting, set the standard value at its
highest value.
2. Assure no ratcheting or catching when operating
rack towards the axial direction.
3. Be sure to measure the turning torque through
the whole stroke of the rack.
NOTE
If the standard value cannot be obtained by turning back
the rack support cover within the specified angle range,
check rack support cover components and replace as
required.
"NA TIE ROD END / LOCK NUT INSTALLATION

End of groove in Lock nut Turn down the tie rod until the dimension shown in the
which bellows fits illustration is reached; then, temporarily tighten the lock nut.
NOTE
The lock nut is to be tightened to the specified torque after
toe-in has been adjusted with the steering gear & linkage
mounted in the vehicle.
197.2 mm <EVOLUTION-IV>
212.2 mm <EVOLUTION-V>

STEERING – Power Steering Oil Pump 37A-7
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
<EVOLUTION-IV>
D Power Steering Fluid Draining (1) Power Steering Fluid Supplying
(2) Drive Belt Tension Adjusting
7 39 {4.0}
10 3 5 4
49 {5.0} 49 {5.0}
18 {1.8}
10 – 12
{1.0 – 1.2}
12 {1.2}
59 – 69
{6.0 – 7.0} 2
39 {4.0}
8
1
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Drive belt 6. Heat protector
2. Pressure switch connector 7. Bolt
3. Suction hose 8. Bolt
4. Pressure hose 9. Oil pump assembly
5. O-ring 10. Oil pump bracket

37A-8 STEERING – Power Steering Oil Pump
<EVOLUTION-V>
D Power Steering Fluid Draining (1) Power Steering Fluid Supplying
(2) Drive Belt Tension Adjusting
(3) Power Steering Fluid Line Bleeding
12 {1.2}
18 {1.8}
2 4
22 {2.2}
10 22 {2.2} 9
5 24 {2.4}
11
3
1 52 {5.3}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Drive belt 7. Heat protector B
2. Suction hose 8. Pressure switch connector
3. Pully 9. Bolt
4. Pressure hose 10. Bolt
5. O-ring 11. Oil pump assembly
6. Heat protector A

STEERING – Power Steering Fluid Cooler 37A-9
POWER STEERING FLUID COOLER
(1) Power Steering Fluid Draining and Refilling
(2) Front Bumper Removal and Installation
12 {1.2}
13 {1.3}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Removal steps
1. Cooler hose
2. Power steering fluid cooler

42-1
BODY
CONTENTS
HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 TYPE A (PROJECTED DIMENSIONS) . . . . . 7
FENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 TYPE B (ACTUAL-MEASUREMENT

DIMENSIONS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
TRUNK LID <EVOLUTION-V> . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
BODY CONSTRUCTION
(Difference between
EVOLUTION-IV and V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

42-2 BODY – Hood
HOOD
9 2
8
14
4
5 10
13
7 11 1
6
3
12 2
15
9 {0.9} Unit: Nm {kgf@m}

1
6
15
Adjustment of hood step and hood Adjustment of clearance and height

striker linkage around hood
1. Hood latch Hood lock release cable removal

2. Hood lock release handle steps
3. Hood weatherstrip D Splash shield <Driver’s side>
4. Hood weatherstrip 12. Hood lock release cable
5. Hood insulator
6. Bumper Hood and hood hinge removal
7. Hood support rod steps
8. Hood outlet garnish weatherstrip 13. Washer hose connection
9. Hood outlet garnish 14. Hood
10. Hood inlet garnish, upper 15. Hood hinge
11. Hood inlet garnish, lower
Caution
For hood hinge and hood mounting, use only
specially surface-treated bolts.

BODY – Fender 42-3
FENDER
<EVOLUTION-V>
Caution Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation
A rust preventive treatment has been applied to the (1) Front Bumper Removal and Installation
washers marked with * to prevent contact corrosion (Refer to GROUP 51.)
between aluminum and metal of different kind. Be (2) Front Turn Signal Lamp Removal and Installation
sure to these special washers. (3) Side Air Dam Removal and Installation
(Refer to GROUP 51 – Aero Parts.)
3
Butyl rubber tape:
PAND-690E or equivalent
1
Removal steps
1. Splash shield
AA" "AA 2. Side turn signal lamp
3. Overfender

42-4 BODY – Fender / Trunk Lid <EVOLUTION-V>

Fender panel AA" SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP REMOVAL
Using a flat-tip screwdriver or similar tool, release the lock
Lock from the fender panel and remove the side turn signal lamp.

"AA SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP INSTALLATION
Hook
Fit the hook into the fender panel to secure the side turn
Fender panel signal lamp into position.
Front of vehicle
TRUNK LID <EVOLUTION-V>

The conventional procedures shall be used except for
followings.

TRUNK LID TORSION BAR INSTALLATION
(1) Torsion bars are color-coded, as indicated at their center.
Torsion bar <LH> ID color Torsion bar <RH> ID color
White green Orange
(2) Fit the end of the torsion bar into the mounting hole.
(3) As you did during removal, mount the special tool to
the torsion bar and twist the torsion bar to hook it onto
the link; then, hook it onto the holder.
Caution
Make sure that the special tool is positively mounted
to the torsion bar. If the torsion bar comes off the
special tool, it can damage the body and other parts.

BODY – Body Construction (Difference between EVOLUTION-IV and V) 42-5
BODY CONSTRUCTION
(Difference between EVOLUTION-IV and V)
EVOLUTION-V has a different rear suspension configuration from that of EVOLUTION-IV because of
adoption of reinforced suspension elements and wide tread tyres. For this reason, the configuration and
the dimensions of the following body sections are also different.
SIDE BODY
Side Structure
(1) The quarter panel has a cut-out provided at the inner section.
(2) The quarter inner extension front and the quarter inner extension rear is provided in the quarter
panel inner cut-out section.
<EVOLUTION-V> <EVOLUTION-IV>
Cut-out Quarter panel inner
<EVOLUTION-V>
Quarter inner
extension front Quarter inner
extension rear

42-6 BODY – Body Construction (Difference between EVOLUTION-IV and V)
UNDER BODY
Rear Floor
The upper link bracket, rear floor sidemember reinforcement and toe control link bracket have been changed
in configuration.
<EVOLUTION-V>
Upper link bracket
Rear floor
sidemember
reinforcement
<EVOLUTION-IV>
Upper link bracket
Rear floor
sidemember
reinforcement
<EVOLUTION-V> <EVOLUTION-IV>
Toe control link bracket

BODY DIMENSION
TYPE A (PROJECTED DIMENSIONS) <EVOLUTION-V>
The reference dimensions of the under body have been changed as follow. Those of the other body sections remain unchanged.
UNDER BODY Unit: mm
703
913 544
8 10
329
950 714 1,232 810 940
829 173 157
BODY – Body Dimension

329
7 9
3
2 21
1 6
4
80
1 83 83 5 230
1 21 6
251 2 8 10 4 245
3
60
7 9
911 572 249 329 419 671
1,211
indicates that the dimension and the measurement point are the same as
those for EVOLUTION-IV.
42-7

42-8
Unit: mm
900
1,222
1,273 961 8 1,393

10
1,627 1,028
9
7
869
2 3 21
1 6
4

indicates that the dimension and the measurement point are the same as those for EVOLUTION-IV.
1 7, 8 9, 10 21
8 7 10 9
No. Standard measurement point Hole _ Size No. Standard measurement point Hole _ Size
shape mm shape mm
1* Rear portion of front bumper stay mounting hole f – 30 7 Center bearing mounting bolt end –
2* Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole Left: f – 14 8 Center bearing mounting bolt end –
Right: f – 16
3* Rear portion of front floor sidemember positioning hole f – 25 9 Center bearing mounting bolt end –
4* Rear portion of rear seat crossmember positioning hole – 22 × 38 10 Center bearing mounting bolt end –
6* Center of rear floor sidemember extension drain hole f – 20 21 Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole f – 14
NOTE: The * mark indicates the mounting position for the frame centering gauge.

SUSPENSION INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS Unit: mm
1,093 930 597 829 1,186 852 700 810 862 1,010
13 20 21
22
12

2
69
11 65
Center of vehicle
4_ 11_36’
Center
of
vehicle
290 529
1_
3_
72
11 71
69
70
641 12 75 132 21 22 529
13 60
242 2 240 239
3 65
230
20 91
78 1,145
572 401
6
523
indicates that the dimension and
the measurement point are the 270 623
42-9
same as those for EVOLUTION-IV.

42-10
Unit: mm
103
116
312 1,199
812
920 842
1,068
13
12 275 20
2 21 22
65

11 69
shape mm shape mm
11 Center of strut insulator f – 110 65 Trailing arm mounting position –
12 Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole f – 15 69 Center of rear shock absorber mounting hole f – 68
13 Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole f – 16 70 Control link mounting position –
20 Differential mounting bolt end – 71 Center of upper link mounting hole f – 14
21 Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole f – 14 72 Center of upper link mounting hole f – 14
22 Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole Left: f – 13.5

Right: – 12.2 × 14

TYPE B (ACTUAL-MEASUREMENT DIMENSIONS)
UNDER BODY Unit: mm
719
933
544
8 10
329
950 829 714 1,232 810 940
191 175
329
7 9
2 3 21

1 6
4
708
900
1,231
10
1,287 962
8 1,395 1,635 1,028
9
871
7 660
2 3 21
1 6
4
indicates that the dimension and the measurement point are the same as those for EVOLUTION-IV. 42-11

42-12
1 2 3 4
6 7, 8 9, 10 21

8 7 10 9
shape mm shape mm
1 Rear portion of front bumper stay mounting hole f – 30 7 Center bearing mounting bolt end –
2 Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole Left: f – 14 8 Center bearing mounting bolt end –
Right: f – 16
3 Rear portion of front floor sidemember positioning hole f – 25 9 Center bearing mounting bolt end –
4 Rear portion of rear seat crossmember positioning hole – 22 × 38 10 Center bearing mounting bolt end –
6 Center of rear floor sidemember extension drain hole f – 20 21 Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole f – 14

SUSPENSION INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS
Unit : mm
930 597 829 1,186 700 810 862
13 20 21
12 22

2
65
352 117 1,210
826
938 842
1,069
13
12 329 2 20
21 22
65
42-13

42-14
12 2, 13 20 21, 22
13 2
21 22
65

shape mm shape mm
2 Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole Left: f – 14 21 Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole f – 14
Right: f – 16
12 Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole f – 15 22 Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole Left: f – 13.5
Right: – 12.2 × 14
13 Center of suspension crossmember mounting hole f – 16 65 Trailing arm mounting position –
20 Differential mounting bolt end – 70 Control link mounting position –

51-1
EXTERIOR
CONTENTS
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REAR FENDER GARNISH

<EVOLUTION-V> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
FRONT BUMPER <EVOLUTION-IV> . . . . . . 2
WATER SPRAY <EVOLUTION-IV> . . . . . . 12
FRONT BUMPER <EVOLUTION-V> . . . . . . . 4
INTERCOOLER & RADIATOR WATER
REAR BUMPER <EVOLUTION-V> . . . . . . . . 6 SPRAY SYSTEM <EVOLUTION-V> . . . . . 13
AERO PARTS <EVOLUTION-IV> . . . . . . . . . 7 MARK <EVOLUTION-V> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
AERO PARTS <EVOLUTION-V> . . . . . . . . . . 8

51-2 EXTERIOR – Special Tools / Front Bumper <EVOLUTION-IV>
SPECIAL TOOLS
MB990784 Ornament remover Removal of front bumper and rear bumper
FRONT BUMPER <EVOLUTION-IV>

Front bumper assembly

EXTERIOR – Front Bumper <EVOLUTION-IV> 51-3
10
5 7
2 8
11
6 13
3
15 4
9 7
14
12 4
5
1
17 6
16
Disassembly steps
D Front air dam (Refer to P.51-7.) 8. Bumper bolt plate
D Brake duct (Refer to P.51-7.) AA" 9. Clip
1. License plate bracket 10. Bumper upper reinforcement
2. mark 11. Grille net
3. Bumper center stay 12. Bumper lower reinforcement
4. Bumper center stay 13. Bumper reinforcement
<vehicles without fog lamps> 14. Bumper center net
5. Bumper net (side) 15. Water spray hose assembly
6. Fog lamp cover 16. Water spray nozzle
<vehicles without fog lamps> 17. Bumper face
7. Fog lamp

AA" CLIP REMOVAL
(1) Using the special tool, raise the pin at the center of the
MB990784 clip.
(2) Remove the clip.
MB990784
Pin
Clip

51-4 EXTERIOR – Front Bumper <EVOLUTION-V>
FRONT BUMPER <EVOLUTION-V>

Front bumper assembly

EXTERIOR – Front Bumper <EVOLUTION-V> 51-5
5
6 12
2 10
4 14
9
15
3
2.5 {0.25}
16
11 4
13
2.5 {0.25}
9
18 6
1
17
7
8
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Disassembly steps
D Front air dam (Refer to P.51-9.) 9. Fog lamp
D Brake duct (Refer to P.51-9.) 10. Bumper bolt plate
1. License plate bracket AA" 11. Clip
2. mark 12. Bumper upper reinforcement
3. Bumper center stay assembly
4. Bumper center stay 13. Bumper lower reinforcement
<vehicles without fog lamps> 14. Bumper reinforcement
5. Air guide panel (on driver’s seat 15. Bumper center net
side) 16. Water spray hose assembly
6. Bumper net (side) 17. Water spray nozzle
7. Fog lamp plate 18. Bumper face
<vehicles without fog lamps>
8. Fog lamp cover
<vehicles without fog lamps>

51-6 EXTERIOR – Front Bumper <EVOLUTION-V> / Rear Bumper <EVOLUTION-V>

AA" CLIP REMOVAL
(1) Using the special tool, raise the pin at the center of the
MB990784 clip.
(2) Remove the clip.
MB990784
Pin
Clip
REAR BUMPER <EVOLUTION-V>

Rear bumper removal

1. Rear end crossbar
2. Rear bumper assembly

EXTERIOR – Aero Parts <EVOLUTION-IV> 51-7
AERO PARTS <EVOLUTION-IV>
3 3
2
4
1
2
5
6
Insert bolt mounting locations
Double-sided adhesive tape:

SUMITOMO 3M 4211 or equivalent (width: 5 mm)
Primer: SUMITOMO 3M C100 or equivalent
Front air dam removal steps Rear air dam removal steps
1. Front air dam center 5. Rear air dam
2. Front air dam 6. Rear air dam center
3. Brake duct
Side air dam removal NOTE
The conventional service points apply for removal and
AA" "AA 4. Side air dam installation.

51-8 EXTERIOR – Aero Parts <EVOLUTION-IV>
Rear spoiler removal steps

7. Rear spoiler
8. High-mount stop lamp

EXTERIOR – Aero Parts <EVOLUTION-V> 51-9
AERO PARTS <EVOLUTION-V>
4
Insert bolt mounting locations
Double-sided adhesive tape: SUMITOMO 3M 4211 or equivalent (thickness: 1.2 mm)
Primer: SUMITOMO 3M 8107 PP parts primer
Front air dam removal steps Side air dam removal

1. Brake duct AA" "AA 4. Side air dam
AA" "AA 2. Front air dam Rear air dam removal steps
3. Rear air dam

51-10 EXTERIOR – Aero Parts <EVOLUTION-V>
5 {0.5}
5 {0.5}
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
Double-sided adhesive tape:

Commercially available product (thickness: 2.0 mm)
Rear spoiler removal steps

AA" "AA 5. Rear spoiler NOTE
6. High-mount stop lamp undercover The conventional service points apply for removal and
7. High-mount stop lamp installation.

EXTERIOR – Rear Fender Garnish <EVOLUTION-V> 51-11
REAR FENDER GARNISH <EVOLUTION-V>
4
2
NOTE
The parts marked with are plastic clips.
6 Section A-A, B-B
4 3
4, 6
Double-sided adhesive tape: SUMITOMO 3M 4213 or equivalent (thickness: 0.8 mm)

Primer: SUMITOMO 3M 8107 PP parts primer
Rear door garnish removal steps Quarter garnish removal steps

1. Clip AA" "AA 5. Quarter garnish assembly
AA" "AA 2. Rear door garnish assembly 3. Protector
3. Protector 6. Quarter garnish
4. Rear door garnish
NOTE
The same service points as those for aero parts apply for
removal and installation.

51-12 EXTERIOR – Water Spray <EVOLUTION-IV>
WATER SPRAY <EVOLUTION-IV>

1. Water spray switch 3. Washer motor

Removal steps 4. Water spray motor
5. Water spray hose
D Front bumper (Refer to P.51-3.) 6. Water spray nozzle
2. Washer tank
INSPECTION
WATER SPRAY SWITCH CONTINUITY CHECK
Switch position Terminal No.

1 2
ON
OFF

EXTERIOR – Intercooler & Radiator Water Spray System <EVOLUTION-V> 51-13
INTERCOOLER & RADIATOR WATER SPRAY SYSTEM
<EVOLUTION-V>
D Front Bumper Removal and Installation
(Refer to P.51-4.)
9
8
2
1
2.5 {0.25}
3
4
4 5
3
6 5 2.5 {0.25}
5 4
4 1
5
4 4 2
5 5 5
4
5 4
2 4
5
1
1 2
Unit: Nm {kgf@m}
1. Clamp Water spray motor removal steps

2. Water spray nozzle 7. Washer tank
3. Water spray nozzle bracket 8. Water spray hose
"AA 4. Water spray hose 9. Water spray motor
5. Joint
"AA 6. Clip NOTE
The conventional service procedures apply for the water
spray switch.

51-14 EXTERIOR – Intercooler & Radiator Water Spray System <EVOLUTION-V>

"AA CLIP / WATER SPRAY HOSE INSTALLATION
(1) Tape clips as illustrated.
(2) Tape the water spray hose as illustrated.
(3) Insert the clips positively into the mounting holes.
<Top view>
Unit: mm
Connect to radiator nozzle (RH).
Washer
tank side Tape (secures three water hoses together)
Tape Tape
330 ± 5 50 ± 5 60 +100
Tape so that the

clip faces toward Connect to intercooler
nozzle (RH).
the front of vehicle.
Tape Tape
50 +100 60 ± 5
Connect to radiator
nozzle (LH).
Connect to intercooler
nozzle (LH).
Tape so that the clip faces
toward the front of vehicle.
Section A – A Section B – B
Tape and secure so that the two Tape and secure so that the thin
thin water spray hoses are located water spray hose is located above
above the thick water spray hose. the thick water spray hose.
Fixing range
Fixing range
To intercooler To intercooler
nozzle (RH) nozzle (LH)

EXTERIOR – Mark <EVOLUTION-V> 51-15
MARK <EVOLUTION-V>
1
3
2
"AA 1. EVOLUTION-V mark (side) NOTE

"AA 2. brembo mark The mark “brembo” represents an Italian disc brake
"AA 3. EVOLUTION-V mark (rear) maker, whose disc brakes are used both in front and rear
on EVOLUTION-V.

"AA MARK INSTALLATION
Installation positions
The dimension up to the cutout in decal (A in fig.) is the same as the dimension from the mounting
reference line (A’ in fig.). Use this dimension as a guideline to determine the mounting position. (A =
A’)
1. EVOLUTION-V MARK (SIDE)
Application tape edge
Body press line

176 mm
Rear door garnish edge line
Rear door opening line

51-16 EXTERIOR – Mark <EVOLUTION-V>
2. brembo MARK
Application tape edge

Trunk lid opening line
Rear bumper line
3. EVOLUTION-V MARK (REAR)
Trunk lid opening line
Rear bumper line
(2) Installation procedure

1. Using unleaded gasoline, degrease the surface of the body on which the marks are mounted.
2. Peel off the release paper from the back side of the mark and affix the mark, ensuring the specified
dimensions are met.
Caution
(1) Perform the procedure in a dust-free place with an ambient temperature ranging from
20 to 38_C.
(2) If the ambient temperature is below 20_C, heat the mark and mounting position to 20
to 30_C.
(3) Be sure to press each mark positively, as a low pressure results in the mark being
separated easily.

54-1
CHASSIS
ELECTRICAL
CONTENTS
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SPECIAL TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
IGNITION SWITCH AND IMMOBILIZER
SERVICE SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
COMBINATION METERS . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
IGNITION SWITCH <EXCEPT SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
EVOLUTION-VI WITH IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SEALANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SPECIAL TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE
IGNITION SWITCH AND IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM <EVOLUTION-VI WITH
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM> . . . . . . . . . . . 13
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES

WARNING!
(1) The service personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B – Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related
component.
(2) When removing or installing the components indicated in the table of contents by an astarisk (*), use utmost care so
as not to apply any strong shock to SRS components.
NOTE
The SRS includes the following components: SRS-ECU, SRS warning lamp, air bag module, clock spring and interconnecting
wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are
indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*).

54-2
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 SIDE TURN-SIGNAL LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
COMBINATION METERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
HAZARD WARNING LAMP
SWITCH, CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
HEADLAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
SPECIAL TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
HAZARD WARNING LAMP SWITCH . . . . 44
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
RADIO AND TAPE PLAYER . . . . . . . . 45
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
HEADLAMP AND FRONT TURN-SIGNAL RADIO AND TAPE PLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

LAMP* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
FRONT FOG LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
POLE ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
REAR WINDOW ANTENNA AND GLASS
FOG LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 DIVERSITY ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
REAR COMBINATION LAMP* . . . . . . . 42 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER . . . . . . . 50
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TROUBLESHOOTING <VEHICLES WITH

AUTOMATIC A/C> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
REAR COMBINATION LAMP* . . . . . . . . . . 42
SIDE TURN-SIGNAL LAMP . . . . . . . . . 43 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
<VEHICLES WITH AUTOMATIC A/C> . . . 51
SPECIAL TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – General / Battery 54-3
GENERAL
Outline of Change
D The following service procedures have been incorporated.
BATTERY
SERVICE SPECIFICATION
Item Specification
Specific gravity of the battery fluid 1.220–1.290 [20_C]
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
FLUID LEVEL AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK
Ther- Good 1. Inspect whether or not the battery fluid is between the
mometer UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL marks.
Hydrometer 2. Use a hydrometer and thermometer to check the specific
gravity of the battery fluid.
Standard value: 1.220–1.290 [20_C]
The specific gravity of the battery fluid varies with the
temperature, so use the following formula to calculate
the specific gravity for 20_C. Use the calculated value
to determine whether or not the specific gravity is
satisfactory.
D20=Dt+0.0007 (t–20)
D20: Specific gravity of the battery fluid calculated
for 20_C.
Dt: Actually measured specific gravity
t: Actually measured temperature

54-4 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Battery
CHARGING
1. When charging a battery while still installed in the vehicle,
disconnect the battery cables to prevent damage to
electrical parts.
2. The current normally used for charging a battery should
be approximately 1/10th of the battery capacity.
3. When performing a quick-charging due to lack of time,
etc., the charging current should never exceed the battery
capacity as indicated in amperes.
4. Determining if charging is completed.
(1) If the specific gravity of the battery fluid reaches
1.250 –1.290 and remains constant for at least one
hour.
(2) If the voltage of each cell reaches 2.5–2.8 V and
remains constant for at least one hour.
Caution
1. Be careful since the battery fluid level may rise
during charging.
2. Keep all sources of fire away while charging
because there is a danger of explosion.
3. Be careful not to do anything that could generate
sparks while charging.
4. When charging is completed, replace the battery
caps, pour clean water over the battery to remove
any sulfuric acid and dry.

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Battery 54-5
BATTERY TESTING PROCEDURE
TEST STEP
(1) Turn headlamps on for 15 seconds.
(2) Turn headlamps off for 2 minutes to allow battery voltage to
stabilize.
(3) Disconnect cables.
NG
Read open circuit voltage. Charge battery at 5 amps. (see LOAD TEST RATE CHART)
OK: Open circuit voltage is more than 12.4 V
OK
Retest
NG
(1) Connect a load tester to the battery. Replace battery
(2) Load the battery at the recommended discharge rate (see LOAD
TEST RATE CHART).
(3) Read voltage after 15 seconds, then remove load.
(4) Compare the measured value with the minimum voltage (see
LOAD TEST CHART).
OK: Higher than minimum voltage
OK
Normal
LOAD TEST RATE CHART

Battery type 28B19L 34B19L 44B20L 95D31L 55D23L 55B24L
Charging time when fully discharged h 5 6 7 13 10 8

[5-amp rated current charging]
Load test (Amps) 120 130 160 310 170 170
LOAD TEST CHART

Temperature _C 21 and 16 to 10 to 4 to 9 –1 to 3 –7 to –12 to –18 to
above 20 15 –2 –8 –13
Minimum voltage V 9.6 9.5 9.4 9.3 9.1 8.9 8.7 8.5

54-6 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Ignition Switch
IGNITION SWITCH <EXCEPT EVOLUTION-VI WITH

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM>
SPECIAL TOOL
MB991502 MUT-II sub ETACS-ECU input signal checking
assembly
TROUBLESHOOTING
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
INPUT SIGNAL INSPECTION POINTS <VEHICLES
WITH ETACS-ECU>
Refer to Group 00 – How to Use Troubleshooting / Inspection
Service Points.
INSPECTION CHART FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS

Trouble symptoms Inspection Reference page
procedure
Communication with Key hole illumination lamp remains illuminated. 1 54-7

MUT II is impossible
MUT-II impossible.
Even if driver’s side door is opened, key hole 2 54-7
illumination lamp does not illuminate.
While key hole illumination lamp is illuminated, 3 54-8

ignition key is turned to the ON position but key hole
illumination lamp does not switch off. (However, it
switch off after 10 seconds.)
Key reminder warning While the key reminder warning buzzer is sounding, 3 54-8
buzzer system the ignition key is turned to the ON position but the
sound dose not stop. (However, it stops when the
driver’s side door is closed.)
The key reminder warning buzzer dose not stop 4 54-9

sounding even if the key is removed. (However, it
stops when the driver’s side door is closed.)
The key reminder warning buzzer does not sound 5 54-10

ever if the driver’s side door is opened while the key
is still inserted. (However, the ignition key should be
in the OFF position.)
NOTE
If every input signal can not be checked with the MUT-II, a diagnosis circuit system failure is probably
the cause. <Vehicles with ETACS-ECU>

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Ignition Switch 54-7
INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS
Inspection Procedure 1
Key hole illumination lamp remains illuminated. Probable cause
The cause is probably a harness short or a defective ETACS-ECU or buzzer ECU. D Malfunction of harness wire
D Malfunction of ETACS-ECU
D Malfunction of buzzer ECU
NG
Disconnect the ignition key cylinder illumination lamp connector Check the harness wire between the ignition key cylinder illumination
B-84 and measure the continuity: lamp and junction block, and repair if necessary.
D Between 4 and body earth
OK: Conducting
OK
Replace the ETACS-ECU or buzzer ECU.
Even if driver’s side door is opened, key hole illumination Probable cause
lamp does not illuminate.
The cause is probably a defective key hole illumination lamp circuit system, or a D Malfunction of driver’s side door switch
defective driver’s side door switch input circuit system if the ignition key reminder D Malfunction of bulb
warning buzzer is also faulty. D Malfunction of connector
D Malfunction of harness wire
<Vehicles with ETACS-ECU> Vehicle with buzzer ECU

MUT-II Pulse check
Driver’s side door switch input signal
OK: The MUT-II buzzer sounds once NG
Driver’s side door switch input circuit
when the driver’s side door switch
system inspection (Refer to Inspection
is ON.
Procedure 6 on P.54-10.)
OK OK
NG Check the following connectors: NG

Disconncet the key hole illumination B-49, B-75, B-73 Repair
lamp connector B-84, and measure at
the harness side. OK
D Voltage between 3 and body earth
OK: System voltage Check trouble symptom.
NG
OK
Check the harness wire between the

ignition key cylinder illumination lamp
and fusible link 1, and repair if neces-
sary.
Remove ETACS-ECU or buzzer ECU NG Check the following connectors: NG

from junction block, and measure at the B-84, B-49, B-75, B-73 Repair
junction block connector B-79 OK
D Ignition key cylinder illumination
lamp connector connected Check trouble symptom.
D Voltage between 12 and body earth
OK
Replace ETACS-ECU or buzzer ECU. Check the harness wire between

ETACS-ECU or buzzer ECU and fusible
link 1, and repair if necessary.

While key hole illumination lamp is illuminated, ignition Probable cause
key is turned to the ON position but key hole illumination
lamp does not switch off. (However, it switch off after 15
seconds.)
While the key reminder warning buzzer is sounding, the
ignition key is turned to the ON position but the sound
dose not stop. (However, it stops when the driver’s side
door is closed.)
The cause is probably a malfunction of the ignition switch input circuit, ETACS-ECU D Malfunction of fuse
or buzzer ECU. Furthermore, if there is a malfunction of a multipurpose fuse, the D Malfunction of connector
cause may also be a short circuit in a harness. D Malfunction of harness
OK
<Vehicles with ETACS-ECU> Replace ETACS-ECU.
MUT-II Pulse check
Ignition switch input inspection
OK: The MUT-II buzzer sounds once
<Vehicles with buzzer ECU>
when the ignition key is turned
to the ON from OFF position.
NG
NG Check the following connectors: NG

Disconnect the junction block connector Repair
B-76, B-79
B-76 and measure at the harness side.
D Voltage between the terminal No. OK
8 and body earth.
OK: System voltage Check trouble symptom.
NG
OK
NG
Junction block harness continuity check Replace
Check the harness wire between the
ignition switch (IG1) and junction block
and repair if necessary.
OK Replace the buzzer ECU.
Replace ETACS-ECU. NOTE
The stop indicated with a dotted line
applies only to vehicles with buzzer
ECU.

The key reminder warning buzzer dose not stop sounding Probable cause
even if the key is removed. (However, it stops when the
driver’s side door is closed.)
The cause is probably a malfunction of the key reminder switch input circuit system, D Malfunction of key reminder switch
or a malfunction of ETACS-ECU, or a malfunction of buzzer ECU. D Malfunction of connector
D Malfunction of harness
OK
<Vehicles with ETACS-ECU> Replace the ETACS-ECU.
MUT-II Pulse check
Ignition switch input inspection <Vehicles with buzzer ECU>
when the ignition key is removed
from the key cylinder.
NG
NG
Key reminder switch continuity inspec- Replace
tion (Refer to P. 54-12.)
OK
NO NG
Disconnect the key reminder switch Check the following connectors. Repair
connector and connect the terminal No. B-84, B-75, B-79
5 to the body earth. Does the buzzer OK
stop sounding?
YES Check trouble symptom
NG
NG
Check the following connectors. Replace
B-84, B-75
OK
Check the harness wire between the Inspect the harness between the key
key reminder switch and the body earth reminder switch and ETACS-ECU or
and repair if necessary. buzzer ECU, and repair if necessary.
OK OK
Replace the ETACS-ECU or the buzzer Check trouble symptom.

ECU.
Replace the buzzer ECU.
NOTE
ECU.

The key reminder warning buzzer dose not sound even if Probable cause
the driver’s side door is opened while the key is still
inserted. (However, the ignition key should be in the OFF
position.)
The cause is probably a malfunction of the door switch input circuit system, if the D Malfunction of door switch
key hole illumination lamp is also faulty. A malfunction of the key reminder switch D Malfunction of key reminder switch
input circuit system is also suspected. D Malfunction of connector
D Malfunction of harness
<Vehicles with ETACS-ECU> <Vehicles with buzzer ECU>

MUT-II Pulse check
Driver’s side door switch input signal
OK: The MUT-II buzzer sounds once Driver’s side door switch input circuit
NG
when the driver’s side door switch system inspection (Refer to Inspection
is turned to the ON position. Procedure 6 on P.54-10.)
OK OK
NG NG
<Vehicles with ETACS-ECU> Key reminder switch continuity inspec- Replace
MUT-II Pulse check tion (Refer to P.54-12.)
Key reminder switch input inspection OK
when the ignition key is removed Inspect the harness between the key NG
from the key cylinder. reminder switch and junction block. Repair
OK OK
Inspect the harness between the key NG

Repair
reminder switch and body earth.
NG
Junction block harness continuity check Repair
OK Replace the buzzer ECU.
Replace the ETACS-ECU. NOTE
ECU.
Driver’s side door switch input circuit system inspection
NG
Door switch inspection Replace
OK
NG NG
Disconnect the door switch connector Check the following connectors. Repair
D-03 and measure at the harness side. B-80, B-79
D Voltage between the terminal No.
OK
2 and body earth
Check trouble symptom. Check the harness between the ETACS-
OK ECU or buzzer ECU door switch and
repair if necessary.
Check the following connectors.
D-03
OK

NG
Replace the ETACS-ECU or the buzzer

ecu.

IGNITION SWITCH
11
10
12 8
9
5
6
3
2
1
ETACS-ECU or buzzer ECU removal Ignition switch removal steps

steps 4. Hood lock release handle
1. Cowl side trim (R.H.) 5. Driver side lower panel
2. Junction block 6. Column cover, lower
3. Buzzer control unit ETACS-ECU 7. Column cover, upper
8. Illumination ring or ring cover
9. Key hole illumination lamp bulb
AA" 10. Steering lock cylinder
11. Key reminder switch
12. Ignition switch


AA" STEERING LOCK CYLINDER REMOVAL
1. Insert the key in the steering lock cylinder and turn it
to the “ACC” position.
2. Using a cross-tip (+) screwdriver (small) or a similar tool,
push the lock pin of the steering lock cylinder inward
and then remove the steering lock cylinder.
Cross-tip (+) Lock pin
screwdriver
INSPECTION
IGNITION SWITCH CONTINUITY CHECK
Disconncect the ignition switch connector without removing
the ignition switch from the vehicle. Then, check the continuity
between the following terminals.
Ignition key Terminal No.

position 1 2 3 4 5 6
LOCK
ACC
ON
START
KEY REMINDER SWITCH CONTINUITY CHECK

Disconnect the key reminder switch connector with the switch
installed on the vehicle, and then check continuity.
1 2
Removed
Inserted

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Ignition Switch and Immobilizer System 54-13
IGNITION SWITCH AND IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

<EVOLUTION-VI WITH IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM>
SPECIAL TOOL
MB991502 MUT-II sub D Immobilizer system check
assembly (Diagnosis display using the MUT-II)
D Registration of the ID code
TROUBLESHOOTING
Caution
The ID code should always be re-registered when replacing the immobilizer-ECU.
STANDARD FLOW OF DIAGNOSIS TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to GROUP 00 – How To Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points.
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
DIAGNOSIS CODES CHECK
ERASING DIAGNOSIS CODES
Caution
The diagnosis codes which result from disconnecting the battery cables cannot be erased.
INSPECTION CHART FOR DIAGNOSIS CODES

Diagnosis code No. Inspection items Reference
page
11 Transponder communication system 54-14
12* ID code are not the same or are not registered 54-14
21 Communication system between MUT-II and engine-ECU 54-15
31 EEPROM abnormality inside immobilizer-ECU 54-15
NOTE
*: Diagnosis code No. 12 is not recorded.

54-14 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Ignition Switch and Immobilizer System
INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR DIAGNOSIS CODES

Code No. 11 Transponder communication system Probable cause
D The ID code of the transponder is not sent to the immobilizer-ECU immediately D Radio interference of ID codes
after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. D Malfunction of the transponder
D When starting the engine, one ignition key’s ID code interferes with another ignition D Malfunction of the ignition key ring antenna
key’s code. D Malfunction of harness or connector
D Malfunction of the immobilizer-ECU
Yes
Is there another ignition key near the Remove the extra ignition key.
ignition key that is inserted in the ignition
switch?
No Check trouble symptoms.
NG
OK
Does the engine start using the spare Replace the ignition key that does not Re-register the ID code.
ignition key which has had the ID code work. (Refer to P.54-21.)
registered?
NG
Code No. 12 occurs
Diagnosis codes check To INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR
DIAGNOSIS CODE No. 12
(Refer to P.54-14.)
Code No. 11 occurs
NG
Check the continuity of the ignition key Replace
ring antenna. (Refer to P.54-20.)
OK
NG
Check the following connectors. Repair
B-100, B-101
OK
NG NG
Check trouble symptoms. Check the harness wire between immo- Repair
bilizer-ECU and key ring antenna.
OK
Replace the immobilizer-ECU.
Code No. 12 ID code are not the same or are not registered Probable cause
The ID code which is sent from the transponder is not the same as the ID code D The ID code in the ignition key being used has not
which is registered in the immobilizer-ECU. been properly registered.
NG
Re-register the ID code. Check trouble symptoms. Replace the immobilizer-ECU.
(Refer to P.54-21.)

Code No. 21 Communication system between MUT-II and Probable cause
engine-ECU
After the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the confirmation code is not D Malfunction of harness or connector
received from the engine-ECU within the allowable time, or an abnormal code is received. D Malfunction of the engine-ECU
NO
Is diagnosis code No. 54 being gener- Check the engine-ECU power source
ated by the engine-ECU? and the earth circuit.
YES (Refer to GROUP 13A – Troubleshoot-
ing.)
NG
B-100, B-65, B-61
OK
NG NG
Check trouble symptoms. Check the harness wire between Repair
engine-ECU and immobilizer-ECU.
OK
Check trouble symptoms.

NG
Replace the immobilizer-ECU.
NG
Check trouble symptoms. Replace the engine-ECU.
Code No. 31 EEPROM abnormality inside immobilizer- Probable cause

ECU
No data has been written to the EEPROM inside the immobilizer-ECU. D Malfunction of the immobilizer-ECU
NG
Check trouble symptoms. Replace the immobilizer-ECU.


Trouble symptom Inspection procedure No. Reference page
Communication with MUT-II is impossible. 1 54-16
ID code cannot be registered using the MUT-II. 2 54-17
Engine does not start (Cranking but no initial combustion). 3 54-17
Malfunction of the immobilizer-ECU power source and earth circuit 4 54-18

Communication with MUT-II is impossible. Probable cause
The cause is probably that a malfunction of the diagnosis line or the immobilizer-ECU D Malfunction of the diagnosis line
is not functioning. D Malfunction of harness or connector
NO NG
Can the MUT-II communicate with the Check the following connectors. Repair
engine-ECU? B-100, B-22
YES OK

NG NG
Check the immobilizer-ECU connector Repair
B-100. NG
(Short-circuited harness wire between Check the harness wire between immo- Repair
terminal No. 13 and No. 14) bilizer-ECU and diagnosis connector.
OK OK
Check the immobilizer-ECU power sup-

ply and earth circuit. (Refer to INSPEC-
TION PROCEDURE 4.)
OK
NG
Check trouble symptoms. Replace the immobilizer-ECU.

ID code cannot be registered using the MUT-II. Probable cause
The cause is probably that there is no ID code registered in the immobilizer-ECU, D Malfunction of the transponder
or there is a malfunction of the immobilizer-ECU. D Malfunction of the ignition key ring antenna
D Malfunction of harness or connector
NO
No ignition key can be registered. Replace the ignition key that cannot be Re-register the ID code.
registered. (Refer to P.54-21.)
YES
NO
Is a diagnosis code output? To INSPECTION CHART FOR DIAG-
NOSIS CODE (Refer to P.54-13.)
YES
OK NG
Check the immobilizer-ECU power Check trouble symptoms. Replace the immobilizer-ECU.
source and earth circuit. (Refer to
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 4.)
Engine does not start (cranking but no initial combustion). Probable cause
If the fuel injectors are not operating, there might be a problem with the MPI system D Malfunction of the MPI system
in addition to a malfunction of the immobilizer system. D Malfunction of the immobilizer-ECU
It is normal for this to occur if an attempt is made to start the engine using a key
that has not been properly registered.
NO
Is a diagnosis code output from the To INSPECTION CHART FOR DIAG-
immobilizer-ECU? NOSIS CODE (Refer to P.54-13.)
YES
NO
Is a diagnosis code output from the Refer to GROUP 13A – Troubleshoot-
engine-ECU? ing.
YES
To inspection procedure for when there

is no initial combustion. (Refer to
GROUP 13A – Troubleshooting.)
OK

NG
OK NG
Check the immobilizer-ECU power sup- Check trouble symptoms. Replace the immobilizer-ECU.
ply and earth circuit (Refer to INSPEC-
TION PROCEDURE 4.)

Malfunction of the immobilizer-ECU power supply and earth circuit
(1) NG NG
Measure at the immobilizer-ECU con- Check the following connectors: Repair
nector B-100. B-76, B-74, B-100
OK
(1) Voltage between 2 and body earth
(2) Voltage between 1 and body earth NG
OK: System voltage Check the fuse and the harness wire Repair
(3) Continuity between 8 and body earth between the ignition switch (IG) and
OK: Continuity immobilizer-ECU.
OK
(3) NG (2) NG
NG
Check trouble symptoms. Check the ignition switch.
(Refer to P.54-20.)
NG
B-65, B-100
OK
NG
Check trouble symptoms. Check the harness wire between the
immobilizer-ECU and the engine control
relay, and repair if necessary.
NG
B-50, B-100
OK
NG
Check trouble symptoms. Check the harness wire between the
immobilizer-ECU and body earth, and
CHECK AT IMMOBILIZER-ECU
TERMINAL VOLTAGE CHECK CHART
Terminal No. Signal Checking requirements Terminal voltage
1 Immobilizer-ECU power supply Ignition switch: ON System voltage
2 Ignition switch-IG Ignition switch: OFF 0V
Ignition switch: ON System voltage
8 Immobilizer-ECU earth Always 0V

IGNITION SWITCH AND IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
Caution: SRS
Before removal of air bag module and clock spring, refer to GROUP 52B – SRS Service Precautions
and Air Bag Module and Clock Spring.
<L.H. drive vehicles>

4 6
3
4
<R.H. drive vehicles>
3
9
2 8
10
1
5
Immobilizer-ECU removal steps Ignition switch and ignition key

1. Hood lock release handle ring antenna removal steps
2. Driver‘s side lower cover 1. Hood lock release handle
D Radio and tape player <R.H drive 2. Driver‘s side lower cover
vehicles> 4. Steering wheel
D Heater control assembly <R.H. drive 5. Column cover, lower
vehicles> 6. Column cover, upper
3. Immobilizer-ECU 7. Column switch
8. Ignition key ring antenna
AA" 9. Steering lock cylinder
10. Ignition switch


AA" STEERING LOCK CYLINDER REMOVAL
1. Insert the key in the steering lock cylinder and turn it
to the “ACC” position.
2. Using a cross-tip (+) screwdriver (small) or a similar tool,
push the lock pin of the steering lock cylinder inward
and then pull the steering lock cylinder toward you.
Cross-tip (+)
screwdriver
INSPECTION
IGNITION SWITCH CONTINUITY CHECK
1. Remove the column cover lower and upper.
2. Disconnect the wiring connector from the ignition switch.
3. Operate the switch, and check the continuity between
the terminals.

position 1 2 3 5 6
LOCK
ACC
ON
START
IGNITION KEY RING ANTENNA CONTINUITY CHECK

Use a circuit tester to check the continuity between the
terminals.

ID CODE REGISTRATION METHOD
If using an ignition key that has just been newly purchased,
or if the immobilizer-ECU has been replaced, you will need
to register the ID codes for each ignition key being used
into the immobilizer-ECU. (A maximum of eight different ID
codes can be registered.)
Moreover, when the immobilizer-ECU has been replaced, you
will need to use the MUT-II to register the password that
the user specifies into the immobilizer-ECU. (Refer to the
MUT-II instruction manual for instructions on using the MUT-II.)
Caution
If registering of the ID codes is carried out all
previously-registered codes will be erased. Accordingly,
you should have ready all of the ignition keys that have
already been registered.
1. Connect the MUT-II to the diagnosis connector.

MUT-II Caution
Turn the ignition switch off before connecting or
disconnecting the MUT-II.
2. Check that the diagnosis code No.54 is not displayed
for MPI system. If the code is displayed, carry out
troubleshooting before proceeding to the next step. (Refer
to GROUP 13A – Troubleshooting).
3. Use the ignition key that is to be registered to turn the
ignition switch to the ON position.
4. Use the MUT-II to register the ID code. If you are
registering two or more codes, use the next key to be
registered to turn the ignition switch to the ON position
without disconnecting the MUT-II.
5. Disconnect the MUT-II. This completes the registration
operation.
6. Check that the engine can be started by each one of
the ignition keys.
7. Check that the diagnosis code No.54 is not displayed
for MPI system. If the code is displayed, erase it. (Refer
to GROUP 13A – Troubleshooting).

54-22 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Combination Meters
COMBINATION METERS
Speedometer Allowable indication range km/h 40 37 – 45 –
(Speedometer indication error to be
with –6% to +10%)) 80 75 – 88 –
120 113 – 132 –
160 150 – 176 –
Pointer fluctuation km/h (at vehicle speeds of higher than 35 – ±3
km/h)
Tachometer indica- 700 All types of tachometer ± 100 –
tion error r/min
3,000 Meters measurable up to 6,000 rpm and + 150 –
meters measurable up to 8,000 rpm
Meters measurable up to 9,000 rpm and + 225 –
meters measurable up to 10,000 rpm – 100
4,750 Meters measurable up to 6,000 rpm ± 160 –
Meters measurable up to 9,000 rpm and + 325 –
7,000 Meters measurable up to 9,000 rpm and + 400 –
8,000 Meters measurable up to 10,000 rpm + 400 –
–0
Fuel gauge unit Main tank Float point F 1.8 ± 1.2 –
resistance Ω
Float point E 65.2 ± 4 –
Sub tank Float point F 1.2 ± 0.8 –
Float point E 44.8 ± 3 –
Fuel gauge unit Main tank Float point F 16.4 –
float height mm
Float point E 122.6 –
Sub tank Float point F 17.5 –
Float point E 134.6 –
Engine coolant temperature gauge unit resistance (at 70 _C) Ω 104 ± 13.5 –
Fuel gauge resis- Power supply and earth 192 ± 19.2 –
tance Ω
Power supply and fuel gauge 89 ± 8.9 –
Fuel gauge and earth 103 ± 10.3 –
Engine coolant Power supply and earth 187 ± 18.7 –
temperature gauge
resistance Ω Power supply and engine coolant temperature gauge 90 ± 4.5 –
Engine coolant temperature gauge and earth 247 ± 24.7 –

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Combination Meters 54-23
SEALANT
Items Specified sealant Remark
Engine coolant temperature gauge 3M Adhesive nut locking No. 4171 or Drying sealant
unit threaded portion equivalent
SPECIAL TOOLS
MB991223 Harness set Fuel gauge simple check
A A: MB991219 A: Test harness A: Connector pin contact pressure check
B: MB991220 B: LED harness B, C: Power circuit check
C: MB991221 C: LED harness D: Commercial tester connection
D: MB991222 adapter
D: Probe

TROUBLESHOOTING
Trouble symptom Inspection Reference
procedure page
Speedometer does not work. 1 54-24
Tachometer does not work. 2 54-25

Speedometer does not work. Probable cause
Examine the diagnosis codes registered in the engine-ECU. If no wheel speed D Malfunction of vehicle speed sensor
sensor-relating diagnosis code has been output, the wheel speed sensors are in order. D Malfunction of speedometer
D Malfunction of harness or connector
D Malfunction of relevant ECU
MUT-II Self-Diag code YES

Vehicle speed sensor circuit system
Is the diagnosis code 24 relating to MPI inspection (Refer to Inspection
system output? Procedure 3 on P.54-26.)
OK
1. NG NG
Disconnect the combination meter con- Check the following connectors. Repair
nectors B-08 or B-09 and measure at B-09, B-50
the harness sides.
1. Continuity between the terminal OK
No.11 and earth
OK: Continuity
2. Voltage between terminal No.51 and NG
earth.
OK: 4.7 V or more Check the harness between the body
3. Voltage between the terminal No.22 earth and combination meter, and repair
and earth if necessary.
OK: System voltage
2. NG NG
B-08, B-64, A-19
OK
OK
Replace the speedometer. Check trouble symptom.

NG
Check the harness between the com-
bination meter and the vehicle speed
sensor, repair if necessary.
3. NG NG
B-09, B-49, B-75, B-73
OK

NG
Check the harness between the power
supply and combination meter, and

Tachometer does not work. Probable cause
The ignition signal may not be input from the engine, or there may be a malfunction D Malfunction of tachometer
in the power supply or earth circuit. D Malfunction of harness or connector
MUT-II Self-Diag code YES

Refer to Group 13 – Troubleshooting,
Is the diagnosis code 44 relating to MPI No. 44 Ignition coils and power
system output? transistors.
OK
1. NG NG
Disconnect the combination meter con- Check the following connectors. Repair
nector B-08 and measure at the harness B-08, A-36, B-61, B-64, A-41, A-109
sides.
OK
1. Measure the voltage between
terminal No.33 and earth. NG
Check trouble symptom. Check the harness between the engine-
OK: 5 V
ECU and combination meter, and repair
2. Continuity between the terminal
if necessary.
No.34 and earth
OK: Continuity
3. Voltage between the terminal No.42
and earth 2. NG NG
OK: System voltage Check the following connectors. Repair
B-08, B-50, B-64, A-41
OK 3. NG OK
NG
Check trouble symptom. Check the harness between the com-
bination meter and the body earth, and
NG
B-08, B-75, B-76
OK
Replace the tachometer. NG
Check trouble symptom. Check the harness between the power
supply and combination meter, and

Vehicle speed sensor circuit system inspection
Signals from the vehicle speed sensor are utilized both in the speedometer and the engine-ECU.
NG
Vehicle speed sensor inspection (Refer to P.54-27.) Replace
OK
1. NG NG
Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor connector A-19 and measure Check the following Repair
at the harness side. connectors. A-19, B-64
1. Voltage between the terminal No.1 and earth
OK: System voltage OK
2. Continuity between terminal No.2 and earth
OK: Continuity Check trouble symptom.
3. Voltage between the terminal No.3 and earth
OK: 4.5 V or more NG
3. NG Check the harness wire between the vehicle speed sensor and
NG multi-purpose fuse 4, and repair if necessary.
connectors. A-19, B-64,
B-08 2. NG NG
OK connector. A-19
Check trouble symptom. OK
NG Check trouble symptom.
Check the harness between the vehicle speed sensor and combina- NG
tion meter, and repair if necessary.
Check the harness wire between the vehicle speed sensor and
body earth, and repair if necessary.
NOTE
If the trouble symptom still persists even after the above procedures are performed, check the vehicle
speed senosor output signal side circuit (harness, speedometer and engine ECU) for short-circuit.

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
SPEEDOMETER CHECK
1. Adjust the pressure of the tyres to the specified level.
2. Set the vehicle onto a speedometer tester and use wheel
chocks to hold the rear wheels.
Wheel chocks
3. Pull the parking brake lever firmly.
4. To prevent the front wheel from moving from side to side,

Tie-down hook
attach tension bars to the tie-down hook, and secure
Tension bar both ends to anchor plates.
5. To prevent the vehicles from starting, attach a chain or
wire to the rear towing hook, and secure the other end
Front of the chain or wire firmly to an unmovable body.
Anchor plate 6. Check if the speedometer indication range is within the
standard values and if the pointer fluctuation is within
the limits.
Caution
Do not operate the clutch suddenly. Do not
increase/decrease speed rapidly while testing.
Standard values:
Vehicle speed km/h Speedometer indication
allowable errors km/h
40 37 – 45
80 75 – 88
120 113 – 132
160 150 – 176
Limit: Pointer fluctuation

(at vehicle speeds of higher than 35 km/h) ±3 km/h
TACHOMETER CHECK
Engine speed detection
connector 1. Insert a paper clip in the engine speed detection connector
from the harness side, and attach the engine
speedometer.
2. Compare the readings of the engine speedometer and
the tachometer at every engine speed, and check if the
variations are within the standard values.
Standard values:
700 r/min : ±100 r/min
3,000 *1 r/min : ±150 r/min
3,000 *2 r/min : +225 to –100 r/min
5,000 *1 r/min : ±250 r/min
5,000 *2 r/min : +325 to –125 r/min
6,000 *1 r/min : ±300 r/min
7,000 *2 r/min : +400 to –100 r/min
8,000 *3 r/min : +400 to 0 r/min
NOTE
*1: Tachometer measurable up to 8,000 r/min
*2: Tachometer measurable up to 9,000 r/min and one measurable up to 10,000 r/min
*3: Tachometer measureble up to 10,000 r/min

FUEL GAUGE SIMPLE CHECK

Remove the fuel gauge unit connector.
Use the special tool to connect a test

lamp (12 V – 3.4 W) to the harness
connector. (Refer to Fig.1)
OK OK
When the ignition switch is turned to The needle of the fuel gauge moves. Replace the fuel gauge unit.
ON, the test lamp illuminates.
NG
NG
Replace the fuel gauge.
Repair the harness.
Fig: 1 Fuel gauge

Earth
Test lamp
(12V – 3.4W)
MB991219 Fuel gauge
Earth
Main fuel gauge unit Sub fuel gauge unit FUEL GAUGE UNIT CHECK
Remove the fuel gauge unit from the fuel tank.
Fuel gauge unit Fuel gauge unit FUEL GAUGE UNIT RESISTANCE
1. Check that resistance value between the fuel gauge unit
terminal and earth terminal is at standard value when
fuel gauge unit float is at point F and point E.
Earth Earth
Standard value:
Float position Main Sub
Point F 1.8 ± 1.2 Ω 1.2 ± 0.8 Ω
Point E 65.2 ± 4 Ω 44.8 ± 8 Ω
2. Check that resistance value changes smoothly when float

moves slowly between point F and point E.

FUEL GAUGE UNIT FLOAT HEIGHT
Move float and measure the height at point F (A) and at
A point E (B) with float arm touching stopper.
Stopper
Standard value:
Point F
B Float position Main Sub
Point E Stopper Point F 16.4 17.5
Point E 122.6 134.6
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR (THERMISTOR)

Thermistor 1. Connect a test lamp (12V – 3.4W) to the fuel gauge
Earth unit connector terminal and apply the battery voltage.
Test lamp
(12V – 3.4 W)
2. Condition is good if lamp goes off when the thermistor

Thermistor is immersed in water and goes on when it is taken out
of water.
Lamp goes on
Lamp goes off
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE SIMPLE CHECK

Remove the engine coolant tempara-
ture gauge unit connector.
Connect a test lamp (12 V – 3.4 W)

between the harness side connector
and the earth.
OK NG
When the ignition switch is turned to The needle of the engine coolant tem- Replace the engine coolant tempera-
ON, the test lamp illuminates. perature gauge moves. ture gauge.
NG OK
Repair the harness. Replace the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge unit.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE UNIT

Thermometer Circuit tester
CHECK
1. Bleed the engine coolant.
2. Remove the engine coolant temperature gauge unit.
3. Immerse the unit in 70_C water to measure the resistance.
Standard value: 104 ± 13.5 Ω
4. After checking, apply the specified adhesive around the

thread of engine coolant temperature gauge unit. Then,
tighten the unit to the specified torque.
Specified sealant:
3M Adhesive Nut Locking No. 4171 or equivalent
5. Add engine coolant.
10 – 12 Nm
COMBINATION METERS
2 3
Vehicle speed sensor removal Combination meter removal steps

steps 2. Meter bezel
D Battery and battery tray 3. Combination meter
D Air cleaner assembly
1. Vehicle speed sensor

INSPECTION
FUEL GAUGE RESISTANCE CHECK
Power 1. Remove the power supply tightening screw.
supply 2. Use a circuit tester to measure the resistance value
between the terminals.
Fuel gauge Standard value: Unit: Ω
Measurement terminal Resistance value
Earth Power supply – Earth 192±19.2
Power supply – Fuel gauge 89±8.9
Fuel gauge – Earth 103±10.3
Power Caution
supply When inserting the testing probe into the power supply
terminal, be careful not to touch the printed board.
Engine
coolant
temperature ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
gauge RESISTANCE CHECK
Earth
1. Remove the power supply tightening screw.
2. Use a circuit tester to measure the resistance value
between the terminals.
Standard value: Unit: Ω
Measurement terminal Resistance value
Power supply – Earth 187±18.7
Power supply – Engine coolant 90±4.5
temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature 247±24.7
gauge – Earth
Caution
When inserting the testing probe into the power supply
terminal, be careful not to touch the printed board.
Terminal No. Turn Shaft VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CHECK

1. Connect a 3 – 10 kΩ resistance as shown in the illustration.
Vehicle
2. Turn the shaft of the vehicle speed sensor one turn and
16R0273 speed check that voltage changes are caused when measured
sensor between terminals 2 and 3 using a circuit tester. (1 turn
= 4 pulses)
Resistance
3 – 10 kΩ
Circuit tester
Battery

54-32 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Headlamp
HEADLAMP
Headlamp High Vertical direction 25’ (22 mm) below horizontal line –
aiming beam
[Parenthe- Horizontal Left head- Parallel to direction of vehicle travel –
sized are direction lamp
allowable
beam axis Right head- 15’ (13 mm) leftward from vertical line (V) –
deviations 3 lamp
m ahead of
headlamp.]
p] Low Vertical direction 25’ (22 mm) below horizontal line –
beam
Horizontal direction Position where 15* rising section intersects –
vertical line (V)
Headlamp intensity cd (Center of high-beam high intensity – 15,000 or

zone) more per
light
Cautions in Handling Headlamp Assembly

Each headlamp assembly has a plastic outer lens on. Observe the do’s and don’ts below when
handling the headlamps.
D Do not leave the headlamps lit for longer than 3 minutes with a protective cover on.
D Do not mask the outer lens surface by taping or in any other way.
D Do not scrub the outer lens surface with a pointed tool.
D Use the designated wax remover for cleaning the outer lens surface. Rinse it thoroughly.
D Use the designated genuine bulbs.
SPECIAL TOOLS
MB991502 MUT-II sub as- ETACS-ECU input signal checking
sembly

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Headlamp 54-33
TROUBLESHOOTING
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
INPUT SIGNAL INSPECTION POINTS <VEHICLES WITH ETACS-ECU>
Refer to Group 00 – How to Use Troubleshooting / Inspection Service Points.
The lighting monitor buzzer does not sound even when Probable cause
the ignition key is removed with the tail lamps or
headlamps ON and the driver’s side door open. [However,
the key reminder warning buzzer sounds when inserting
the key into the ignition key cylinder.
The cause is probably a malfunction of the lighting switch input circuit system or D Malfunction of harness or connector
a malfunction of ETACS-ECU or buzzer ECU. When the key reminder warning buzzer D Malfunction of ETACS-ECU
is sounding, the lighting monitor warning buzzer does not sound even if the tail lamps D Malfunction of buzzer ECU
or headlamps are lit.
<Vehicles with buzzer ECU>

<Vehicles with ETACS-ECU>
NG
MUT-II Pulse check
NG
OK: MUT-II buzzer sounds once Check the following connectors. NG
when the lighting switch is B-79 Repair
turned from OFF to TAIL or
HEAD. OK
OK Check trouble symptom.
Replace the ETACS-ECU. NG

Check the harness in the junction block. NG
Repair
OK
Replace the ETACS-ECU or the buzzer

ECU.

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
HEADLAMP AIMING
Bring the vehicle in the following conditions before aiming
the headlamp.
D Check the tires for inflation pressure. Pump them up if
necessary to the labeled pressure level.
D Set the vehicle unladen on a level floor.
D Place one person (approximately 55 kg) on the driver’s
seat.
1. Position the tester so that its converging lens faces the

high-beam lamp (f marked) center to center at a distance
Face the face 3 m apart from each other of 3 m from each other.
Lamp center
16M0001
2. Aim the headlamps to appropriate standard values using

the aiming adjustment screw.
Vertical
adjust-
ment
Horizontal adjustment

Standard values:
<Left headlamp>
V Vertical direction 25’ (22 mm) below hori-

Lamp center zontal line (H)
H Horizontal Left headlamp Parallel to direction of

direction vehicle travel
Vertical direction Right head- 15’ (13 mm) leftward
High lamp from vertical line (V)
intensity High intensity zone
zone Caution:
center (1) Perform aiming adjustments, one light at a time,
(optical with the other headlamp disconnected so as not
axis) to be lit unless circumstances compel otherwise.
When reconnecting the headlamps, be careful not
<Right headlamp> V
to upset their aim. Do not leave the headlamps
Lamp center
on for any longer than 3 minutes if their outer
H lenses are covered with a surface covering
impervious to light.
High
Vertical direction (2) Do not mask the outer lenses by taping or in any
intensity
other way.
zone High intensity zone (3) Aiming adjustment must be completed with the
center
aiming adjustment screws turned in the tightening
(optical
direction.
axis)
Screen type tester: 3 m Converging INTENSITY MEASUREMENT

lens type tester: 1 m 1. Position the tester so that its light sensor faces each
headlamp center to center at the appropriate distance
shown.
2. Maintain an engine speed of 2,000 r/minto keep the battery
in the charged condition.
3. Check that the high-beam headlamp intensity at the center
of the high intensity zone satisfies the limit value.
Limit: 15,000 cd or more per headlamp
Caution
(1) Perform intensity measurement, one headlamp at
a time, with the low-beam lamp and the other
headlamp disconnected from the battery unless
circumstances compel otherwise. Do not leave
the headlamps on for any longer than 3 minutes
if their outer lenses are covered with a surface
covering impervious to light.
(2) Do not mask the outer lens surfaces by taping
or in any other way.
HEADLAMP BULB REPLACEMENT

Spring
1. Disconnect the connector.
2. Remove the socket cover.
3. Unhook the spring which secures the bulb, and then
remove the bulb.
Caution
Do not touch the surface of the bulb with hands or
dirty gloves. If the surface does become dirty, clean
it with alcohol or thinner, and let it dry thoroughly
before installing.

4. After the bulb is replaced, reinstall the socket cover with

the TOP mark facing upward.
Position lamp connector
NOTE
To prevent the clouding of lens and ingress of water into
the lamp unit, install the socket cover correctly.
POSITION LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT

Remove the position lamp by turning it together with the lamp
socket, then replace its bulb.
HEADLAMP AND FRONT TURN-SIGNAL LAMP

CAUTION: SRS
Before removal of air bag module and clock spring, refer to GROUP 52B – SRS Service Precautions and Air
Bag Module and Clock Spring.
5 Nm
5 Nm
3
1
4
1. Column switch Removal steps

AA" 2. Front turn-signal lamp
3. Radiator grille
"AA 4. Headlamp

Tapping screw AA" FRONT TURN-SIGNAL LAMP REMOVAL
1. Loosen the tapping screw connecting the headlamp to
the front turn-signal lamp. Put a screwdriver in the space
produced between the headlmap and the front turn-signal
lamp.
2. Prying the screwdriver in the direction shown, thrust the

front turn-signal lamp in the direction of the vehicle.
3. Unplug the connector and remove the front turn-signal
lamp.

C "AA HEADLAMP INSTALLATION
A Tighten attaching bolts and nuts in the order of A, B, C and
D.
B
Connector A Connector B INSPECTION

LIGHTING SWITCH, DIMMER/PASSING SWITCH
CONTINUITY CHECK

Connector A Connector B
5 6 7 1 2 3 4 6
LIGHTING OFF
SWITCH
TAIL
HEAD
DIMMER/ LOWER
PASSING
UPPER
SWITCH
PASSING

HEADLAMP RELAY CONTINUITYCHECK
Battery voltage Terminal No.

1 3 4 5
Not supplied
Supplied
Headlamp relay

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Front Fog Lamp 54-39
FRONT FOG LAMP

Headlamp aiming [Paren- Vertical direction 2° (349 mm) below horizontal line (H)
tthesized are allowable
beam axis deviations 10 m
Horizontal direction 3° (524 mm) leftward from vertical line (V)
ahead of headlamp.]
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
HEADLAMP AIMING
Bring the vehicle in the following conditions before aiming
the headlamp.
D Check the tires for inflation pressure. Pump them up if
necessary to the labeled pressure level.
D Set the vehicle unladen on a level floor.
D Place one person (approximately 55 kg) on the driver’s
seat.
D Maintain an engine speed of 2,000 r/min to keep the
battery in the charged condition.
1. Position the tester so that its converging lens faces the
fog lamp center to center at a distance of 10 m.
Face to face 10 m apart from
each other
NOTE
Measure the center of the fog lamp as shown.
A: 572.5 mm (from the center of the vehicle body)
B: 360 mm
A A
Adjusting screw 2. Remove the fog lamp bezel, and using the aiming
adjustment screw, aim the fog lamp to the standard value.
NOTE
The horizontal direction is non-adjustable. If the beam
axis deviation exceeds the standard value, check the
fog lamp to determine if it is installed out of position and
correct if necessary.

54-40 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Front Fog Lamp
Lamp center Standard values:

V
H Vertical direction 2° (349 mm) below horizontal line
High intensity zone Vertical (H)
direction Horizontal direction 3° (524 mm) leftward from
High vertical line (V)
intensity
zone Caution:
center (1) Perform aiming adjustments, one light at a time,
(optical with the other headlamp disconnected so as not
Horizontal direction
axis) to be lit unless circumstances compel otherwise.
When reconnecting the headlamps, be careful not
to upset their aim. Do not leave the headlamps
on for any longer than 3 minutes if their outer
lenses are covered with a surface covering
impervious to light.
(2) Do not mask the outer lenses by taping or in any
other way.
(3) Aiming adjustment must be completed with the
aiming adjustment screws turned in the tightening
direction.
Cover FOG LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the fog lamp.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Unhook the spring which secures the bulb and then
replace the bulb.
Caution
(1) Do not touch the surface of the bulb with hands
or dirty gloves. If the surface does become dirty,
clean it with alcohol or thinner, and let it dry
thoroughly before installing.
(2) To prevent the clouding of lens and ingress of
water into the lamp unit, install the socket cover
correctly.

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Front Fog Lamp 54-41
FOG LAMP
2
1
4
1. Front fog lamp switch Fog lamp removal steps

2. Front bumper
3. Fog lamp bezel
4. Fog lamp assembly
INSPECTION
FOG LAMP SWITCH CONTINUITY CHECK
Switch position
p Terminal No.
1 2 3 4 – 5 6
OFF ILL
ON
ILL

54-42 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Rear Combination Lamp
REAR COMBINATION LAMP

TROUBLESHOOTING
For the troubleshooting of the lighting monitor warning buzzer, refer to P.54-33.
REAR COMBINATION LAMP

Caution: SRS
Before removal of air bag module and clock spring, refer to GROUP 52B – SRS Service Precautions and Air Bag
Module and Clock Spring.
1. Column switch Rear combination lamp removal

steps
2. Rear end trim
3. Rear combination lamp
Connector A Connector B INSPECTION

LIGHTING SWITCH CONTINUITY CHECK

Connector B Connector A
5 6 7 1
LIGHTING OFF
SWITCH
TAIL
HEAD

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Side Turn-signal Lamp 54-43
SIDE TURN-SIGNAL LAMP

SPECIAL TOOL
MB990784 Ornament remover Removal of side turn-signal lamp
MB990784 SIDE TURN-SIGNAL LAMP

MB990784
REMOVAL
Lock
Fender panel
INSTALLATION
Lock Fit the hook side rearward.
Hook
Fender
panel

54-44 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Hazard Warning Lamp Switch, Clock
HAZARD WARNING LAMP SWITCH, CLOCK

SPECIAL TOOL
MB990784 Ornament remover Air conditioner panel removal
HAZARD WARNING LAMP SWITCH

2
3
Hazard warning lamp switch Clock removal steps

removal steps 1. Air conditioner panel
1. Air conditioner panel 4. Clock
2. Switch holder
3. Hazard warning lamp switch
INSPECTION
HAZARD WARNING LAMP SWITCH CONTINUITY
CHECK
Switch Terminal No.

position
iti
1 2 4 5 6 7 9 – 10
OFF ILL
ON ILL

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Radio and Tape Player 54-45
RADIO AND TAPE PLAYER

TROUBLESHOOTING
There is noise when the engine is running.
Kind of Noise (Parenthe- Symptom Cause Remedy

sized is how noise
sounds.)
AM, FM: Ignition noise D Popping sound becomes D Mainly due to the Check the noise capacitor
(Popping, snapping, faster with the increase spark plugs. and earth cable and
crackling, buzzing) of engine speed. D Due to noise circula- replace if necessary. (See
D The noise is lost with tion from elsewhere Fig. 1 and Fig. 2.)
ignition switch turned to D Noise from the engine
ACC.
AM, FM: Defogger noise Occurs when the defogger Noise produced by spark- Check the noise capacitor
(1) (Murmuring) switch is turned to ON and ing when the defogger and replace if necessary.
OFF. switch is turned to ON/ (See Fig. 1.)
OFF enters the glass
antenna.
AM, FM: Defogger noise Occurs when the defogger Noise produced by current Check the choke coil and
(2) (Snapping noise) switch is turned to ON. flowing in the defogger replace if necessary.
enters the glass antenna. (See Fig. 3.)
AM, FM: Defogger noise Occurs when the defogger Noise produced by spark- Repair the print heater.
(3) (Scratching, gaggling) switch is turned to ON with ing where print heater is
print heater wire broken. broken enters the glass
antenna.
AM, FM: Wiper motor Sound becomes faster with Caused by sparking in Replace the wiper motor.
noise (Humming, wheez- the increase of wiper speed wiper motor brush.
ing) and is lost when the wiper is
stopped.
FM: Mirror motor noise Occurs when electric mirror Caused by sparking in Replace the electric
(Humming, wheezing) operates. mirror motor brush. motor.
Other electrical compo- – Noise is emitted by some Repair or replace electri-

nents electrical components in cal components.
long use.
Static electricity (Crack- D Noise is stopped when Occurs when parts or Put parts or wiring into
ling, crinkling) the vehicle comes to a wiring move for some position.
complete stop. reason and contact metal
D Noise becomes louder parts of the body.
when the clutch is
released.
Various noises are produced Due to electrical detach- Tighten mounting bolts
by body parts. ment of the hood, exhaust securely. In many cases,
pipe and muffler, suspen- remedy of one part does
sion, etc. from the body. not eliminate the problem
due to incomplete earthing
elsewhere.
Caution
(1) Never let the noise filter contact a high tension cable. The noise filter could break down.
(2) Check that there is no external noise. This check is necessary to prevent misidentification of noise
sources.
(3) Noise prevention should be performed by eliminating noise sources in the descending order of loudness.

54-46 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Radio and Tape Player
NOTE
1. Noise Suppressing Capacitor
The capacitor does not allow the passage of DC current but AC current. It decreases in impedance (resistance
to AC) as the number of waves increases, making the AC flow easier. A noise suppressing capacitor relying
on this property to function is inserted between a noise generating power line and earthing line to suppress
noise by earthing noise components (in AC or pulse signal) to the vehicle body.
2. Noise Filter
The coil allows the passage of DC current and increases in impedance (resistance to AC) as the number of
waves increases. A noise suppressing coil relying on this property to function is inserted somewhere in a noise
generating power line, preventing noise components from flowing or radiating from the line.
Fig: 1 Fig: 3
Noise condensor
Choke coil
Fig: 2
Choke coil

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Radio and Tape Player / Speaker 54-47
RADIO AND TAPE PLAYER
2
3
Removal steps
1. Radio panel
2. Radio and tape player
3. Radio bracket
SPEAKER
3
2
Removal steps
1. Door trim 4. Speaker brakcet
2. Speaker 5. Tweeter speaker
3. Speaker cover

54-48 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Speaker / Antenna
<REAR SPEAKER>
Rear shelf speaker removal steps

6. Speaker garnish 7. Speaker
ANTENNA
POLE ANTENNA
1
7
4
Removal steps 5. Driver side lower cover

1. Pole 6. Clip
2. Radio panel 7. Cowl side trim
3. Radio and tape player AA" 8. Antenna assembly
4. Hood lock release handle 9. Antenna base gasket

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Antenna 54-49
AA" ANTENNA ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
To facilitate the installation work of the antenna assembly,
Feeder cable perform the following before removing the feeder cable:
1. Tie a cord to the end of the feeder cable.
Cord
2. Pull out the antenna assembly until the end of the drain
pipe can be seen.
Cord 3. Pass the cord through the hole in the end of the drain
Tape pipe and wrap it with vinyl tape.
Caution
Wrap it securely so that the cord will not come off.
Hole
4. Pull out the antenna assembly little by little to remove
it.
REAR WINDOW ANTENNA AND GLASS DIVERSITY ANTENNA

1 2
Removal steps
D Glove box D Assist grip
D Front pillar trim (LH), center pillar trim 1. Radio and tape player
(LH), rear pillar trim (LH) AA" 2. Antenna assembly

54-50 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Antenna / Rear Window Defogger

AA" ANTENNA AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
Take off the left-hand edge of the hand lining and undo the
clips of the antenna amplifier assembly.
Normal characteristic curve REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

Voltage
TROUBLESHOOTING <VEHICLES
A (Centre point)
WITH AUTOMATIC A/C>
approx. 6 V
Refer to GROUP 55.
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Positive Negative
terminal terminal PRINTED-HEATER CHECK
Printed heater line
1. Run engine at 2,000 r/min. Check heater element with
Abnormal characteristic curve
battery at full.
Voltage 2. Turn ON rear window defogger switch. Measure heater
Open-circuit element voltage with circuit tester at rear window glass
point centre A.
Condition is good if it indicates about 6V.
3. If 12 V is indicated at A, there is a break in the negative
terminals from A.
Move test bar slowly to negative terminal to detect where
Positive Negative
terminal terminal
voltage changes suddenly (0V).
Printed heater line 4. If 0 V is indicated at A, there is a break in the positive
terminals from A. Defect where the voltage changes
suddenly (12 V) in the same method described above.
DEFOGGER RELAY CONTINUITY CHECK
Terminal No.
Battery voltage
1 3 2 5
Power is not supplied
Defogger relay
Power is supplied
Junction block

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL – Rear Window Defogger 54-51
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
<VEHICLES WITH AUTOMATIC A/C>
Refer to GROUP – Heater Control Assembly.
OFF ←→ ON INSPECTION
DEFOGGER SWITCH CONTINUITY CHECK
Switch Terminal No.

position
iti
1 2 – 3 4 – 6
OFF ILL
ON ILL
IND

Lancer Evolutioniv

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lancer Evolutioniv

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lancer Evolutioniv

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WORKSHOP MANUAL

Pub. No. S9806CNCP9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

EVOLUTION-V Engine Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

E-CN9A SNDF ’97 RS 4G63 (2,000-DOHC – W5M51 Electronically

GF-CP9A SNDF ’98 EVOLUTION-V RS 4G63 (2,000-DOHC – W5M51 MPI

Applicable serial numbers

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CRANKSHAFT PULLEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

SEALANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Basic ignition timing 5_ BTDC ± 3_ –

Ignition timing (at idle) Approx. 5_ BTDC –

Idle speed rpm 850 ± 50 –

CO contents % 0.6 or less –

HC contents ppm 300 or less –

Compression pressure kg/cm2 – rpm 11.5 – 250 Min. 9.7 – 250

Compression pressure difference of all cylinders kg/cm2 – Max. 1.0

Intake manifold vacuum kPa {mmHg} – Min. 55 {410}

Cylinder head bolt shank length mm – 99.4

MB990767 End yoke holder D Holding the crankshaft pulley

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tool Number Name Use

MD998715 Pulley holder pin

MD998713 Camshaft oil seal Pressfitting the camshaft oil seal

MD998727 Oil pan remover Removing the oil pan

MD998781 Flywheel stopper Securing the flywheel or drive plate

MD998285 Crankshaft front oil

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tool Number Name Use

MD998767 Tensioner pulley Timing belt tension adjustment

Recommended Engine lifter Supporting the engine assembly during

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

f. Push the part of the rocker arm which contacts the

(4) Lash adjuster replacement

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5. IGNITION TIMING CHECK

6. IDLE SPEED CHECK AND IDLE MIXTURE

7. COMPRESSION PRESSURE CHECK

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

(5) Set compression gauge to one of the spark plug holes.

8. MANIFOLD VACUUM CHECK

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Timing belt side

Semi-drying sealant: THREEBOND 1207D

Semi-drying sealant: Timing belt side

REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

"BA CAM CAP / REAR CAP / FRONT CAM CAP

Intake side Exhaust side

(2) Temporarily tighten cam cap in two to three steps, then